10-K

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

FORM 10-K

ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d)

OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2008

Commission file number 0-50034

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

Delaware	36-4108550
(State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)	(I.R.S. Employer Identification Number)

9550 West Higgins Road

Rosemont, Illinois 60018

(Address, including zip code, of principal executive offices)

(847) 653-7978

(Registrant’s telephone number, including area code)

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

Common Stock, par value $0.01 per share	The NASDAQ Stock Market, LLC
(Title of Class)	(Name of Exchange Which Registered)

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.    Yes  ¨    No  x

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Exchange Act.    Yes  ¨    No  x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes  x    No  ¨

Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K (§ 229.405 of this chapter) is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K.  ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See definition of “accelerated filer,” “large accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.

Large accelerated filer  ¨ Accelerated filer   ¨ Non-accelerated filer   ¨ Smaller reporting company   x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Exchange Act Rule 12b-2).    Yes  ¨    No  x

The aggregate market value of the voting and non-voting common equity held by non-affiliates of the registrant, based on the closing sales price on The Nasdaq Global Select Market on June 30, 2008, the last business day of the registrant’s most recently completed second fiscal quarter was approximately $43,122,889.

At March 9, 2009, there were 11,105,425 shares of the registrant’s common stock outstanding.

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE

Portions of the registrant’s Notice of Annual Meeting and Proxy Statement for the registrant’s Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be held on June 11, 2009 are incorporated by reference into Part III hereof.

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

INDEX

		Page No.
Part I.
Item 1.	Business	1
Item 1A.	Risk Factors	11
Item 1B.	Unresolved Staff Comments	18
Item 2.	Properties	19
Item 3.	Legal Proceedings	19
Item 4.	Submission of Matters to a Vote of Security Holders	19
Part II.
Item 5.	Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities	20
Item 6.	Selected Financial Data	22
Item 7.	Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations	24
Item 7A.	Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk.	71
Item 8.	Financial Statements and Supplementary Data	72
Item 9.	Changes in and Disagreements With Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure	123
Item 9A.	Controls and Procedures	123
Item 9B.	Other Information	124
Part III.
Item 10.	Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance	125
Item 11.	Executive Compensation	125
Item 12.	Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters	125
Item 13.	Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence	125
Item 14.	Principal Accountant Fees and Services	125
Part IV.
Item 15.	Exhibits, Financial Statement Schedules	126

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

PART I

Item 1. Business

Our Business

We are a bank holding company headquartered in Rosemont, Illinois, a suburb of Chicago, and we derive substantially all of our revenue from our wholly-owned subsidiary, Cole Taylor Bank. Cole Taylor Bank was founded in 1929 by forefathers of the Taylor family and has served the Chicago metropolitan area for almost 80 years. Taylor Capital Group, Inc. was formed in 1996 and acquired Cole Taylor Bank in 1997. We provide a range of products and services primarily to closely-held commercial customers and their owner operators in the Chicago metropolitan area. At December 31, 2008, we had assets of $4.4 billion, deposits of $3.1 billion, and stockholders’ equity of $307.1 million.

Our primary business is commercial banking and, as of December 31, 2008, over 95% of our loan portfolio was comprised of commercial loans. Our targeted commercial lending customers are closely-held businesses in industries such as manufacturing, wholesale and retail distribution, transportation, construction contracting and professional services. Our commercial lending activities primarily consist of providing loans for working capital, business expansion or acquisition, owner-occupied commercial real estate financing, revolving lines of credit and stand-by and commercial letters of credit. In addition to our lending activities, we offer deposit products such as checking, savings and money market accounts, time deposits and repurchase agreements to our business customers and community-based customers, typically individuals and small, local businesses, located near our banking centers. We offer corporate treasury cash management services to our commercial customers, which include internet balance reporting, remote deposit capture, automated clearing house products, imaged lock-box processing, controlled disbursement, and account reconciliation. We also cross-sell products and services to the owners and executives of our business customers designed to help them meet their personal financial goals. Our product offerings currently include personal customized credit and wealth management services. We use third-party providers to augment our offerings to include investment management, and brokerage services. Our products and services consist of commercial banking credit and deposit products delivered by a single operations area. We do not have separate and discrete operating segments.

Our Strategy

Our strategy to build stockholder value is based on a focused plan to be the commercial banking specialists for closely-held businesses and the people who own and manage them. Providing commercial banking services to this market niche has been an integral part of Cole Taylor Bank’s strategy since it was founded in 1929. Our strategy is comprised of the following elements:

• Relationship-oriented customer experience. Our customers are the center of what we do, so we partner with our customers to understand the dynamics of the businesses that we serve. Speed and responsiveness are critical elements of the customer experience and we do our utmost to be available anytime and any place to meet their needs. We believe closely-held business owners value a long-term relationship with a quality banker who provides innovative advice and creative ideas and understands the challenges and opportunities they face. For this reason, we believe our relationship managers are the number one “product” we bring to the market and that our customers value their access to our top management.

• Focus on our targeted customers. We focus our time and resources on closely-held businesses and the owners and managers of these businesses. We identify and pursue customer niches as a natural extension of our focused strategy. We also seek to leverage our commercial relationships by cross-selling products and services to address the personal financial needs of these business owners and managers. Expanding on the relationships we have built with these key decision-makers by helping

1

them meet their personal financial goals through products such as personal customized credit, financial planning and wealth management services, in addition to our array of deposit products, is an opportunity for us.

• Optimal position in our market. We believe we are well positioned to meet the needs of our target market. We are large enough to handle more complex credit facilities and treasury cash management services, yet small enough to provide more personalized customer service. We also believe it is important to our customers to have access to senior management who understand what it means to run an owner-operated business. This relationship banking approach, coupled with our ability to offer customized products and financial solutions, is what we believe sets us apart from our competition.

• Efficient growth. Historically, we have increased our total loans through organic growth and we expect to continue to grow our business and develop new customer relationships and cross-sell other products and services to our commercial customers and the owners and managers of those businesses. One of our strategies has been our ongoing recruitment of additional talented relationship managers. We actively pursue high quality relationship managers to extend our reach in the market place. In addition, in furtherance of our growth strategy, we may also seek to acquire other financial institutions or parts of those institutions.

• Effective credit risk management. A disciplined underwriting and credit administration and monitoring process is critical to our success. Credit risk is the primary risk we face in our business model, and therefore, significant resources are dedicated to monitoring and protecting our asset quality. The current downturn in the real estate market will continue to require greater attention from senior management to minimize potential losses arising from that collateral category.

Overview of 2008

The year ended December 31, 2008 was dynamic and challenging and we underwent significant change. The following is an overview of the more significant events:

• Our senior management team changed with the hiring of a new President, Chief Operating Officer, Chief Financial Officer, Chief Credit Officer and Chief Lending Officer.

• We hired over 50 new commercial bankers and embarked on a significant growth strategy. During 2008, our commercial loan portfolio increased $714.6 million, or 30%. Our loan growth was focused on lending to operating companies and we increased the percentage of our loan portfolio not secured by commercial real estate to 46% at December 31, 2008 from 34% at the end of 2007.

• We hired an Executive Vice President to lead an expanded asset-based lending initiative, and opened offices in Kansas City, Houston, Milwaukee and Baltimore from which we provide asset-backed lending services.

• Our asset quality deteriorated with nonperforming assets increasing to $213.6 million at December 31, 2008, or 4.87% of total assets, and net charge-offs in 2008 totaling $70.3 million, or 2.52% of total loans.

• Our operating results deteriorated with a net loss to common stockholders of $143.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2008. Our net loss included the establishment of a $46.4 million valuation reserve for deferred taxes.

• Our adverse operating results and deterioration in asset quality caused a number of our counterparties to reduce or withdraw our borrowing lines with them.

• We raised $219.9 million, net of additional regulatory capital with the issuance of two series of preferred stock, common stock warrants and subordinated debt.

• Our private placement in September 2008 included the issuance of $60 million of Series A convertible preferred stock, $60 million of subordinated bank debt and warrants to purchase

2

up to 1,400,000 shares of our common stock. Net proceeds from these transactions totaled $115.1 million.

• Our participation in the U.S. Treasury Department’s TARP Capital Purchase Program in November 2008 resulted in the issuance of 104,823 shares of our Series B preferred stock and warrants to purchase up to 1,462,647 shares of our common stock for net proceeds of $104.8 million.

Competition

We encounter intense competition for all of our products and services, including substantial competition in attracting and retaining deposits and in obtaining loan customers. The principal competitive factors in the banking and financial services industry are quality of services to customers, ease of access to services and pricing of services, including interest rates paid on deposits, interest rates charged on loans, as well as credit terms and underwriting criteria, and fees charged for trust, investment and other professional services. Our principal competitors are numerous and include other commercial banks, savings and loan associations, mutual funds, money market funds, finance companies, credit unions, mortgage companies, the United States Government, private issuers of debt obligations and suppliers of other investment alternatives, such as securities firms. We may also face a competitive disadvantage as a result of our smaller size, limited branch network or narrower product offerings. Many of our competitors are significantly larger than us and have access to greater financial and other resources. In addition, many of our non-bank competitors are not subject to the same federal regulations that govern bank holding companies and federally insured banks or the state regulations governing state chartered banks. As a result, our non-bank competitors may have advantages over us in providing some services.

Employees

Together with the Bank, we had approximately 451 full-time equivalent employees as of December 31, 2008. None of our employees is subject to a collective bargaining agreement. We consider our relationships with our employees to be good.

Supervision and Regulation

General

Financial institutions, their holding companies and their affiliates are regulated under federal and state law and by the regulations and policies of various bank regulatory authorities, including the Illinois Department of Financial and Professional Regulation (the “DFPR”), the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (the “Federal Reserve”) and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (the “FDIC”). These laws, regulations and policies address, among other things, the scope of business, the kinds and amounts of investments, reserve requirements, capital levels relative to operations, the nature and amount of collateral for loans, the establishment of branches, mergers and consolidations and the payment of dividends. This system of supervision and regulation establishes a comprehensive framework for our operations and those of our subsidiaries and is intended primarily for the protection of the FDIC-insured deposits and depositors of the Bank, rather than stockholders.

The following is a summary of the material elements of the regulatory framework that applies to us and our banking subsidiary. It does not describe all of the statutes, regulations and regulatory policies that apply, nor does it restate all of the requirements of those that are described. As such, the following is qualified in its entirety by reference to applicable law. Any change in statutes, regulations or regulatory policies may have a material effect on our business and the business of our subsidiaries.

3

The Company

General. We, as the sole stockholder of the Bank, are a bank holding company. As a bank holding company, we are registered with, and are subject to regulation by, the Federal Reserve under the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended (the “BHCA”). In accordance with Federal Reserve policy, we are expected to act as a source of financial strength to the Bank and to commit resources to support the Bank in circumstances where we might not otherwise do so. Under the BHCA, we are subject to periodic examination by the Federal Reserve. We are required to file with the Federal Reserve periodic reports of our operations and such additional information regarding us and our subsidiaries as the Federal Reserve may require. We are also subject to regulation by the DFPR under Illinois law.

Current Economic Environment. In response to the current national and international economic condition, the U.S. government has taken a variety of actions intended to stimulate the national economy, including the passage of legislation, such as the Emergency Economic Stabilization Act of 2008 (the “EESA”) and the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (the “ARRA”, although known commonly as the economic stimulus bill), and the implementation of certain programs by federal agencies, including the Federal Reserve, the FDIC and the U.S. Treasury Department.

Last Fall, pursuant to its authority under the EESA, the U.S. Treasury announced the Troubled Assets Relief Program’s Capital Purchase Program (the “CPP”), in which the U.S. Treasury would invest up to $250 billion in preferred stock and warrants to purchase common stock of qualified financial institutions that applied to participate. We applied to participate in the CPP and on November 21, 2008, the U.S. Treasury invested $104.8 million, equal to 3% of our risk-weighted assets as of September 30, 2008, in our Series B preferred stock. The terms of our Series B preferred stock, and the accompanying warrants to purchase shares of our common stock, are described later in this Annual Report under the caption “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Results of Operations and Financial Condition.”

As a result of this investment by the U.S. Treasury, we are required to certify to the U.S. Treasury that we have complied with statutory, Treasury and contractual executive compensation restrictions imposed as part of this program. We will be required to re-certify this attestation on an annual basis so long as any of the shares of Series B preferred stock remain outstanding. Our compensation committee also must provide the U.S. Treasury with an explanation of our senior executive compensation arrangements and how such arrangements are designed to ensure that they do not encourage unnecessary or excessive risk-taking.

In addition, pursuant to the ARRA, we are subject to restrictions on executive compensation so long as any of our shares of Series B preferred stock remain outstanding, including a prohibition on paying or accruing any bonus, retention award or incentive compensation to certain senior executive officers, other than limited exceptions for restricted stock grants and pre-existing contractual requirements and a prohibition on any severance payments to any of our senior executive officers or any of our next five most highly-compensated employees. Our Board of Directors also will be required to adopt a company-wide policy regarding excessive or luxury expenditures and we are required to permit an advisory stockholder vote to approve executive compensation, as disclosed in our proxy statement, at each annual meeting of stockholders so long as any of the shares of Series B preferred stock remain outstanding.

The FDIC established a temporary liquidity guarantee program that had both a debt guarantee component, whereby the FDIC agreed to guarantee certain senior unsecured debt issued by eligible financial institutions between October 14, 2008 and June 30, 2009, and a transaction account guarantee component, whereby the FDIC agreed to insure 100% of non-interest bearing deposit transaction accounts at eligible financial institutions, such as lawyers’ trust accounts, payment processing accounts, payroll accounts and working capital accounts, through December 31, 2009. On February 27, 2009, the FDIC’s Board modified the temporary liquidity guarantee program to allow participating entities, with the FDIC’s permission, to issue mandatory convertible debt. The Bank is participating in both of these programs and paying the premiums related to such participation to the FDIC.

4

The FDIC has also provided for a temporary increase in deposit insurance coverage. Pursuant to the EESA, the FDIC temporarily raised the basic limit on federal deposit insurance coverage from $100,000 to $250,000 per depositor. The EESA provides that the basic deposit insurance limit will return to $100,000 after December 31, 2009. (Other changes related to the regulation of deposit insurance are discussed below under “Deposit Insurance”).

Another recently implemented program intended to stabilize the nation’s banking system is the Term Asset-Backed Securities Loan Facility (the “TALF”) promulgated by the Federal Reserve. The program is intended to increase credit availability and support economic activities by facilitating renewed issuance of consumer and small business asset-backed securities as well as commercial mortgage-backed securities, private-label residential mortgage-backed securities, and other asset-backed securities (collectively, “ABS”). According to the Federal Reserve, a newly announced expansion of the TALF could increase its size to as much as $1 trillion. Under TALF, the Federal Reserve Bank of New York will finance the purchase of eligible ABS by investors that own eligible collateral so long as such investor maintains an account relationship with a primary dealer.

Acquisitions, Activities and Change in Control. The primary purpose of a bank holding company is to control and manage banks. The BHCA generally requires the prior approval of the Federal Reserve for any merger involving a bank holding company or any acquisition by a bank holding company of another bank or bank holding company. Subject to certain conditions (including deposit concentration limits established by the BHCA), the Federal Reserve may allow a bank holding company to acquire banks located in any state of the United States. In approving interstate acquisitions, the Federal Reserve is required to give effect to applicable state law limitations on the aggregate amount of deposits that may be held by the acquiring bank holding company and its insured depository institution affiliates in the state in which the target bank is located (provided that those limits do not discriminate against out-of-state depository institutions or their holding companies) and state laws that require that the target bank have been in existence for a minimum period of time (not to exceed five years) before being acquired by an out-of-state bank holding company.

The BHCA generally prohibits us from acquiring direct or indirect ownership or control of more than 5% of the voting shares of any company that is not a bank and from engaging in any business other than that of banking, managing and controlling banks or furnishing services to banks and their subsidiaries. This general prohibition is subject to a number of exceptions. The principal exception allows bank holding companies to engage in, and to own shares of companies engaged in, certain businesses found by the Federal Reserve to be “so closely related to banking … as to be a proper incident thereto.” This authority would permit us to engage in a variety of banking-related businesses, including the operation of a thrift, consumer finance, equipment leasing, the operation of a computer service bureau (including software development), and mortgage banking and brokerage. The BHCA generally does not place territorial restrictions on the domestic activities of non-bank subsidiaries of bank holding companies.

Additionally, bank holding companies that meet certain eligibility requirements prescribed by the BHCA and elect to operate as financial holding companies may engage in, or own shares in companies engaged in, a wider range of nonbanking activities, including securities and insurance underwriting and sales, merchant banking and any other activity that the Federal Reserve, in consultation with the Secretary of the Treasury, determines by regulation or order is financial in nature, incidental to any such financial activity or complementary to any such financial activity and does not pose a substantial risk to the safety or soundness of depository institutions or the financial system generally. As of the date of this filing, we have not applied for approval to operate as a financial holding company.

Federal law also prohibits any person or company from acquiring “control” of an FDIC-insured depository institution or its holding company without prior notice to the appropriate federal bank regulator. “Control” is conclusively presumed to exist upon the acquisition of 25% or more of the outstanding voting securities of a bank or bank holding company, but may arise under certain circumstances at 10% ownership.

5

Capital Requirements. Bank holding companies are required to maintain minimum levels of capital in accordance with Federal Reserve capital adequacy guidelines. If capital levels fall below the minimum required levels, a bank holding company, among other things, may be denied approval to acquire or establish additional banks or non-bank businesses.

The Federal Reserve’s capital guidelines establish the following minimum regulatory capital requirements for bank holding companies: (i) a risk-based requirement expressed as a percentage of total assets weighted according to risk; and (ii) a leverage requirement expressed as a percentage of total assets. The risk-based requirement consists of a minimum ratio of total capital to total risk-weighted assets of 8% and a minimum ratio of Tier 1 capital to total risk-weighted assets of 4%. The leverage requirement consists of a minimum ratio of Tier 1 capital to total assets of 3% for the most highly rated companies, with a minimum requirement of 4% for all others. For purposes of these capital standards, Tier 1 capital consists primarily of permanent stockholders’ equity less intangible assets (other than certain loan servicing rights and purchased credit card relationships). Total capital consists primarily of Tier 1 capital plus certain other debt and equity instruments that do not qualify as Tier 1 capital and a portion of the company’s allowance for loan and lease losses.

The risk-based and leverage standards described above are minimum requirements. Higher capital levels will be required if warranted by the particular circumstances or risk profiles of individual banking organizations. For example, the Federal Reserve’s capital guidelines contemplate that additional capital may be required to take adequate account of, among other things, interest rate risk, or the risks posed by concentrations of credit, nontraditional activities or securities trading activities. Further, any banking organization experiencing or anticipating significant growth would be expected to maintain capital ratios, including tangible capital positions (i.e., Tier 1 capital less all intangible assets), well above the minimum levels. As of December 31, 2008, we had regulatory capital in excess of the Federal Reserve’s minimum requirements.

Dividend Payments. Our ability to pay dividends to our stockholders may be affected by both general corporate law considerations and policies of the Federal Reserve applicable to bank holding companies, as well as limitations contained in the documents governing our trust preferred securities and Series A and Series B preferred stock. As a Delaware corporation, we are subject to the limitations of the Delaware General Corporation Law (the “DGCL”). The DGCL allows us to pay dividends only out of our surplus (as defined and computed in accordance with the provisions of the DGCL) or if we have no such surplus, out of our net profits for the fiscal year in which the dividend is declared and/or the preceding fiscal year. Additionally, policies of the Federal Reserve caution that a bank holding company should not pay cash dividends that exceed its net income or that can only be funded in ways that weaken the bank holding company’s financial health, such as by borrowing. The Federal Reserve also possesses enforcement powers over bank holding companies and their non-bank subsidiaries to prevent or remedy actions that represent unsafe or unsound practices or violations of applicable statutes and regulations. Among these powers is the ability to proscribe the payment of dividends by banks and bank holding companies.

Federal Securities Regulation. Our common stock is registered with the SEC under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”). Consequently, we are subject to the information, proxy solicitation, insider trading and other restrictions and requirements of the SEC under the Exchange Act.

The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 implemented a broad range of corporate governance and accounting measures to increase corporate responsibility, to provide for enhanced penalties for accounting and auditing improprieties at publicly traded companies and to protect investors by improving the accuracy and reliability of disclosures under federal securities laws. We are subject to Sarbanes-Oxley because we are required to file periodic reports with the SEC under the Exchange Act. Among other things, Sarbanes-Oxley and/or its implementing regulations established membership requirements and additional responsibilities for our audit committee, imposed restrictions on the relationship between us and our outside auditors (including restrictions on the types of non-audit services our auditors may provide to us), imposed additional responsibilities for external

6

financial statements on our chief executive officer and chief financial officer, expanded the disclosure requirements for corporate insiders, required management to evaluate our disclosure controls and procedures and our internal controls over financial reporting and required auditors to issue a report on our internal control over financial reporting.

The Bank

General. The Bank is an Illinois-chartered bank, the deposit accounts of which are insured by the FDIC’s Deposit Insurance Fund (“DIF”). The Bank is also a member of the Federal Reserve System (“member bank”). As an Illinois-chartered, FDIC-insured member bank, the Bank is presently subject to the examination, supervision, reporting and enforcement requirements of the DFPR, as the chartering authority for Illinois banks; the Federal Reserve, as the primary federal regulator of member banks; and the FDIC, as administrator of the DIF.

Deposit Insurance. As an FDIC-insured institution, the Bank is required to pay deposit insurance premium assessments to the FDIC. The FDIC has adopted a risk-based assessment system under which all insured depository institutions are placed into one of four risk categories and assessed insurance premiums based upon their capital group and supervisory group designations within such category. Institutions classified in the highest capital group (i.e., those with a “well capitalized” capital group designation) and in the highest supervisory group (i.e., those with CAMELS ratings of 1 or 2) pay the lowest premium while institutions that are in the lowest (i.e., undercapitalized) capital group and lowest supervisory group (i.e., those with CAMELS ratings of 4 or 5) pay the highest premium. Capital group assignments are made by the FDIC quarterly. During the year ended December 31, 2008, DIF assessments ranged from 5 cents to 43 cents per $100 of assessable deposits. The FDIC announced in the 4^th quarter of 2008, however, that risk-based deposit insurance premiums for insured institutions were to be uniformly increased by 7 basis points for the first quarter of 2009 (annualized). As such, for first quarter 2009, deposit insurance premiums ranged between 12 cents and 50 cents per $100 of assessable deposits.

On February 27, 2009, the FDIC’s Board of Directors voted to amend the current restoration plan for the DIF. Under the revised restoration plan, the schedule to raise the DIF reserve ratio to 1.15% was extended from five to seven years in recognition of the current strain on banks and the country’s economic environment. At the same meeting, the FDIC proposed a 20 point special assessment on all FDIC-insured institutions to be assessed on June 30, 2009, and paid to the FDIC on September 30, 2009. Related to the proposed special assessment, the FDIC also proposed the imposition of an emergency special assessment on FDIC-insured institutions after June 30, 2009 of up to 10 basis points if necessary to support public confidence in the federal deposit insurance system. Comments on both special assessment proposals are currently being sought by the FDIC. Finally, at the same meeting, the Board approved a final rule that sets forth revised deposit insurance assessment rates. Prior to the adoption of this final rule, most banks paid between 12 cents and 14 cents per $100 of assessable deposits to the FDIC for deposit insurance. Under the new rule, most banks will pay initial base assessment rates between 12 cents and 16 cents per $100 of assessable deposits beginning April 1, 2009 (with a maximum of 45 cents per $100 of assessable deposits). Higher rates will also be imposed on banks that present additional risks to the DIF as well as those that rely significantly on secured liabilities, which increase the risk to the FDIC without providing additional assessment revenue to the agency. In some instances, the final rule will also impose increased assessments on insured institutions that use brokered deposits for rapid asset growth.

FICO Assessments. DIF members are subject to assessments to cover the interest payments on outstanding Financing Corporation (“FICO”) obligations until the final maturity of such bond obligations in 2019. These FICO assessments are in addition to amounts assessed by the FDIC for deposit insurance. For fourth quarter of 2008, the assessment for these obligations was 1.14 basis points.

Supervisory Assessments. All Illinois banks are required to pay supervisory assessments to the DFPR to fund the operations of the DFPR. The amount of the assessment is calculated on the basis of the bank’s total assets. During the year ended December 31, 2008, the Bank paid supervisory assessments to the DFPR totaling $425,000.

7

Capital Requirements. The regulations of the Federal Reserve establish the following minimum capital standards for the banks regulated by the Federal Reserve: (i) a leverage requirement consisting of a minimum ratio of Tier 1 capital to total assets of 3% for the most highly-rated banks with a minimum requirement of at least 4% for all others; and (ii) a risk-based capital requirement consisting of a minimum ratio of total capital to total risk-weighted assets of 8% and a minimum ratio of Tier 1 capital to total risk-weighted assets of 4%. In general, the components of Tier 1 capital and total capital are the same as those for bank holding companies discussed above.

The capital requirements described above are minimum requirements. Higher capital levels will be required if warranted by the particular circumstances or risk profiles of individual institutions. For example, regulations of the Federal Reserve provide that additional capital may be required to take adequate account of, among other things, interest rate risk or the risks posed by concentrations of credit, nontraditional activities or securities trading activities.

Further, federal law and regulations provide various incentives for financial institutions to maintain regulatory capital at levels in excess of minimum regulatory requirements. For example, a financial institution that is “well-capitalized” may qualify for exemptions from prior notice or application requirements otherwise applicable to certain types of activities and may qualify for expedited processing of other required notices or applications. Additionally, one of the criteria that determines a bank holding company’s eligibility to operate as a financial holding company is a requirement that all of its financial institution subsidiaries be “well-capitalized.” Under the regulations of the Federal Reserve, in order to be “well-capitalized” a financial institution must maintain a ratio of total capital to total risk-weighted assets of 10% or greater, a ratio of Tier 1 capital to total risk-weighted assets of 6% or greater and a ratio of Tier 1 capital to total assets of 5% or greater.

Federal law also provides the federal banking regulators with broad power to take prompt corrective action to resolve the problems of undercapitalized institutions. The extent of the regulators’ powers depends on whether the institution in question is “adequately capitalized,” “undercapitalized,” “significantly undercapitalized” or “critically undercapitalized,” in each case as defined by regulation. Depending upon the capital category to which an institution is assigned, the regulators’ corrective powers include: (i) requiring the institution to submit a capital restoration plan; (ii) limiting the institution’s asset growth and restricting its activities; (iii) requiring the institution to issue additional capital stock (including additional voting stock) or to be acquired; (iv) restricting transactions between the institution and its affiliates; (v) restricting the interest rate the institution may pay on deposits; (vi) ordering a new election of directors of the institution; (vii) requiring that senior executive officers or directors be dismissed; (viii) prohibiting the institution from accepting deposits from correspondent banks; (ix) requiring the institution to divest certain subsidiaries; (x) prohibiting the payment of principal or interest on subordinated debt; and (xi) ultimately, appointing a receiver for the institution.

As of December 31, 2008, the Bank: (i) was not subject to a directive from the Federal Reserve to increase its capital to an amount in excess of the minimum regulatory capital requirements; (ii) exceeded its minimum regulatory capital requirements under Federal Reserve capital adequacy guidelines; and (iii) was “well-capitalized,” as defined by Federal Reserve regulations.

Dividend Payments. Historically, our primary source of funds has been dividends from the Bank. Under the Illinois Banking Act, Illinois-chartered banks generally may not pay dividends in excess of their net profits. Without Federal Reserve approval, a state member bank may not pay dividends in any calendar year that, in the aggregate, exceed the bank’s calendar year-to-date net income plus the bank’s retained net income for the two preceding calendar years.

The payment of dividends by any financial institution or its holding company is affected by the requirement to maintain adequate capital pursuant to applicable capital adequacy guidelines and regulations, and a financial institution generally is prohibited from paying any dividends if, following payment thereof, the institution would be undercapitalized. As described above, the Bank exceeded its minimum capital requirements under applicable

8

guidelines as of December 31, 2008. As of December 31, 2008, the Bank could not declare or pay dividends to us without the approval of regulatory authorities. If funds were available for dividends, the Federal Reserve also may prohibit the payment of any dividends by the Bank if the Federal Reserve determines such payment would constitute an unsafe or unsound practice. In addition, under the terms of the CPP, we are prohibited from declaring or paying any dividends on our common stock without the U.S. Treasury’s approval until the earlier of November 21, 2012 and the date on which the U.S. Treasury no longer holds any of our Series B preferred stock.

Insider Transactions. The Bank is subject to certain restrictions imposed by federal law on extensions of credit to us, on investments in our stock or other securities and the acceptance of our stock or other securities as collateral for loans made by the Bank. Certain limitations and reporting requirements are also placed on extensions of credit by the Bank to its directors and officers, to our directors and officers, to our principal stockholders and to “related interests” of such directors, officers and principal stockholders. In addition, federal law and regulations may affect the terms upon which any person who is one of our directors or officers, a director or officer of the Bank or one of our principal stockholders may obtain credit from banks with which the Bank maintains a correspondent relationship.

Safety and Soundness Standards. The federal banking agencies have adopted guidelines that establish operational and managerial standards to promote the safety and soundness of federally insured depository institutions. The guidelines set forth standards for internal controls, information systems, internal audit systems, loan documentation, credit underwriting, interest rate exposure, asset growth, compensation, fees and benefits, asset quality and earnings.

In general, the safety and soundness guidelines prescribe the goals to be achieved in each area, and each institution is responsible for establishing its own procedures to achieve those goals. If an institution fails to comply with any of the standards set forth in the guidelines, the institution’s primary federal regulator may require the institution to submit a plan for achieving and maintaining compliance. If an institution fails to submit an acceptable compliance plan, or fails in any material respect to implement a compliance plan that has been accepted by its primary federal regulator, the regulator is required to issue an order directing the institution to cure the deficiency. Until the deficiency cited in the regulator’s order is cured, the regulator may restrict the institution’s rate of growth, require the institution to increase its capital, restrict the rates the institution pays on deposits or require the institution to take any action the regulator deems appropriate under the circumstances. Noncompliance with the standards established by the safety and soundness guidelines may also constitute grounds for other enforcement action by the federal banking regulators, including cease and desist orders and civil money penalty assessments.

Branching Authority. Illinois banks, such as the Bank, have the authority under Illinois law to establish branches anywhere in the State of Illinois, subject to receipt of all required regulatory approvals.

Federal law permits state and national banks to merge with banks in other states subject to: (i) regulatory approval; (ii) federal and state deposit concentration limits; and (iii) state law limitations requiring the merging bank to have been in existence for a minimum period of time (not to exceed five years) prior to the merger. The establishment of new interstate branches or the acquisition of individual branches of a bank in another state (rather than the acquisition of an out-of-state bank in its entirety) is permitted only in those states the laws of which expressly authorize such expansion.

State Bank Investments and Activities. The Bank generally is permitted to make investments and engage in activities directly or through subsidiaries as authorized by Illinois law. However, under federal law and FDIC regulations, FDIC-insured state banks are prohibited, subject to certain exceptions, from making or retaining equity investments of a type, or in an amount, that are not permissible for a national bank. Federal law and FDIC regulations also prohibit FDIC-insured state banks and their subsidiaries, subject to certain exceptions, from engaging as principal in any activity that is not permitted for a national bank unless the bank meets, and continues to meet, its minimum regulatory capital requirements and the FDIC determines the activity would not

9

pose a significant risk to the deposit insurance fund of which the bank is a member. These restrictions have not had, and are not currently expected to have, a material impact on the operations of the Bank.

Federal Reserve System. Federal Reserve regulations, as presently in effect, require depository institutions to maintain non-interest earning reserves against their transaction accounts (primarily NOW and regular checking accounts) as follows: for transaction accounts aggregating $48.3 million or less, the reserve requirement is 3% of total transaction accounts; and for transaction accounts aggregating in excess of $48.3 million, the reserve requirement is $1.215 million plus 10% of the aggregate amount of total transaction accounts in excess of $48.3 million. The first $7.8 million of otherwise reservable balances are exempted from the reserve requirements. These reserve requirements are subject to annual adjustment by the Federal Reserve. The Bank is in compliance with the foregoing requirements.

Department of Defense Credit Regulations. On October 1, 2007, pursuant to Department of Defense regulations, new rules went into effect that impose restrictions on creditors, including the Bank, with respect to permissible provisions in loans made to covered borrowers (generally, active duty service members and their dependents). It also includes a new “Military Annual Percentage Rate” of 36%.

U.S. Treasury Department Report. In March 2008, the U.S. Treasury Department released a report containing short-, intermediate-, and long-term recommendations to reform and modernize the country’s federal financial regulatory structure. These recommendations include a consolidation of the current functional regulation scheme for financial institutions into three distinct regulators: a market stability regulator (the Federal Reserve); a prudent financial regulator (new); and a business conduct regulator (new). It is unclear whether and to what extent this proposal will be implemented in the future and the impact it will have upon our operations.

Available Information

Our website is www.taylorcapitalgroup.com. We make available on our website under the caption “Stock Information”, free of charge, our annual reports on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, current reports on Form 8-K, and amendments to those reports as soon as reasonably practicable after we electronically file or furnish such materials to the SEC. Materials that we file or furnish to the SEC may also be read and copied at the SEC’s Public Reference Room at 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549. Information on the operation of the Public Reference Room may be obtained by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. Also, the SEC maintains a website at www.sec.gov that contains reports, proxy and information statements, and other information that we file electronically with the SEC.

10

Item 1A. Risk Factors

You should read carefully and consider the following risks and uncertainties because they could materially and adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects.

Our business is subject to the conditions of the local economy in which we operate and a continued downturn in the local economy and the real estate market may adversely affect our business.

Our success is dependent to a significant extent upon economic conditions in the Chicago metropolitan area, where the majority of our loans are originated. The Chicago metropolitan area has experienced a decline in residential home sales since 2006, and the downturn in the residential housing market has reduced demand and market prices for developed residential lots and vacant land as well as homes. This housing market has negatively impacted many of our residential real estate development customers and resulted in an increase in our nonperforming loans.

We have also experienced an increase in nonperforming loans in the commercial and industrial and income producing properties categories in 2008. A continued downturn in the Chicago area economy may have a material adverse affect on our business, financial condition and operating results, including higher provisions for loan losses and net loan charge-offs, lower net interest income caused by an increase in nonaccrual loans, and higher legal and collection costs. In addition, we may be required to devote substantial additional attention and resources to nonperforming asset management rather than focusing on business growth activities. Continued adverse conditions in the economy of the Chicago metropolitan area could also reduce demand for new loans and impair our ability to attract and retain deposits.

Our business is subject to domestic and international economic conditions and other factors, many of which are beyond our control and could adversely affect our business.

Our business is affected by domestic and international factors that are beyond our control, including economic, political and market conditions, broad trends in industry and finance, legislative and regulatory changes, competition, changes in government monetary and fiscal policies, and consolidation within our customer base and within our industry. For example, the capital and credit markets have been experiencing volatility and disruption for more than a year. In some cases, the markets have produced downward pressure on stock prices and credit capacity for banks and other financial institutions without regard to their financial strength. Many lenders and institutional investors have reduced and, in some cases, ceased to provide funding to borrowers, including to other financial institutions because of concern about the stability of the financial markets and the strength of counterparties. It is difficult to predict how long these economic conditions will exist and whether our actions will effectively mitigate these external factors. The resulting lack of available credit, lack of confidence in the banking and financial sector, decreased consumer confidence, increased volatility in the financial markets and reduced business activity could materially and adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

The U.S. Congress enacted the Emergency Economic Stabilization Act of 2008 (“EESA”) and the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (“ARRA”) in response to the impact of the volatility and disruption in the capital and credit markets on the banking industry. The U.S. Department of Treasury (“UST”) and the federal banking regulators are implementing a number of programs under this legislation that are intended to address the current economic conditions and the asset quality, capital and liquidity issues they have caused. If this legislation and its related programs fail to adequately address these conditions, a continuation or worsening of the current economic and market conditions could occur and that likely would have a material adverse impact on our business and results of operations.

Our allowance for loan losses may prove to be insufficient to absorb losses in our loan portfolio.

We maintain an allowance for loan losses to provide for loans in our portfolio that may not be repaid in their entirety. We believe that our allowance for loan losses is maintained at a level adequate to absorb probable losses

11

inherent in our loan portfolio as of the corresponding balance sheet date. However, our allowance for loan losses may not be sufficient to cover actual loan losses, and future provisions for loan losses could materially adversely affect our operating results.

In evaluating the adequacy of our allowance for loan losses, we consider numerous quantitative factors, including our historical charge-off experience, growth of our loan portfolio, changes in the composition of our loan portfolio and the volume of delinquent and criticized loans. In addition, we use information about specific borrower situations, including their financial position and estimated collateral values under various liquidation scenarios, to estimate the risk and amount of loss for those borrowers. Finally, we also consider many qualitative factors, including general and economic business conditions, duration of the current business cycle, the impact of competition on our underwriting terms, current general market collateral valuations, trends apparent in any of the factors we take into account and other matters, which are by nature more subjective and fluid.

Our estimates of the risk of loss and amount of loss on any loan are complicated by the significant uncertainties surrounding not only our borrowers’ probability of default, but also the fair value of the underlying collateral. The current illiquidity in the real estate market has increased the uncertainty with respect to real estate values. Because of the degree of uncertainty and the sensitivity of valuations to the underlying assumptions regarding the holding period until sale and the collateral liquidation method, our actual losses may significantly vary from our current estimates.

Our commercial loans and commercial real estate loans generally involve higher credit risk than residential real estate loans. Because payments on loans secured by commercial real estate or equipment are often dependent upon the successful operation and management of our customers’ businesses, repayment of such loans may be influenced to a great extent by the ability of our customers to execute on their business strategies and may be adversely impacted by adverse economic conditions in the markets we serve. If our customers are unable to successfully operate their businesses due to the current economic downturn or otherwise, our actual losses on our commercial loans may exceed our current estimates.

In addition, federal and state regulators periodically review the adequacy of our allowance for loan losses. Such regulators may require us to make additional provisions to the allowance or recognize additional loan charge-offs based upon their judgments about information available to them at the time of their examinations. Any such additional provisions for loan losses or charge-offs required by these regulatory agencies, could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

We are subject to lending concentration risks.

As a business bank, our loan portfolio is comprised primarily of commercial loans to businesses. These loans are typically larger in amount than loans to individual consumers and therefore have higher potential losses on an individual loan basis, and in 2008, the average size of our commercial loan originations increased based in large part on the customer relationships brought to us by relationship managers we hired in 2008. Credit quality issues on larger commercial loans, if they were to occur, could cause greater volatility in reported credit quality performance measures, such as total impaired or nonperforming loans and the deterioration of any one or a few of these loans may cause a significant increase in uncollectible loans, which would have a material adverse impact on our results of operations and financial condition.

New residential home sales have declined dramatically over the last year, increasing financial stress on our real estate developer customers and adversely impacting their ability to repay their loan obligations as agreed. Further deterioration in the credit quality of our real estate construction loans would have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

12

Our financial condition, results of operations and reputation would be materially adversely impacted if we are unable to respond effectively to unanticipated deposit volatility.

As a part of our liquidity management, we must ensure we can respond effectively to potential volatility in our customers’ deposit balances. We have customers that maintain significant deposit balances, the immediate withdrawal of which could have a material adverse affect on our daily liquidity management. We could encounter difficulty meeting a significant deposit outflow, in which case our capital position, reputation or profitability could be negatively affected. We use primarily Federal Home Loan Bank, or FHLB, advances, broker/dealer repurchase agreements and federal funds purchased to meet our immediate liquidity needs. In addition, the Bank is able to borrow from the Federal Reserve Bank through the Borrower-in-Custody program. If we fail to effectively manage the risk of deposit volatility, our business, financial condition and reputation could be materially adversely affected.

Changes in our credit ratings could increase our financing costs or make it more difficult for us to obtain funding or capital on commercially acceptable terms.

Fitch Ratings downgraded its rating of the Company and the Bank three times during 2008. Fitch reduced the long and short-term debt and deposit ratings from investment grade to non-investment grade and revised its ratings outlook to negative from stable. Specifically, the long-term debt rating was revised to BB- from BBB- and the short-term debt rating was revised to B from F3, which resulted in the debt ratings moving from investment grade to speculative (non-investment) grade on Fitch’s rating scale. Fitch’s ratings of the Bank’s deposits were also downgraded to speculative grade. We have also experienced a decline in our ratings from other independent bank rating entities, such as IDC, LACE and Bankrate.com. These and any future ratings declines could subject us to negative publicity, adversely impact our ability to acquire or retain deposits, and increase our cost of borrowing or limit our asset growth. Furthermore, our credit ratings are an important factor for some of our sources of liquidity, and reductions in our credit ratings could adversely affect our liquidity and competitive position, increase our borrowing costs, limit our access to the capital markets or trigger unfavorable contractual obligations.

Reduced access to wholesale funding sources and the brokered CD market may hinder our ability to replace deposit withdrawals and support our operations and future growth.

We must maintain access to sufficient funds to respond to the needs of our depositors and borrowers. As part of our liquidity management, we use a number of funding sources in addition to what is provided by in-market deposits and repayments and maturities of loans and investments. As we continue to grow, we are likely to continue to use sources of liquidity such as brokered money market accounts and certificates of deposits, out-of-local-market certificates of deposit, broker/dealer repurchase agreements, federal funds purchased and FHLB advances.

Under FDIC regulations, only “well-capitalized” institutions may issue brokered CDs without prior regulatory approval. The Bank is currently categorized as “well-capitalized” and therefore may continue to utilize this funding source. Brokered CD distributors utilize capital ratios and other criteria in evaluating and approving those banks that they allow to issue brokered CDs through their distribution network. Extreme distress in the financial markets, combined with our adverse operating results, has resulted in a reduction in our access to some of these brokered CD distribution networks. If our access to the brokered CD market were reduced in any material respect, it could lead to an inability to replace brokered deposits at maturity, which would result in higher costs to, or reduced asset levels at, the Bank. The Bank manages this risk by utilizing multiple brokered CD distributors and has not experienced any difficulty acquiring sufficient deposits at market rates through this funding source.

Consistent with tighter credit market conditions generally, a number of our counterparties have reduced our borrowing lines with them, including our pre-approved overnight federal funds borrowing lines and repurchase

13

agreement lines. Our growth, financial flexibility and ability to effectively fund our ongoing operations could be constrained if adequate financing is not available on commercially acceptable terms. Finally, if we are required to rely more heavily on more expensive funding sources to support future growth, our revenues may not increase proportionately to cover our costs, which in turn would adversely affect our operating margins and profitability.

Fluctuations in interest rates could reduce our profitability.

We are subject to interest rate risk. We realize income primarily from the difference between interest earned on loans and investments and the interest paid on deposits and borrowings. We expect that we will periodically experience imbalances in the interest rate sensitivities of our assets and liabilities and the relationships of various interest rates to each other. Over any defined period of time, our interest-earning assets may be more sensitive to changes in market interest rates than our interest-bearing liabilities, or vice versa. In addition, the individual market interest rates underlying our loan and deposit products (e.g., LIBOR and prime) may not change to the same degree over a given time period. If market interest rates should move contrary to our position, our earnings may be negatively affected. In addition, our loan volume and quality and deposit volume and mix can be affected by market interest rates. Changes in levels of market interest rates could materially adversely affect our net interest spread, asset quality, origination volume and overall profitability.

We attempt to mitigate our interest rate risk by managing the volume and mix of our earning assets and funding liabilities and using derivative financial instruments to hedge interest rate risk associated with specific hedged items. In a changing interest rate environment, we may not be able to manage this risk effectively. If we are unable to manage interest rate risk effectively, our business, financial condition and results of operations could be materially adversely affected.

Regulatory restrictions and liquidity constraints at the holding company level could impair our ability to pay dividends or interest on our outstanding securities.

Historically, our primary source of funds at the holding company level has been dividends received from the Bank. The Bank is subject to dividend restrictions set forth by regulatory authorities, whereby it may not, without prior approval of regulatory authorities, declare dividends in excess of the sum of the current year’s earnings plus the retained earnings from the prior two years. As of December 31, 2008, the Bank could not declare or pay dividends to us without the approval of regulatory authorities.

In order to preserve capital, our Board of Directors determined to suspend the payment of dividends on our common stock beginning in the second quarter of 2008. Current and future liquidity constraints at the holding company level could impair our ability to declare and pay dividends or interest on our outstanding securities in the future. We have a $15 million revolving credit facility, of which $12 million was outstanding at December 31, 2008. Subsequent to year-end 2008, we executed an amendment with our lender to extend this facility, which was scheduled to expire on March 31, 2009, until March 31, 2010. Furthermore, we are committed to maintaining the Bank’s well capitalized status, and if the Bank were to incur significant losses in 2009, capital injections from the holding company to the Bank would further reduce cash at the holding company level.

The UST may also impose limitations on our ability to use funds we received from our participation in the Troubled Asset Relief Program (“TARP”) Capital Purchase Program (“CPP”), including with respect to the payment of dividends or interest on our outstanding securities. For example, we are currently prohibited from declaring or paying any dividends on our common stock without the UST’s consent until the earlier of November 21, 2012 and the date on which the UST no longer holds any of our Series B preferred stock. If we are unable to pay dividends or interest on our outstanding securities in the future, the market value of such securities may be materially adversely affected.

14

Our business may be adversely affected by the highly regulated environment in which we operate.

We are subject to extensive federal and state regulation and supervision, which is primarily for the protection of depositors and customers rather than for the benefit of investors. As a bank holding company, we are subject to regulation and supervision primarily by the Federal Reserve. Cole Taylor Bank, as an Illinois-chartered member bank, is subject to regulation and supervision by the DFPR and by the Federal Reserve. We must undergo periodic examinations by our regulators, who have extensive discretion and power to prevent or remedy unsafe or unsound practices or violations of law by banks and bank holding companies. Our failure to comply with state and federal regulations can lead to, among other things, termination or suspension of our licenses, rights of rescission for borrowers, class action lawsuits and administrative enforcement actions. We cannot assure you that we will be able to fully satisfy the regulatory authorities that supervise us.

In addition, FDIC insurance premiums increased significantly during 2008 and the FDIC is significantly increasing insurance premiums during 2009 for banks that utilize brokered CDs and secured FHLB advances over certain defined limits. Based on our balance sheet as of December 31, 2008, such increase would apply to us. Such increased premiums may adversely affect our operating margins and profitability. On February 27, 2009, the FDIC announced an interim rule in which the FDIC will impose an emergency special assessment equal to 20 basis points on each insured institutions assessment base on June 30, 2009, and paid to the FDIC on September 30, 2009. The assessment base of the special assessment will be the same as the assessment base for regular deposit insurance premiums.

Furthermore, we are significantly impacted by the policies of the Federal Reserve, whose fiscal policies directly and indirectly influence the rate of interest earned on loans and paid on borrowings and interest-bearing deposits and can also affect the value of financial instruments we hold and the ability of borrowers to repay their loans, which could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operation.

Our participation in the TARP CPP may place significant restrictions on our operations.

Under the TARP CPP, our ability to declare or pay dividends on any of our shares is limited. Specifically, we are not permitted to pay dividends on our common stock without the UST’s approval until November 21, 2012, unless all of our Series B preferred stock has been redeemed or transferred by the UST to unaffiliated third parties. In addition, our ability to repurchase shares of our common stock and other securities is restricted. The consent of the UST generally is required for us to make any stock repurchases (other than in connection with the administration of any employee benefit plan in the ordinary course of business and consistent with past practice) until November 21, 2012, unless all of the outstanding shares of our Series B preferred stock have been redeemed or transferred by the UST to unaffiliated third parties. Further, we may not repurchase shares of our common stock or Series A preferred stock if we are in arrears on the payment of Series B preferred stock dividends.

Due to our participation in the TARP CPP, we are also subject to the UST’s current standards for executive compensation and corporate governance for the period during which the UST holds our Series B preferred stock. These standards generally apply to our Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and the three next most highly compensated senior executive officers. The standards include (i) ensuring that incentive compensation plans and arrangements for senior executive officers do not encourage unnecessary and excessive risks that threaten our value; (ii) a required clawback of any bonus or incentive compensation paid (or under a legally binding obligation to be paid) to a senior executive officer based on materially inaccurate financial statements or other materially inaccurate performance metric criteria; (iii) a prohibition on making “golden parachute payments” to senior executive officers; and (iv) an agreement not to claim a deduction, for federal income tax purposes, for compensation paid to any of the senior executive officers in excess of $500,000 per year. The change to the deductibility limit on executive compensation may increase the overall cost of our compensation programs in future periods.

15

The passage of ARRA on February 17, 2009 imposed additional executive compensation and corporate expenditure limits on all current and future TARP recipients, including us. The executive compensation standards are more stringent than those previously in effect under the CPP or those previously proposed by the UST. The new standards include (i) prohibitions on bonuses, retention awards and other incentive compensation to our five most highly paid employees other than restricted stock grants which do not fully vest during the TARP period and have a value of no more than one-third of the affected employee’s total annual compensation, (ii) prohibitions on any severance payments to any of our senior executive officers in connection with their departure from our company, (iii) an expanded clawback of bonuses, retention awards, and incentive compensation if payment is based on materially inaccurate statements of earnings, revenues, gains or other criteria, (iv) prohibitions on compensation plans that encourage manipulation of reported earnings, (v) retroactive review of bonuses, retention awards and other compensation previously provided by TARP recipients if found by the UST to be inconsistent with the purposes of TARP or otherwise contrary to public interest, (vi) required establishment of a company-wide policy regarding “excessive or luxury expenditures,” and (vii) inclusion in a participant’s proxy statement for any annual stockholder meeting of a nonbinding “Say on Pay” shareholder vote on the compensation of executives. The restrictions on bonuses and incentive compensation in particular may result in us issuing additional shares of our common stock to compensate our executive officers that likely would result in dilution to our common stockholders and could have an adverse impact on the market value of our common stock.

The TARP CPP and ARRA may cause uncertainty among affected executives. If we are not able to manage effectively any such uncertainty, it could adversely affect our ability to execute our business plan. Such recent regulations are having, and future legislation and regulations will also have, a significant impact on the financial services industry, which changes could cause us to modify the way we operate our business and could adversely affect our profitability.

Competition from financial institutions and other financial services providers may adversely affect our growth and profitability.

We operate in a highly competitive industry and experience intense competition from other financial institutions in our market. We compete with these institutions in making loans, attracting deposits and recruiting and retaining talented people. We have observed that the competition in our market for making commercial loans has resulted in more competitive pricing and credit structure, as well as intense competition for skilled commercial lending officers. We also may face a competitive disadvantage as a result of our smaller size, limited branch network, narrower product offerings and lack of geographic diversification. Although our competitive strategy is to provide a distinctly superior customer and employee experience, we can give no assurance this strategy will be successful. Our growth and profitability depend on our continued ability to compete effectively within our market area.

We may be adversely affected by the soundness of other financial institutions.

Financial services institutions are interrelated as a result of trading, clearing, counterparty, or other relationships. We regularly engage in transactions with counterparties in the financial services industry, including commercial banks, brokers and dealers, investment banks, and other institutional clients, which transactions may expose us to certain default risks. In certain circumstances, the collateral that we hold may be insufficient to cover such risks, resulting in losses that could have a material adverse affect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our business would suffer if our new management team does not work together effectively.

During 2008, the composition of our senior management team significantly changed. In January 2008, Mark A. Hoppe was appointed as our President and the Bank’s President and Chief Executive Officer. These titles were previously held by Bruce W. Taylor, who continues to serve as our Chairman and Chief Executive Officer.

16

We also appointed a new Chief Financial Officer and Chief Operating Officer, Chief Credit Officer and Chief Lending Officer. Many of these executives have worked together in the past at a larger institution. However, if they are not able to work together effectively, or if they need to devote a significant amount of time to learn about aspects of our business and our customer base, our business and results of operations would be adversely affected.

Our business strategy is dependent on our ability to attract, develop and retain highly skilled and experienced personnel in our customer relationship positions.

Our competitive strategy is to provide each of our commercial customers with a highly skilled relationship manager that will serve as the customer’s key point of contact with us. Achieving the status of a “trusted advisor” for our customers also requires that we minimize relationship manager turnover and provide stability to the customer relationship. Competition for experienced personnel is intense and we may not be able to successfully retain and attract such personnel.

We may not be able to execute, or effectively manage, our growth strategy.

Our future success depends on our achieving growth in commercial banking relationships that results in increased commercial loans outstanding at yields that are profitable to us. Achieving our growth targets requires us to attract customers who currently bank at other financial institutions in our market, thereby increasing our share of the market. Our strategy is to provide a local, high-touch relationship servicing experience that we believe is attractive to customers in our marketplace. In addition, we actively pursue high quality relationship managers to extend our reach in the market place. Although we believe that we have the necessary resources in place to successfully manage our future growth, our growth strategy exposes us to certain risks and expenses, and we cannot assure you that we will be able to expand our market presence or that any such expansion will not adversely affect our results of operations.

Our strategy for future growth also may place a significant strain on our management, personnel, systems and resources. Maintaining credit quality while growing our loan portfolio is critical to achieving and sustaining profitable growth. We may not be able to manage our growth effectively. If we fail to do so, our business would be materially harmed.

In furtherance of our growth strategy, we may also seek to acquire other financial institutions or parts of those institutions in the future and we may engage in branch expansion. In connection with future acquisitions, we may issue equity securities which could cause ownership and economic dilution to our current stockholders. Furthermore, there is no assurance that, following any future mergers or acquisitions, our integration efforts will be successful or that, after giving effect to the acquisition, we will achieve profits comparable to or better than our historical experience.

New lines of business or new products and services may subject us to certain additional risks.

We will consider and may enter into new lines of business or offer new products or services. These activities involve a number of uncertainties, risks and expenses, including the investment of significant time and resources, and we can give no assurance that our projected price and profitability targets will be attainable or that our efforts will be successful. In addition, new lines of business and new products and services could significantly impact the effectiveness of our system of internal controls. Failure to successfully manage these risks could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

The expansion of our asset-based lending initiative may be difficult or expensive and place additional stress on our infrastructure.

During 2008, we hired an Executive Vice President to lead an expanded asset-based lending initiative and we opened offices in Kansas City, Milwaukee, Houston and Baltimore to develop new business in these markets.

17

This initiative will greatly increase our existing asset-based lending operations and involves a number of risks and uncertainties, including entering geographical markets that are new to the Company. We may invest a significant amount of time and resources and incur substantial costs in expanding this line of business and there can be no assurances that our efforts will be successful. In addition, an increase in asset-based lending volumes may place additional stress on our lending, credit and loan servicing infrastructure, which could adversely impact our system of internal controls. Failure to successfully manage these risks could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

We are subject to certain operational risks, including, but not limited to, data processing system failures and errors and customer or employee fraud.

There have been a number of highly publicized cases involving fraud or other misconduct by employees of financial services firms in recent years. Misconduct by our employees could include hiding unauthorized activities from us, improper or unauthorized activities on behalf of our customers or improper use of confidential information. Employee fraud, errors and employee and customer misconduct could subject us to financial losses or regulatory sanctions and seriously harm our reputation. It is not always possible to prevent employee errors and misconduct, and the precautions we take to prevent and detect this activity may not be effective in all cases. Employee errors could also subject us to civil claims for negligence.

We maintain a system of internal controls and procedures designed to reduce the risk of loss from employee or customer fraud or misconduct and employee errors as well as insurance coverage to mitigate against operational risks, including data processing system failures and errors and customer or employee fraud. Should our internal controls fail to prevent or detect an occurrence, or if an occurrence is not insured or exceeds applicable insurance limits, it could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition or results of operations.

Our reputation could be damaged by negative publicity.

Reputational risk, or the risk to our business, earnings and capital from negative publicity, is inherent in our business. Negative publicity can result from actual or alleged conduct in a number of areas, including legal and regulatory compliance, lending practices, corporate governance, litigation, inadequate protection of customer data, ethical behavior of our employees, and from actions taken by regulators and others as a result of that conduct. Damage to our reputation could impact our ability to attract new or maintain existing loan and deposit customers, employees, and business relationships.

We are subject to security risks relating to our internet banking activities that could damage our reputation and our business.

Security breaches in our internet banking activities could expose us to possible liability and damage our reputation. Any compromise of our security also could deter customers from using our internet banking services that involve the transmission of confidential information. We rely on standard internet security systems to provide the security and authentication necessary to effect secure transmission of data. These precautions may not protect our systems from compromises or breaches of our security measures that could result in damage to our reputation and our business.

Item 1B. Unresolved Staff Comments

We have no unresolved staff comments.

18

Item 2. Properties

Our principal offices are located at our Corporate Center at 9550 West Higgins Road, Rosemont, Illinois. We lease approximately 112,000 square feet for our Corporate Center under an operating lease that expires on August 31, 2014, with two five-year renewal options which could extend the lease to 2024. This facility includes an approximately 4,000 square foot banking center on the first floor of our Corporate Center.

We also maintain approximately 36,000 square feet of general office space for our administrative offices in downtown Chicago at 225 West Washington under an operating lease with a 15-year term and two five-year renewal options which could extend the least to 2032.

We currently have nine banking centers located in the Chicago metropolitan area. Of the nine banking center locations, we own five of the buildings from which the banking centers are operated, including our Ashland, Skokie, Yorktown, Old Orchard, and Milwaukee locations. We lease the land under the buildings at Yorktown, Old Orchard and Milwaukee. We lease the buildings for our Wheeling (term to February 2015), Burbank (term to June 2014), Rosemont (term to August 2014), and South Clark (term to June 2018) banking facilities. We also lease small offices in other locations to support our asset based lending operations.

We continually evaluate our banking center locations, considering the physical location, size of operations and lease terms. In 2008, we relocated our Yorktown facility between sites in the same shopping center. We lease the land at the new Yorktown facility but own the building, which opened in September 2008. The lease term is for 30 years with one five-year renewal option. In addition, in March 2008, we sold our Woodlawn banking center. In October 2007, we closed our Orland Park location as the lease was scheduled to expire in March 2008.

The following is a list of our administrative and customer banking locations:

Facility	Address	Square Feet
Corporate Center	9550 West Higgins Road, Rosemont, Illinois	112,212
West Washington	225 West Washington, Chicago, Illinois	35,931
Milwaukee	1965 North Milwaukee, Chicago, Illinois	27,394
Burbank	5501 West 79th Street, Burbank, Illinois	20,318
Skokie	4400 West Oakton, Skokie, Illinois	15,800
Yorktown	Three Yorktown Center, Lombard, Illinois	5,966
Old Orchard	Golf Road and Skokie Boulevard, Skokie, Illinois	10,000
Wheeling	350 East Dundee Road, Wheeling, Illinois	8,274
Ashland	1542 W. 47th Street, Chicago, Illinois	6,000
South Clark	20 South Clark, Chicago, Illinois	2,700

Item 3. Legal Proceedings

We are a party to litigation from time to time arising in the normal course of business. As of the date of this annual report, management knows of no threatened or pending legal action against us that is likely to have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition or results of operations.

Item 4. Submission of Matters to a Vote of Security Holders

No matters were submitted to a vote of security holders during the fourth quarter of 2008.

19

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

PART II

Item 5. Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities.

Our common stock trades on the Nasdaq Global Select Market under the symbol “TAYC”. The high and low sales price per share of our common stock for the periods indicated is set forth below:

	High		Low
2008
Quarter Ended March 31	$	21.60	$	14.77
Quarter Ended June 30		18.00		6.83
Quarter Ended September 30		15.49		5.10
Quarter Ended December 31		13.28		5.57
2007
Quarter Ended March 31	$	39.45	$	33.00
Quarter Ended June 30		37.26		27.33
Quarter Ended September 30		32.83		22.88
Quarter Ended December 31		30.57		19.70

As of February 27, 2009, the closing price per share of our common stock as reported on the Nasdaq was $3.99.

As of February 27, 2009, there were 160 stockholders of record of the common stock, based upon securities position listings furnished to us by our transfer agent. We believe the number of beneficial owners is greater than the number of record holders because a large portion of our common stock is held of record through brokerage firms in “street name”.

The following table sets forth, for each quarter in 2008 and 2007, the dividends declared on our common stock:

	2008 Dividends Per Share of Common Stock		2007 Dividends Per Share of Common Stock
First quarter	$	0.10	$	0.10
Second quarter		—		0.10
Third quarter		—		0.10
Fourth quarter		—		0.10

Holders of our common stock are entitled to receive any cash dividends that may be declared by our Board of Directors. During the second quarter of 2008, our Board of Directors decided to discontinue dividend payments to common stockholders. In connection with our participation in TARP CPP and the issuance of our Series B preferred stock, we need the consent of the U.S. Treasury before we can pay any dividends on our common stock. Subject to such restrictions, the declaration and payment of future dividends to holders of our common stock will be at the discretion of our Board of Directors and will depend upon our earnings and financial condition, the capital requirements of the company and our subsidiaries, regulatory conditions and considerations and other factors as our Board of Directors may deem relevant.

As a holding company, we ultimately are dependent upon the Bank to provide funding for our operating expenses, debt service and dividends. Various banking laws applicable to the Bank limit the payment of dividends, management fees and other distributions by the Bank to us, and may therefore limit our ability to pay dividends on our common stock. We will also be prohibited from paying dividends on our common stock if we fail to make distributions or required payments on the trust preferred securities and our outstanding preferred stock. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operation—Liquidity” for additional details of restrictions on our ability to pay dividends and the ability of the Bank to pay dividends to us.

20

Stock Performance Graph

The graph below compares our cumulative stockholder return on our common stock from December 31, 2003 through December 31, 2008, with the composite index for all U.S. companies included in the Nasdaq Stock Market and the SNL Nasdaq Stock Market Bank Index. The source for the information below is SNL Financial LC, Charlottesville, VA.

Since October 16, 2002, our common stock has been traded principally on the Nasdaq under the symbol “TAYC.”

	Period Ending
Index	12/31/03	12/31/04	12/31/05	12/31/06	12/31/07	12/31/08
Taylor Capital Group, Inc.	100.00	131.96	160.19	146.30	82.69	23.85
NASDAQ Composite	100.00	108.59	110.08	120.56	132.39	78.72
SNL Bank NASDAQ	100.00	114.61	111.12	124.75	97.94	71.13

This graph is not deemed to be “soliciting material” or to be “filed” with the SEC or subject to the SEC’s proxy rules or to the liabilities of Section 18 of the Exchange Act, and the graph shall not be deemed to be incorporated by reference into any prior or subsequent filing by us under the Securities Act or the Exchange Act.

21

Item 6. Selected Financial Data

The selected consolidated financial data presented below under the caption “Taylor Capital Group, Inc.” as of and for the five years ended December 31, 2008, is derived from our historical financial statements. The selected financial information presented below under the caption of “Cole Taylor Bank” is derived from unaudited financial statements of the Bank or from the audited consolidated financial statements of Taylor Capital Group, Inc. You should read this information in conjunction with “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and the related notes included elsewhere in this annual report. Results from past periods are not necessarily indicative of results that may be expected for any future period.

	Year Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006			2005			2004
	(dollars in thousands, except per share data)
TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC. (consolidated):
Statements of Operations Data:
Net interest income	$	92,351		$	104,705		$	111,192		$	108,607		$	94,523
Provision for loan losses		144,158			31,900			6,000			5,523			10,083
Net interest income (loss) after provision for loan losses		(51,807	)		72,805			105,192			103,084			84,440
Noninterest income:
Service charges		9,136			7,709			7,738			9,022			10,854
Trust and investment management fees		3,578			3,864			4,155			4,545			5,331
Gain (loss) on investment securities		(2,399	)		—			—			127			144
Sale of branch and land trusts		—			—			—			3,572			—
Other derivative income (expense)		1,936			392			494			(3,203	)		2,193
Loan syndication fees		116			2,600			1,317			2,673			1,350
Other noninterest income		70			2,146			2,561			1,129			1,647
Total noninterest income		12,437			16,711			16,265			17,865			21,519
Noninterest expense:
Salaries and employee benefits		47,855			37,771			40,652			40,255			38,951
Goodwill impairment		—			23,237			—			—			—
Legal fees, net		5,016			2,464			2,166			1,891			1,808
Other noninterest expense		40,499			31,053			30,441			27,509			30,914
Total noninterest expense		93,370			94,525			73,259			69,655			71,673
Income (loss) before income taxes		(132,740	)		(5,009	)		48,198			51,294			34,286
Income taxes (benefit)		(8,212	)		4,561			2,035			19,523			11,313
Net income (loss)		(124,528	)		(9,570	)		46,163			31,771			22,973
Preferred dividends and discounts		(18,830	)		—			—			—			(1,875	)
Net income (loss) applicable to common stockholders	$	(143,358	)	$	(9,570	)	$	46,163		$	31,771		$	21,098
Common Share Data:
Basic earnings (loss) per share	$	(13.72	)	$	(0.89	)	$	4.22		$	3.16		$	2.21
Diluted earnings (loss) per share		(13.72	)		(0.89	)		4.15			3.09			2.19
Cash dividends per common share		0.10			0.40			0.28			0.24			0.24
Book value per common share		13.47			24.10			24.36			19.99			16.12
Dividend payout ratio		N.M.			N.M.			6.75	%		7.77	%		10.96	%
Weighted average shares – basic earnings per share		10,450,177			10,782,316			10,940,162			10,045,358			9,539,242
Weighted average shares – diluted earnings per share		10,450,177			10,782,316			11,118,818			10,286,647			9,644,515
Shares outstanding – end of year		11,115,936			10,551,994			11,131,059			10,973,829			9,653,549

22

	Year Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006			2005			2004
	(dollars in thousands, except per share data)
TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC. (consolidated):
Balance Sheet Data (at end of year):
Total assets	$	4,388,889		$	3,556,463		$	3,379,667		$	3,280,672		$	2,889,048
Investment securities		1,094,594			892,371			669,085			656,753			533,619
Total loans		3,233,261			2,533,333			2,500,685			2,384,931			2,211,606
Allowance for loan losses		128,548			54,681			37,516			37,481			37,484
Goodwill		—			—			23,237			23,237			23,354
Total deposits		3,131,046			2,580,192			2,639,927			2,543,644			2,284,697
Other borrowings		275,560			389,054			262,319			298,426			229,547
Notes payable and FHLB advances		462,000			205,000			80,000			75,000			85,500
Junior subordinated debentures		86,607			86,607			86,607			87,638			87,638
Subordinated notes, net		55,303			—			—			—			—
Preferred stock		157,314			—			—			—			—
Common stockholders’ equity		149,773			254,256			271,192			219,318			155,573
Total stockholders’ equity		307,087			254,256			271,192			219,318			155,573
Earnings Performance Data:
Return on average assets		(3.27	)%		(0.28	)%		1.40	%		1.05	%		0.84	%
Return on average stockholders’ equity		(51.01	)		(3.47	)		19.55			17.41			14.00
Net interest margin (non tax-equivalent) (1)		2.46			3.22			3.49			3.75			3.60
Noninterest income to revenues		5.73			6.86			6.86			9.13			13.54
Efficiency ratio (2)		87.11			77.85			57.48			55.13			61.84
Loans to deposits		103.26			98.18			94.72			93.76			96.80
Average interest earning assets to average interest bearing liabilities		120.66			122.78			122.42			123.83			125.99
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges: (3)
Including interest on deposits		(0.16	)x		0.96x			1.43x			1.72x			1.65x
Excluding interest on deposits		(3.63	)x		0.82x			2.92x			3.61x			2.85x
Asset Quality Ratios:
Allowance for loan losses to total loans		3.98	%		2.16	%		1.50	%		1.57	%		1.69	%
Allowance for loan losses to nonperforming loans (4)		64.15			72.27			113.15			278.69			265.98
Net loan charge-offs to average total loans		2.52			0.59			0.25			0.24			0.34
Nonperforming assets to total loans plus repossessed property (5)		6.58			3.09			1.34			0.61			0.64
Capital Ratios:
Total stockholders’ equity to assets – end of year		7.00	%		7.15	%		8.02	%		6.69	%		5.38	%
Average stockholders’ equity to average assets		6.41			8.21			7.18			6.05			5.99
Leverage ratio		8.73			9.40			10.17			8.90			6.49
Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio		10.22			11.44			12.10			10.44			7.29
Total risk-based capital ratio		13.02			12.74			13.35			12.02			10.27
COLE TAYLOR BANK:
Net income (loss)	$	(117,196	)	$	(2,971	)	$	40,247		$	40,089		$	28,314
Return on average assets		(3.08	)%		(0.09	)%		1.22	%		1.33	%		1.04	%
Stockholder’s equity to assets – end of year		7.36			8.82			9.38			8.58			8.82
Leverage ratio		7.11			8.74			9.04			8.46			8.29
Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio		8.32			10.62			10.76			9.91			9.30
Total risk-based capital ratio		11.12			11.88			12.01			11.16			10.55

N.M. Not meaningful.

(1) Net interest margin is determined by dividing net interest income, as reported, by average interest-earning assets.

(2) The efficiency ratio is determined by dividing noninterest expense by an amount equal to net interest income plus noninterest income, adjusted for gains or losses on investment securities.

(3) For purposes of calculating the ratio of earnings to fixed charges, earnings consist of earnings before income taxes plus interest and rent expense. Fixed charges consist of interest expense, rent expense and preferred stock dividend requirements.

(4) Nonperforming loans consist of nonaccrual loans and loans contractually past due 90 days or more but still accruing interest.

(5) Nonperforming assets consist of nonperforming loans, other real estate, and other repossessed assets.

23

Item 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

Introduction

We are a bank holding company headquartered in Rosemont, Illinois, a suburb of Chicago. We derive substantially all of our revenue from our wholly-owned subsidiary, Cole Taylor Bank. We provide a range of banking services to our customers, with a primary focus on serving closely-held businesses in the Chicago metropolitan area and the people who own and manage those businesses.

The following discussion and analysis presents our consolidated financial condition at December 31, 2008 and 2007 and the results of operations for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006. This discussion should be read together with the “Selected Consolidated Financial Data,” our audited consolidated financial statements and the notes thereto and other financial data contained elsewhere in this annual report. In addition to the historical information provided below, we have made certain estimates and forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. Our actual results could differ significantly from those anticipated in these estimates and forward-looking statements as a result of certain factors, including those discussed in the section captioned “Risk Factors” and elsewhere in this Annual Report on Form 10-K.

2008 Overview

Results of Operations

We reported a net loss applicable to common shareholders for the year ended December 31, 2008 of $143.4 million, or ($13.72) per common share, compared with a net loss of $9.6 million, or ($0.89) per common share, for the year ended December 31, 2007. The largest component of the net loss in 2008 was a $144.2 million provision for loan losses, compared with a provision of $31.9 million in 2007. The net loss in 2008 was also impacted by the establishment of a $46.4 million, or $4.44 per common share, valuation reserve against our deferred tax assets and preferred stock dividends of $18.8 million in 2008. The net loss in 2007 included a non-cash, after-tax charge of $23.2 million, or $2.14 per share, for the write-off of our goodwill.

Our total assets increased $832.4 million, or 23.4%, during 2008 to $4.39 billion at December 31, 2008, compared to $3.56 billion at December 31, 2007. Total loans increased $699.9 million, or 27.6%, to $3.2 billion at December 31, 2008, with the increase attributable to primarily commercial and industrial loans (C&I loans). C&I loans increased $635.5 million, or 74.7% during 2008, as we hired over 50 new commercial bankers and embarked on a significant growth strategy. Our new commercial bankers established 180 new commercial banking relationships and originated more than $750 million in new commercial loans.

Our senior management team changed beginning with the hiring of a new President in February 2008. During 2008, we recruited a new Chief Credit Officer, Chief Lending Officer, Chief Operating Officer and Chief Financial Officer. We also hired an Executive Vice President to lead an expanded asset-based lending capability. We launched our asset-based lending initiative, which operates under the name Cole Taylor Business Capital, and opened offices in Kansas City, Milwaukee, Houston and Baltimore to support these operations. All of our new executives’ previous experience was with a substantially larger banking organization and included many years of experience in the Chicago banking market.

Series A Preferred Stock Issuance

On September 29, 2008, we completed a private placement of $60 million of 8% non-cumulative convertible perpetual preferred stock, Series A, to certain institutional and individual accredited investors. The preferred stock private placement included a total of 2.4 million shares of 8% non-cumulative convertible perpetual preferred stock, Series A, with a purchase price and liquidation preference of $25.00 per share. The preferred stock pays non-cumulative dividends at an annual rate of 8% of the liquidation preference beginning in January 2009. Each share of the preferred stock can be converted into 2.5 shares of our common stock at a

24

conversion price of $10.00 per common share. The preferred stock is convertible into an aggregate of 6.0 million shares of our common stock at the option of the preferred stockholders at any time, and will be convertible at our option on or after September 29, 2013. The preferred stock will cease to pay dividends after September 29, 2010, if the volume weighted average price of our common stock on the Nasdaq Global Select Market exceeds 200% of the then applicable conversion price ($20.00) for at least 20 trading days in any consecutive 30-day period, or after September 29, 2011, if the volume weighted average price of our common stock on the Nasdaq Global Select Market exceeds 130% ($13.00) of the then-applicable conversion price for at least 20 trading days in any consecutive 30-day period.

Issuance of Subordinated Bank Notes and Common Stock Warrants

Simultaneously with the issuance of the Series A preferred stock, we closed a sale of $60 million in principal amount of 10% subordinated notes issued by our Bank which included detachable warrants to purchase shares of our Company’s common stock. The subordinated notes issued by the Bank bear interest at an annual rate of 10% and mature on September 29, 2016, but may be prepaid at the Bank’s option after September 29, 2011. For every $1,000 in principal amount of the subordinated notes, investors in this transaction also received a warrant to purchase 15 shares of our common stock at an exercise price of $10.00 per share, which represents an aggregate of 900,000 shares of common stock. The warrants are not exercisable until March 29, 2009 and expire on September 29, 2013.

In connection with the private placement of Series A preferred stock, we also issued to Financial Investments Corporation (“FIC”) warrants to purchase up to 500,000 shares of our common stock at an exercise price of $20.00 per share. The FIC warrants are not transferable or assignable after their initial issuance, and are exercisable anytime up to the September 29, 2018 expiration date.

Participation in U.S. Treasury Department’s TARP Capital Purchase Program

On November 21, 2008, we received $104.8 million from the U.S. Treasury Department in exchange for the issuance of 104,823 shares of our Series B preferred stock and warrants to purchase 1,462,647 shares of our common stock as part of the federal government’s TARP Capital Purchase Program. The Series B preferred shares pay a dividend of 5% per year for the first five years and reset to 9% per year thereafter. The Series B preferred shares are callable at par after three years and can be redeemed prior to then at 100% of the issue price, subject to the approval of our federal regulator. The warrants have a term of ten years and an exercise price of $10.75 per share.

Counterparty Borrowing Lines

During 2008, our pre-approved borrowing lines for federal funds purchased and repurchase agreements declined. Our approved overnight federal funds borrowing lines have declined to $95 million at December 31, 2008 from $260 million at December 31, 2007. Our pre-approved repurchase agreement lines have declined to $390 million at December 31, 2008 from $610 million at December 31, 2007. In response, we have increased our pledge of qualifying commercial loan collateral under the Federal Reserve Bank’s Borrower-in-Custody Program, which increased our borrowing capacity to $640 million at December 31, 2008 from $307 million at December 31, 2007. Subsequent to year end, the Bank has increased its pre-approved borrowing lines for federal funds purchased by $35 million. The Bank has further increased its ability to purchase federal funds by cultivating relationships with a growing group of correspondent banking customers who may sell Federal Funds to the Bank in order to manage their excess liquidity.

In addition, an independent debt rating agency, Fitch Ratings, downgraded its ratings of the holding company and the Bank during 2008. Fitch reduced the long and short-term debt and deposit ratings from investment grade to non-investment grade and revised their ratings outlook to negative from stable. We have also experienced a decline in our ratings from entities such as IDC, LACE, and Bankrate.com. The Bank has not

25

experienced any difficulty acquiring deposits at market rates. However, these ratings declines could negatively impact our acquisition or retention of deposits in the future.

2007 Overview

We reported a net loss for the year ended December 31, 2007 of $9.6 million, or ($0.89) per share, compared with net income of $46.2 million, or $4.15 per diluted common share, for the year ended December 31, 2006. The net loss in 2007 included a non-cash, after-tax charge of $23.2 million, or $2.14 per share, for the write-off of our goodwill. In addition, the provision for loan losses was $31.9 million in 2007, compared with a provision of $6.0 million in 2006. Net income in 2006 included $15.5 million, or $1.39 per share, of tax benefits associated with the resolution of particular tax uncertainties. These tax benefits were recognized in the second half of 2006 because of the expiration of the statute of limitations on our 2002 income tax return and the completion of certain taxing authority examinations. Total assets at December 31, 2007 were $3.56 billion, compared to $3.38 billion at December 31, 2006, an increase of $176.8 million, or 5.2%.

Application of Critical Accounting Policies

Our accounting and reporting policies conform to accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America and general reporting practices within the financial services industry. Our accounting policies are described in the section of this annual report captioned “Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements–Summary of Significant Accounting and Reporting Policies.”

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with these accounting principles requires management to make estimates, assumptions and judgments that affect the amounts reported in the consolidated financial statements and accompanying notes. These estimates, assumptions and judgments are based on information available to us as of the date of the consolidated financial statements and, accordingly, as this information changes, actual results could differ from the estimates, assumptions and judgments reflected in the financial statements. The estimates, assumptions and judgments made by us are based upon historical experience or other factors that we believe to be reasonable under the circumstances. Certain accounting policies inherently have greater reliance on the use of estimates, assumptions and judgments and as such, have a greater possibility of producing results that could be materially different than originally reported. We consider our policies for the allowance for loan losses, the valuation of deferred tax assets and establishment of tax liabilities and the valuation of financial instruments such as investment securities and derivatives to be critical accounting policies. In 2008, we revised which of our accounting policies we consider critical. We added as a critical accounting policy the valuation of investment securities, specifically our policy regarding other than temporary impairment. In addition, our policy regarding goodwill impairment was no longer critical as all of our goodwill was written off at the end of 2007.

The following accounting policies materially affect our reported earnings and financial condition and require significant estimates, assumptions and judgments.

Allowance for Loan Losses

We have established an allowance for loan losses to provide for loans in our portfolio that may not be repaid in their entirety. The allowance is based on our regular, quarterly assessments of the probable estimated losses inherent in our loan portfolio. Our methodology for measuring the appropriate level of the allowance relies on several key elements, which include a general allowance computed by applying loss factors to categories of loans outstanding in the portfolio, specific allowances for identified problem loans and portfolio segments, and an unallocated allowance. We maintain our allowance for loan losses at a level considered adequate to absorb probable losses inherent in our portfolio as of the balance sheet date. In evaluating the adequacy of our allowance for loan losses, we consider numerous quantitative factors, including historical charge-off experience, growth of our loan portfolio, changes in the composition of our loan portfolio and the volume of delinquent and criticized

26

loans. In addition, we use information about specific borrower situations, including their financial position, work-out plans and estimated collateral values under various liquidation scenarios to estimate the risk and amount of loss on loans to those borrowers. Finally, we also consider many qualitative factors, including general and economic business conditions, duration of the current business cycle, the impact of competition on our underwriting terms, current general market collateral valuations, trends apparent in any of the factors we take into account and other matters, which are by nature more subjective and fluid. Our estimates of risk of loss and amount of loss on any loan are complicated by the uncertainties surrounding not only our borrowers’ probability of default, but also the fair value of the underlying collateral. The current illiquidity in the real estate market has increased the uncertainty with respect to real estate values. Because of the degree of uncertainty and the sensitivity of valuations to the underlying assumptions regarding holding period until sale and the collateral liquidation method, our actual losses may materially vary from our current estimates.

As a business bank, our loan portfolio is comprised primarily of commercial loans to businesses. These loans are inherently larger in amount than loans to individual consumers and, therefore, have higher potential losses on an individual loan basis. The individually larger commercial loans can cause greater volatility in our reported credit quality performance measures, such as total impaired or nonperforming loans. Our current credit risk rating and loss estimate with respect to a single sizable loan can have a material impact on our reported impaired loans and related loss estimates. Because our loan portfolio contains a significant number of commercial loans with relatively large balances, the deterioration of any one or a few of these loans can cause a significant increase in uncollectible loans and, therefore, our allowance for loan losses. We review our estimates on a quarterly basis and, as we identify changes in estimates, our allowance for loan losses is adjusted through the recording of a provision for loan losses.

Income Taxes

We have maintained significant net deferred tax assets for deductible temporary differences, the largest of which relates to the allowance for loan losses. For income tax return purposes, only net charge-offs are deductible, not the provision for loan losses. Under generally accepted accounting principles, a valuation allowance is required to be recognized if it is “more likely than not” that the deferred tax asset will not be realized. The determination of the realizability of the deferred tax assets is highly subjective and dependent upon judgment concerning management’s evaluation of both positive and negative evidence, the forecasts of future income, applicable tax planning strategies, and assessments of the current and future economic and business conditions. We consider both positive and negative evidence regarding the ultimate realizability of our deferred tax assets. Positive evidence includes the existence of taxes paid in available carry-back years as well as the probability that taxable income will be generated in future periods, while negative evidence includes a cumulative loss in the current year and prior two years and general business and economic trends. At December 31, 2008, we recorded a valuation allowance relating to our deferred tax asset. This determination was based, largely, on the negative evidence of a cumulative loss in the most recent three year period caused primarily by the significant loan loss provisions made during 2008. In addition, general uncertainty surrounding the future economic and business conditions have increased the likelihood of volatility in our future earnings. We believe, based on our internal earnings projections, that we will generate future taxable income that will result in the realization of this deferred tax asset. However, this positive evidence was not sufficient to overcome the negative evidence of our recent cumulative loss.

At times, we apply different tax treatment for selected transactions for tax return purposes than for income tax financial reporting purposes. The different positions result from the varying application of statutes, rules, regulations, and interpretations, and our accruals for income taxes include reserves for these differences in position. Our estimate of the value of these reserves contains assumptions based upon our past experience and judgments about potential actions by taxing authorities, and we believe that the level of these reserves is reasonable. We initially recognize the financial statement effects of a tax position when it is more likely than not, based on the technical merits, that the position will be sustained upon examinations. Subsequently, the reserves are then utilized or reversed when we determine the more likely than not threshold is no longer met, once the

27

statute of limitations has expired, or the tax matter is effectively settled. However, because reserve balances are estimates that are subject to uncertainties, the ultimate resolution of these matters may be greater or less than the amounts we have accrued.

Derivative Financial Instruments

We use derivative financial instruments (derivatives), including interest rate exchange and floor and collar agreements, to accommodate individual customer needs and to assist in our interest rate risk management. In accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 133, “Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities” (“SFAS 133”), all derivatives are measured and reported at fair value on our consolidated balance sheet as either an asset or a liability. For derivatives that are designated and qualify as a fair value hedge, the gain or loss on the derivative, as well as the offsetting loss or gain on the hedged item attributable to the effective portion of the hedged risk, are recognized in current earnings during the period of the change in the fair values. For derivatives that are designated and qualify as a cash flow hedge, the effective portion of the gain or loss on the derivative is reported as a component of other comprehensive income and reclassified into earnings in the same period or periods during which the hedged transaction affects earnings. For all hedging relationships, derivative gains and losses that are not effective in hedging the changes in fair value or expected cash flows of the hedged item are recognized immediately in current earnings during the period of the change in fair value. Similarly, the changes in the fair value of derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting under SFAS 133 or are not designated as an accounting hedge are also reported currently in earnings.

At the inception of a hedge and quarterly thereafter, a formal assessment is performed to determine whether changes in the fair values or cash flows of the derivatives have been highly effective in offsetting the changes in the fair values or cash flows of the hedged item and whether they are expected to be highly effective in the future. If it is determined that derivatives are not highly effective as a hedge, hedge accounting is discontinued for the period. Once hedge accounting is terminated, all changes in fair value of the derivatives flow through the consolidated statements of operations in other noninterest income, which results in greater volatility in our earnings.

The estimates of fair values of our derivatives are calculated using independent valuation models to estimate market-based valuations. The valuations are determined using widely accepted valuation techniques, including discounted cash flow analysis of the expected cash flow of each derivative. This analysis reflects the contractual terms of the derivative and uses observable market-based inputs, including interest rate curves and implied volatilities. In addition, the fair value estimate also incorporates a credit valuation adjustment to reflect the risk of nonperformance by both us and our counterparties in the fair value measurement. The resulting fair values produced by these proprietary valuation models are in part theoretical and, therefore, can vary between derivative dealers and are not necessarily reflective of the actual price at which the derivative contract could be traded. Small changes in assumptions can result in significant changes in valuation. The risks inherent in the determination of the fair value of a derivative may result in volatility in our statement of operations.

Valuation of Investment Securities

Each quarter we review our investment securities portfolio to determine whether unrealized losses are temporary or other than temporary, based on an evaluation of the creditworthiness of the issuers/guarantors, as well as the underlying collateral, if applicable. Our analysis includes an evaluation of the type of security, the length of time and extent to which the fair value has been less than the security’s carrying value, the characteristics of the underlying collateral, the degree of credit support provided by subordinate tranches within the total issuance, independent credit ratings and discounted cash flow analysis. We utilize various independent pricing sources to obtain fair values and perform discounted cash flow analysis for selected securities. When the discounted cash flow analysis we obtain from those independent pricing sources indicates that it is probable that all future principal and interest payments would be received in accordance with their original contractual terms and we have both the intent and ability to hold the investment security until maturity, the unrealized loss is

28

deemed temporary. Our assessments of creditworthiness and the resultant expected cash flows are complicated by the significant uncertainties surrounding not only the specific security and its underlying collateral but also the severity of the current overall economic downturn. Our cash flow estimates for mortgage-backed securities are based on estimates of mortgage default rates and future housing prices, which are difficult to predict. Changes in assumptions can result in material changes in expected cash flows. Therefore, unrealized losses that we have determined to be temporary may at a later date be determined to be other than temporary and have a material impact on our statement of operations.

Results of Operations as of and for the Years Ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006

Net Interest Income

Net interest income is the difference between total interest income and fees generated by interest-earning assets and total interest expense paid on interest-bearing liabilities. Net interest income is our principal source of earnings. The amount of net interest income is affected by changes in the volume and mix of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, and the level of rates earned or paid on those assets and liabilities.

Year Ended December 31, 2008 as Compared to Year Ended December 31, 2007. Net interest income was $92.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, as compared to $104.7 million for 2007, a decrease of $12.4 million, or 11.8%. With an adjustment for tax-exempt income, our consolidated net interest income was $95.6 million, $12.6 million, or 11.6%, less than tax equivalent net interest income of $108.2 million during 2007. These non-GAAP tax-equivalent measures are discussed more fully below.

Our tax-equivalent net interest margin was 2.55% during 2008, 78 basis points lower than the net interest margin of 3.33% during 2007. The decline in the net interest margin resulted from the decline in earning asset yields outpacing the decline in our interest-bearing funding cost. The yield on our interest-earning assets decreased 155 basis points to 5.54% in 2008 from 7.09% during 2007, primarily as a result of the decline in short term market interest rates driving down the yield on variable rate loans. The percentage of fixed rate loans declined to 31% of the portfolio at December 31, 2008, as compared to 43% at December 31, 2007. This change in the mix of our loans also contributed to the decline in our net interest margin. This decline in loan yield was offset by an increase in loan volume and an increase in both volume and rate on the investment portfolio. Over the same time period, the cost of our interest-bearing liabilities decreased 101 basis points to 3.61% during 2008 from 4.62% during 2007.

Average interest-earning assets increased $495.8 million, or 15.2%, to $3.75 billion during 2008, compared to $3.25 billion during 2007. Average loans were $2.79 billion in 2008, an increase of $283.3 million, or 11.3%, as compared to average loans of $2.51 billion in 2007. Average investment securities increased $184.2 million, or 25.9%, to $895.4 million during 2008, as compared to average investment securities of $711.2 million during 2007.

Average interest-bearing liabilities increased $457.5 million, or 17.3%, to $3.11 billion during 2008, compared to $2.65 billion during 2007. Average total deposits increased $352.0 million, or 13.7%, in 2008 to $2.92 billion from $2.57 billion. See “Deposits” below for further discussion of the changes in our deposit balances during 2008. In addition, increases in average borrowings of $49.2 million and FHLB advances of $57.9 million supported interest-earning asset growth in 2008.

Year Ended December 31, 2007 as Compared to Year Ended December 31, 2006. Net interest income was $104.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2007, as compared to $111.2 million for 2006, a decrease of $6.5 million, or 5.8%. With an adjustment for tax-exempt income, our consolidated net interest income was $108.2 million, $6.3 million, or 5.5%, less than tax equivalent net interest income of $114.5 million during 2006. These non-GAAP tax-equivalent measures are discussed more fully below. The decrease in net interest income was a result of a decline in our net interest margin.

29

Our tax-equivalent net interest margin was 3.33% during 2007, 27 basis points lower than the net interest margin of 3.60% during 2006. The decline in the net interest margin resulted from our funding cost outpacing the increase in our total earning asset yield. While investment yields during 2007 benefited from increases in term market interest rates that occurred during 2007, competitive pricing pressure for loans and the impact of higher nonaccrual loans resulted in a decline in the yield on total loans. Our funding costs increased as a result of changes in funding mix and the repricing of term deposits to higher interest rates.

Our tax-equivalent net interest spread, which is determined by subtracting the yield on interest-earning assets from the cost of interest-bearing liabilities, declined 36 basis points during 2007 to 2.47%, compared to 2.83% in 2006. During 2007, our yield on our interest-earning assets increased 4 basis points to 7.09% from 7.05% during 2006. However, over the same time period, the cost of our interest-bearing liabilities increased 40 basis points to 4.62% during 2007 from 4.22% during 2006.

Average interest-earning assets increased $70.5 million, or 2.2%, to $3.25 billion during 2007, compared to $3.18 billion during 2006. Higher average loans accounted for most of the increase in average-earning assets during 2007. Average loans were $2.51 billion in 2007, an increase of $76.8 million, or 3.2%, as compared to average loans of $2.43 billion in 2006. Average commercial loans increased $114.0 million, or 5.1%, to $2.33 billion during 2007, compared to $2.21 billion during 2006. Decreases in consumer related loans of $37.1 million, or 17.2%, partly offset this increase.

Average FHLB borrowings were $124.1 million during 2007 as compared to $80.5 million during 2006, and average interest-bearing deposit balances were $2.18 billion during 2007, compared to $2.17 billion during 2006. Increases in interest-bearing demand deposits, primarily higher rate money market accounts, were offset by decreases in average time deposit and savings account balances. See “Deposits” below for further discussion of the changes in our deposit balances during 2007.

Tax-Equivalent Measures. As part of our evaluation of net interest income, we review our consolidated average balances, our yield on average interest-earning assets, and the costs of average interest-bearing liabilities. Such yields and costs are derived by dividing income or expense by the average balance of assets or liabilities. Because management reviews net interest income on a taxable equivalent basis, the analysis contains certain non-GAAP financial measures. In these non-GAAP financial measures, interest income and net interest income are adjusted to reflect tax-exempt interest income on an equivalent before-tax basis assuming a tax rate of 35%. This assumed rate may differ from our actual effective income tax rate. In addition, the earning asset yield, net interest margin, and the net interest rate spread are adjusted to a fully taxable equivalent basis. We believe that these measures and ratios present a more meaningful measure of the performance of interest-earning assets because they provide a better basis for comparison of net interest income regardless of the mix of taxable and tax-exempt instruments.

30

The following table reconciles the tax-equivalent net interest income to net interest income as reported in our Consolidated Statements of Operations. In addition, the earning asset yield, net interest margin and net interest spread are shown with and without the tax equivalent adjustment.

	For the Year Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006
	(dollars in thousands)
Net interest income as reported	$	92,351		$	104,705		$	111,192
Tax equivalent adjustment-investments		3,140			3,272			2,991
Tax equivalent adjustment-loans		126			240			353
Tax equivalent net interest income	$	95,617		$	108,217		$	114,536
Yield on earning assets without tax adjustment		5.45	%		6.98	%		6.94	%
Yield on earning assets – tax equivalent		5.54	%		7.09	%		7.05	%
Net interest margin without tax adjustment		2.46	%		3.22	%		3.49	%
Net interest margin – tax equivalent		2.55	%		3.33	%		3.60	%
Net interest spread without tax adjustment		1.84	%		2.36	%		2.72	%
Net interest spread – tax equivalent		1.93	%		2.47	%		2.83	%

31

The following table presents, for the periods indicated, certain information relating to our consolidated average balances and reflects our yield on average interest-earning assets and costs of average interest-bearing liabilities. The table contains certain non-GAAP financial measures to adjust tax-exempt interest income on an equivalent before-tax basis assuming a tax rate of 35%.

	Year Ended December 31,
	2008							2007							2006
	AVERAGE BALANCE			INTEREST		YIELD/ RATE (%)		AVERAGE BALANCE			INTEREST		YIELD/ RATE (%)		AVERAGE BALANCE			INTEREST		YIELD/ RATE (%)
	(dollars in thousands)
INTEREST-EARNING ASSETS:
Investment securities (1):
Taxable	$	754,811		$	38,633	5.12	%	$	564,962		$	26,643	4.72	%	$	574,823		$	24,779	4.31	%
Tax-exempt (tax equivalent) (2)		140,550			8,970	6.38			146,208			9,348	6.39			133,115			8,545	6.42
Total investment securities		895,361			47,603	5.32			711,170			35,991	5.06			707,938			33,324	4.71
Cash Equivalents		64,025			1,421	2.18			35,731			1,810	5.00			45,284			2,292	4.99
Loans (2) (3):
Commercial and commercial real estate		2,627,905			147,727	5.53			2,328,460			178,398	7.56			2,214,508			171,977	7.66
Residential real estate mortgages		56,660			3,150	5.56			61,253			3,555	5.80			63,904			3,581	5.60
Home equity and consumer		106,158			5,770	5.44			117,682			9,128	7.76			152,178			11,631	7.64
Fees on loans					2,043							1,689							1,539
Net loans (tax equivalent) (2)		2,790,723			158,690	5.69			2,507,395			192,770	7.69			2,430,590			188,728	7.76
Total interest earning assets (2)		3,750,109			207,714	5.54			3,254,296			230,571	7.09			3,183,812			224,344	7.05
NON-EARNING ASSETS:
Allowance for loan losses		(88,046	)						(39,524	)						(37,419	)
Cash and due from banks		57,269							55,175							59,440
Accrued interest and other assets		91,655							91,677							85,482
TOTAL ASSETS	$	3,810,987						$	3,361,624						$	3,291,315
INTEREST-BEARING LIABILITIES:
Interest-bearing deposits:
Interest-bearing demand deposits	$	748,001		$	13,114	1.75		$	888,242		$	34,919	3.93		$	772,127		$	26,956	3.49
Savings deposits		45,247			58	0.13			54,169			150	0.28			66,500			188	0.28
Time deposits		1,718,572			75,107	4.37			1,233,280			61,961	5.02			1,330,524			60,122	4.52
Total interest-bearing deposits		2,511,820			88,279	3.51			2,175,691			97,030	4.46			2,169,151			87,266	4.02
Other borrowings		313,430			9,648	3.03			264,232			11,051	4.13			263,874			10,622	3.97
Notes payable and FHLB advances		181,986			5,511	2.98			124,055			6,342	5.04			80,548			4,105	5.03
Junior subordinated debentures		86,607			7,013	8.10			86,607			7,931	9.16			87,067			7,815	8.98
Subordinated notes		14,192			1,646	11.60			—			—				—			—
Total interest-bearing liabilities		3,108,035			112,097	3.61			2,650,585			122,354	4.62			2,600,640			109,808	4.22
NONINTEREST-BEARING LIABILITIES:
Noninterest-bearing deposits		409,322							393,494							401,258
Accrued interest, taxes and other liabilities		49,483							41,442							53,251
Total noninterest-bearing liabilities		458,805							434,936							454,509
STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY		244,147							276,103							236,166
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY	$	3,810,987						$	3,361,624						$	3,291,315
Net interest income (tax equivalent) (2)				$	95,617						$	108,217						$	114,536
Net interest spread (2) (4)						1.93	%						2.47	%						2.83	%
Net interest margin (2) (5)						2.55	%						3.33	%						3.60	%

(1) Investment securities average balances are based on amortized cost.

(2) Calculations are computed on a taxable-equivalent basis using a tax rate of 35%.

(3) Nonaccrual loans are included in the above stated average balances.

(4) Net interest spread represents the difference between the average yield on interest-earning assets and the average cost of interest-bearing liabilities.

(5) Net interest margin is determined by dividing taxable equivalent net interest income by average interest-earning assets.

32

The following table presents, for the periods indicated, a summary of the changes in interest earned and interest paid resulting from changes in volume and rates for the major components of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities on a tax-equivalent basis assuming a tax rate of 35%. The impact of changes in the mix of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities is reflected in net interest income.

	2008 over 2007 INCREASE/(DECREASE)											2007 over 2006 INCREASE/(DECREASE)
	Volume			Rate			Day (1)		Net			Volume			Rate			Net
	(in thousands)
INTEREST EARNED ON:
Investment securities:
Taxable	$	9,576		$	2,415		$	—	$	11,991		$	(436	)	$	2,300		$	1,864
Tax-exempt		(362	)		(15	)		—		(377	)		843			(40	)		803
Cash equivalents		947			(1,341	)		5		(389	)		(486	)		4			(482	)
Loans		19,895			(54,504	)		528		(34,081	)		5,792			(1,750	)		4,042
Total interest-earning assets										(22,856	)								6,227
INTEREST PAID ON:
Interest-bearing demand deposits		(4,853	)		(17,048	)		96		(21,805	)		4,332			3,631			7,963
Savings deposits		(21	)		(71	)		—		(92	)		(38	)		—			(38	)
Time deposits		21,827			(8,850	)		170		13,147			(4,562	)		6,401			1,839
Other borrowings		1,802			(3,235	)		30		(1,403	)		14			415			429
Notes payable and FHLB advances		2,274			(3,121	)		17		(830	)		2,229			8			2,237
Jr. subordinated debentures		—			(941	)		22		(919	)		(41	)		157			116
Subordinated debt		1,646			—			—		1,646			—			—			—
Total interest-bearing liabilities										10,256									12,546
Net interest income, tax-equivalent	$	12,878		$	(25,676	)	$	198	$	(12,600	)	$	2,843		$	(9,162	)	$	(6,319	)

(1) The year ended December 31, 2008 had 366 days compared to 365 days for the year ended December 31, 2007.

Provision for Loan Losses

We determine a provision for loan losses that we consider sufficient to maintain an allowance to absorb probable losses inherent in our portfolio as of the balance sheet date. For additional information concerning this determination, see “Application of Critical Accounting Policies—Allowance for Loan Losses,” “Nonperforming Assets and Impaired Loans” and “Allowance for Loan Losses.”

Our provision for loan losses was $144.2 million during 2008, compared to $31.9 million during 2007. Increases in nonperforming loans and net charge-offs caused us to increase our allowance for loan losses through the provision for loan losses in 2008. Net charge-offs totaled $70.3 million, or 2.52% of average total loans, during 2008 compared to $14.7 million, or 0.59% of average total loans, in 2007. In addition, the level of nonperforming loans increased to $200.4 million, or 6.20% of total loans, at December 31, 2008, compared to nonperforming loans of $75.7 million, or 2.99% of total loans, at December 31, 2007. See “Nonperforming Assets and Impaired Loans” and “Allowance for Loan Losses” for further discussion on the credit quality of our loan portfolio and our allowance for loan losses.

Our provision for loan losses was $31.9 million in 2007, an increase of $25.9 million, compared to a provision for loan losses of $6.0 million in 2006. Net charge-offs increased to $14.7 million, or 0.59% of average total loans, in 2007 from $6.0 million, or 0.25% of average total loans, in 2006. The increase in net charge-offs in 2007 was a factor in the increase in the provision in 2007 as compared to 2006.

33

Noninterest Income

The following table presents the composition of our noninterest income for the periods indicated:

	Year Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006
	(in thousands)
Service charges	$	9,136		$	7,709		$	7,738
Impairment loss on investment securities		(2,399	)		—			—
Trust services		2,357			2,320			2,269
Other derivative income		1,936			392			494
Change in market value of employee deferred compensation plan		(1,354	)		525			589
Investment management fees		1,221			1,544			1,886
ATM fees		388			417			364
Letter of credit fees		376			527			597
Losses from partnership interests		(166	)		(247	)		(74	)
Loan syndication fees		116			2,600			1,317
Other noninterest income		826			924			1,085
Total noninterest income	$	12,437		$	16,711		$	16,265

Noninterest income of $12.4 million for 2008 was $4.3 million, or 25.6%, less than noninterest income of $16.7 million for 2007. Service charges increased $1.4 million and other derivative income increased $1.5 million in 2008. However, noninterest income in 2008 included an impairment loss of $2.4 million resulting from the write-down to fair value of a private-label mortgage-backed security. In addition, loan syndication fees declined $2.5 million to $116,000 in 2008, as compared to $2.6 million in 2007. The market value of assets in our employees’ deferred compensation plan declined $1.4 million in 2008. The change in market value is reported in both noninterest income and salary expense and therefore does not impact our net operating results.

Our noninterest income increased $446,000, or 2.7%, to $16.7 million during 2007, as compared to $16.3 million during 2006. A $1.3 million increase in loan syndication fees in 2007 primarily produced the increase. This increase was partly offset by a decline in investment management fees and an increase in losses from partnership interests.

Our service charges are principally derived from deposit accounts. Service charges increased $1.4 million, or 18.5%, in 2008 to $9.1 million, as compared to $7.7 million in 2007. Service charge income is impacted by a number of factors, including the volume of deposit accounts and service transactions, the price established for each deposit service, the earnings credit rate and the collected balances customers maintain in their commercial checking accounts. The increase in service charge revenue in 2008 was primarily caused by a decrease in the earnings credit rate given to customers on their collected account balances to offset gross activity charges. The general movement of our earnings credits rates correlates with the movement of short-term market interest rates.

In December 2008, we recorded a $2.4 million loss for other than temporary impairment on a private-label mortgage-backed security. The security, which had a par value of $3.4 million on December 31, 2008, is collateralized by adjustable rate loans with a fixed interest rate and interest only payments for the first five years. After the five year period, the principal is amortized over the remaining 25 year term of the mortgage and the interest rate adjusts annually. These mortgage loans are primarily in California and are scheduled for payment resets in mid-2009. We recognized an impairment loss for the amount by which the par value exceeded the fair value of $1.1 million as determined by a nationally recognized independent pricing service. We held private label mortgage-related securities at December 31, 2008 with a carrying value of $37.2 million and a fair value of $30.7 million. As part of our quarterly evaluation process, we obtain fair value estimates from additional independent

34

sources and perform cash flow analysis to determine if other than temporary impairment has occurred. Our analysis indicates that it is probable all cash flows will be received and we do not believe that other than temporary impairment has occurred on these securities at December 31, 2008. See “Investment Securities” below for a further discussion of private label mortgage-backed securities.

Trust fees have approximated $2.3 million over the last three years, 2006 through 2008. Trust fees are earned in connection with our offering of corporate trust services, primarily our paying agent and escrow services. We expect trust fees to decline significantly in 2009 as a result of the maturity of certain agreements that have produced approximately $850,000 annually in revenues and the decline in spread income we earn on invested trust funds.

We began increasing the offering of derivative instruments to our customers in 2008. Other derivative income of $1.9 million in 2008 was comprised of $712,000 of fees earned from customer derivatives and $1.2 million from changes in the fair value of derivatives that are not designated as accounting hedges. The majority of the gain in fair value arose from derivative instruments that were designated as accounting hedges at inception, but de-designated at a later date. Changes in the fair value of derivative instruments after de-designation are recorded currently in earnings. Other derivative income of $392,000 in 2007 and $494,000 in 2006, related primarily to changes in the fair value of derivative instruments not designated as accounting hedges. See “Derivative Financial Instruments” below for further discussion of our derivative instruments sold to borrowing customers.

Our employees’ deferred compensation plan allows the participants to direct the investment of their deferred compensation in selected mutual funds. The investment in these mutual funds are assets of the Company and carried at market value, while an equal and offsetting liability is recorded to reflect the obligation by the Company to the plan participants. The change in the market value of assets in our employees’ deferred compensation plan is reported in both noninterest income and salary expense and therefore has no net impact on our operating results. During 2008, the market value of those assets declined $1.4 million to $3.4 million. In 2007 and 2006, the market value of the plan assets increased $525,000 and $589,000, respectively.

Investment management fee income decreased $323,000, or 20.9%, to $1.2 million in 2008, compared to $1.5 million in 2007 and $1.9 million in 2006. The decline in fee income resulted primarily from the decline in assets under management. The decline in assets under management was a result of the decline in the general equity markets as well as fewer customers.

We have investments in limited partnerships that specialize in providing low-income housing and community development in the Chicago metropolitan area. We account for our limited partnership investments under the equity method of accounting and recognize our share of partnership losses in noninterest income and the related low-income housing tax credits as a reduction of income tax expense. Our portion of partnership losses totaled $166,000 in 2008, as compared to $247,000 and $74,000 in 2007 and 2006, respectively. At December 31, 2008, we had investments in a total of 15 partnerships with a total carrying value of $1.3 million.

Loan syndication fees totaled $116,000 in 2008, compared with $2.6 million in 2007. Historically, we earned syndication fees in connection with the syndication of real estate development loans. The decline in loan syndication fees was a result of reduced lending activity in the real estate development market in 2008. We expect our increased asset-based lending activity to result in increased loan syndication fees in 2009 and future periods.

Other noninterest income, which includes safe deposit rental fees, fees from financial planning services and other miscellaneous banking activities totaled $826,000, $924,000, and $1.1 million for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, respectively.

35

Noninterest Expense

The following table presents the composition of our noninterest expense for the periods indicated:

	Year Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006
	(dollars in thousands)
Salaries and employee benefits:
Salaries, employment taxes and medical insurance	$	36,406		$	32,402		$	32,208
Sign-on bonuses and severance		6,088			575			530
Incentives, commissions and retirement benefits		5,361			4,794			7,914
Total salaries and employee benefits		47,855			37,771			40,652
Occupancy of premises		7,812			8,673			7,842
Furniture and equipment		3,094			3,431			3,627
Legal fees, net		5,016			2,464			2,166
Goodwill impairment		—			23,237			—
Nonperforming asset expense		4,711			643			542
FDIC assessment		2,687			307			320
Early extinguishment of debt		2,500			—			—
Other professional services		2,311			2,427			1,629
Computer processing		1,995			1,737			1,758
Advertising and public relations		1,170			1,510			1,525
Corporate insurance		1,131			1,108			1,211
Consulting		866			636			1,018
Other noninterest expense		12,222			10,581			10,969
Total noninterest expense	$	93,370		$	94,525		$	73,259
Efficiency Ratio (1)		87.11	%		77.85	%		57.48	%

(1) The efficiency ratio is determined by dividing noninterest expense by an amount equal to net interest income plus noninterest income, adjusted for gains or losses on investment securities.

Total noninterest expense in 2008 was $93.4 million, a decrease of $1.2 million, or 1.2%, from $94.5 million in 2007. Noninterest expense in 2007 included a one-time charge of $23.2 million for the impairment of our goodwill.

Total noninterest expense in 2007 was $94.5 million, which was $21.3 million higher than noninterest expense of $73.3 million in 2006. This increase was due primarily to the $23.2 million goodwill impairment charge partially offset by a decrease in total salaries and employee benefits expense.

Total salaries and employee benefits expense in 2008 was $47.9 million, compared to $37.8 million in 2007. Salaries and benefit expense in 2008 increased $10.1 million, or 26.7%, as base salary expense increased $5.3 million, severance expense increased $3.8 million, sign-on bonus expense increased $1.8 million and the cost of restricted stock grants increased to $1.4 million. The increases in total salaries and benefits expenses were partially offset by the $1.4 million reduction in the market value of the employees’ deferred compensation plan assets. Changes in the market value of the employees’ deferred compensation plan assets are included in the salaries, employment taxes, and medical insurance expense caption within total salaries and employee benefits expense. During 2008, we hired a new senior management team and 50 commercial relationship managers to implement a strategic growth plan. In addition, we replaced a number of our existing support staff. Our recruiting increased base salary expense, cash sign-on bonuses, incentives and stock-based awards to attract new employees.

36

Total salaries and employee benefits expense in 2007 was $37.8 million, compared to $40.7 million in 2006. A $3.1 million decrease in incentive and employee benefit plan expenses produced most of the decrease as compared to 2006.

Salaries, employment taxes and medical insurance expense increased $4.0 million, or 12.4%, to $36.4 million in 2008, as compared to $32.4 million in 2007. Base salaries increased $5.3 million, or 18.3%, and the number of total full-time equivalent employees increased to 451 at December 31, 2008, from 418 at December 31, 2007. In addition, employment taxes and medical insurance premiums also increased. The increases in salaries, taxes and insurance were partially offset by the $1.4 million reduction in the market value of the employees’ deferred compensation plan assets. Changes in the market value of the deferred compensation plan assets is reported both in noninterest income and salary expense and therefore has no net impact on our operating results. Total salaries, employment taxes and medical insurance expense of $32.4 million in 2007 were largely unchanged compared to the expense of $32.2 million in 2006. The number of full-time equivalent employees was 421 at December 31, 2006 compared to 418 at the end of 2007.

Severance expense was $4.1 million in 2008, as compared to $318,000 in 2007 and $326,000 in 2006. Sign-on bonuses were $2.0 million in 2008, as compared to $257,000 in 2007 and $204,000 in 2006.

Total incentives, commissions and retirement benefits increased $567,000, or 11.8%, to $5.4 million in 2008, compared to $4.8 million in 2007. The increase was primarily a result of increased stock-based awards in 2008 which were primarily due to the granting of stock-based awards associated with the hiring of key individuals associated with our strategic growth initiative. Equity based compensation increased to $2.2 million in 2008, as compared to $1.6 million in 2007. While we incurred incentive, guaranteed and other bonus expense primarily associated with our recruiting activities in 2008, we did not accrue for any annual performance-based bonus pool in 2008. Total incentives, commissions and retirement benefits decreased $3.1 million, or 39.4%, to $4.8 million in 2007, compared to $7.9 million in 2006. The decrease in cash-based incentives and retirement plan expenses reflected the diminished financial performance in 2008 and 2007 as compared to 2006.

Our occupancy of premises expense was $7.8 million in 2008, as compared to $8.7 million in 2007 and $7.8 million in 2006. Occupancy expenses were higher in 2007 because we moved our downtown Chicago facility from one leased facility to another, as the lease on the existing facility was set to expire in December 2007. As a result, we incurred lease expense for the new facility and the existing facility as we transitioned to the new space. In addition, we incurred costs to physically move to the new facility. Also, costs associated with the closing of our Orland Park banking center and portions of our leased administrative offices at our Burbank facility contributed to the increase in occupancy costs in 2007.

Furniture and equipment expense was $3.1 million in 2008, compared to $3.4 million and $3.6 million in 2007 and 2006, respectively. Lower depreciation and maintenance produced the decrease in the yearly comparisons.

Total legal fees, net of reimbursements, were $5.0 million in 2008, compared to $2.5 million and $2.2 million in 2007 and 2006, respectively. Legal fees are reported net of reimbursements received from customers. The increase in legal fees in 2008 was primarily related to our lending and collection activities, in particular relating to our nonperforming assets. In addition, we incurred increased legal fees in 2008 for revising our employee benefit plans, recruiting and regulatory matters.

We recorded a $23.2 million goodwill impairment charge in 2007 to write-off our remaining goodwill balance. Our goodwill was created from our 1997 acquisition of the Bank. Historically, we tested goodwill for impairment on July 1 of each year, or between annual assessment dates whenever events or significant changes in circumstances indicated that the carrying value may be impaired. Because of adverse changes in the business climate that impacted the Bank during the fourth quarter of 2007, we performed an additional goodwill impairment test as of December 31, 2007. As a result of a decline in the market price of our common stock to

37

levels significantly below our book value, we determined that the entire amount of our goodwill was impaired and recorded the goodwill impairment charge in the fourth quarter of 2007.

Nonperforming asset expense was $4.7 million in 2008, compared to $643,000 in 2007 and $542,000 in 2006. The increase in nonperforming asset expense in 2008 was primarily a result of the recognition of a $2.9 million liability for unfunded commitments under standby letters of credit associated with certain of our impaired loans. In addition, we recognized $857,000 of additional provisions to reduce the carrying value of certain other real estate owned in 2008, as compared to $7,000 in 2007. Nonperforming asset expense is influenced by the number and complexity of the lending relationships being managed in our work-out area and properties being maintained pending their sale. An increase in nonperforming assets and loans in our work-out area caused the increase in 2008. We expect that a higher level of nonperforming assets at December 31, 2008 than in past years may result in an increase in this expense in 2009.

FDIC insurance premiums were $2.7 million in 2008 as compared to $307,000 and $320,000 in 2007 and 2006, respectively. In 2007, the FDIC increased the rates paid for deposit insurance and, at the same time, granted assessment credits to qualifying institutions. The Bank utilized its assessment credit throughout 2007 and in the first quarter of 2008 to offset the increased deposit insurance premiums. The FDIC is raising insurance premiums significantly in 2009. For the first half of 2009, premium rates will be doubled as compared to the fourth quarter of 2008. In addition, beginning in June 2009, the FDIC is further increasing insurance premiums for banks that utilize brokered CDs and secured FHLB advances over certain defined limits. Based on our balance sheet at December 31, 2008, both of these additional premiums will likely apply to our Bank. Additionally, we elected to participate in the FDIC’s Temporary Liquidity Guarantee Program (TLGP), which will also increase our insurance premiums. We expect that deposit insurance premiums for the Bank in 2009 will increase significantly. On February 27, 2009, the FDIC announced an interim rule pursuant to which the FDIC will impose an emergency special assessment equal to 20 basis points on each insured institution’s assessment base on June 30, 2009, and paid to the FDIC on September 30, 2009. The assessment base of the special assessment will be the same as the assessment base for regular deposit insurance premiums. We estimate that our share of the emergency special assessment will be approximately $6.3 million.

In 2008, we incurred early extinguishment of debt expense of $2.5 million for the early redemption of approximately $190 million of above market rate brokered certificates of deposits. The unamortized issuance costs and fair value adjustments on these deposits were charged to expense at the time of redemption. At December 31, 2008, we have $52.5 million of brokered certificates of deposit that are callable at our option in 2009 with $891,000 of unamortized issuance costs and fair value adjustments.

Other professional fees were $2.3 million during 2008, compared to $2.4 million and $1.6 million in 2007 and 2006, respectively. Other professional services expense in 2007 increased compared to 2006, primarily due to the engagement of a third-party asset management firm to provide sub-advisory investment management services.

Corporate insurance expense was $1.1 million in each of the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007 and was $1.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2006. Due to adverse economic conditions in the banking industry, we expect that our corporate insurance expense may be higher in the future.

Consulting expense was $866,000, $636,000, and $1.0 million for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, respectively. The increase in consulting expense in 2008 was a result of the management services agreement entered into with Financial Investments Corporation on September 29, 2008. The contract amount of $750,000 was prepaid and is being expensed over the nine month term of the contract, which ends June 30, 2009.

Other noninterest expense principally includes certain professional fees, operating losses and other operating expenses such as telephone, postage, office supplies, and printing. Other noninterest expense was $12.2 million in

38

2008 compared to $10.6 million in 2007 and $11.0 million in 2006. Increases in business entertainment and loan related expenses, board of director’s fees and operating losses all contributed to the higher level of other noninterest expense in 2008 as compared to 2007. The increase in business entertainment was due to the increase in the number of commercial bankers. Board of director’s fees increased as a result of an increase in the number of board meetings as well as an increase in the number of directors.

Our efficiency ratio was 87.11% for 2008, compared to 77.85% for 2007 and 57.48% for 2006. The increase in the efficiency ratio in 2008 was primarily caused by the decrease in net interest income. The increase in the efficiency ratio in 2007 was primarily caused by the $23.2 million goodwill impairment charge.

Income Taxes

We reported an income tax benefit of $8.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2008 on a pre-tax loss of $132.7 million, in recognition of our ability to carry back the current loss to recover taxes paid in prior years. As of December 31, 2008, we had a current federal income tax receivable of $16 million reflecting the impact of utilizing the federal income tax loss generated in 2008 to file for refunds of taxes paid in 2006 and a portion of taxes paid in 2007. We also established a $46.4 million valuation allowance resulting in a net deferred tax asset of $6.9 million at December 31, 2008. The realizability of our deferred tax asset depends upon our ability to derive benefits from the tax deductions inherent in the deferred tax asset by refunds of prior taxes paid or by reducing future tax obligations. We believe, based on our internal earnings projections, that we will realize the benefit of this deferred tax asset as we achieve profitability in the future. However, the significance of our pre-tax loss, which resulted in a cumulative loss when combined with our results in the prior two years, created a presumption under generally accepted accounting principles that a valuation allowance is required. In addition, the uncertain future economic and business climate increases the likelihood of volatility in our future earnings. Generally accepted accounting principles limit the extent to which a company can utilize projections of future income to support recorded deferred tax assets when a cumulative loss has occurred. Therefore, we recorded an after-tax, non-cash charge of $46.4 million to establish a valuation allowance against our deferred tax asset. Management is required to re-evaluate the deferred tax asset and the related valuation allowance quarterly. A reduction in the valuation allowance would lower the amount of income tax expense recognized in our consolidated statement of operations in future periods.

Income tax expense was $4.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2007, notwithstanding the pre-tax loss of $5.0 million, primarily because the goodwill impairment charge of $23.2 million was not deductible for income tax purposes. Our effective tax rate was lower because of the lower level of pre-tax earnings and the impact on the effective income tax rate of our tax-exempt interest income was larger than in previous periods. In addition, during 2007, the State of Illinois passed legislation increased our effective tax rate beginning in 2008. As a result of the enactment of this legislation, we recognized a reduction in income tax expense of $376,000 by increasing our deferred tax assets.

Income tax expense was $2.0 million in 2006, resulting in an effective tax rate of 4.2%. In 2006, income tax expense of $18.0 million was reduced by the recognition of $15.5 million of tax benefits relating to deductions taken on prior year tax returns that had not been recognized for financial reporting purposes. Tax liabilities established for these tax uncertainties were no longer required in 2006 primarily as a result of the expiration of the statute of limitations with respect to our 2002 federal income tax return and based upon the results of examinations by taxing authorities with respect to other tax years. In addition, tax expense in 2006 was reduced by refunds of prior years’ state income taxes totaling $443,000.

Impact of Inflation and Changing Prices

The consolidated financial statements and notes thereto presented herein have been prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, which require the measurement of our financial position and operating results in terms of historical amounts without considering the changes in the relative purchasing power

39

of money over time due to inflation. The impact of inflation is reflected in the increased cost of our operations. Unlike industrial companies, nearly all of our assets and liabilities are monetary in nature. As a result, interest rates have a greater impact on our performance than do the effects of the general levels of inflation. Interest rates do not necessarily move in the same direction or, to the same extent, as the price of goods and services.

Financial Condition

Our total assets of $4.39 billion increased by $832.4 million, or 23.4%, during 2008 at December 31, 2008, compared to $3.56 billion at year-end 2007. Loans increased $699.9 million, or 27.6%, and investment securities increased $202.2 million, or 22.7%. The asset growth was funded primarily with time deposits, which increased $786.2 million, or 64.5%, and FHLB advances which increased $245.0 million to $450.0 million at year end 2008. We issued $60 million in subordinated debt at the subsidiary bank level with a term of eight years and carrying a 10% interest rate. In addition, total stockholders’ equity increased $52.8 million during 2008 to $307.1 million from $254.3 million at December 31, 2007. Our issuance of two classes of preferred stock (Series A and B) and common stock warrants (relating to both the issuance of the subordinated debt and Series B preferred stock) increased our stockholders’ equity by $165.8 million.

Interest-bearing Cash Equivalents

Interest-bearing cash equivalents consist of interest-bearing deposits with banks or other financial institutions, federal funds sold and securities purchased under agreements to resell with original maturities less than 30 days. All federal funds are sold overnight with daily settlement required.

Investment Securities

Our investment portfolio is designed to provide a source of income with minimal risk of loss, a source of liquidity and interest rate risk management opportunities. In managing our investment portfolio within the composition of the entire balance sheet, we balance our earnings, credit, interest rate risk, and liquidity considerations, with a goal of maximizing longer-term overall profitability.

40

The following tables present the composition and maturities of our investment portfolio by major category as of the dates indicated:

	AVAILABLE-FOR-SALE				HELD-TO-MATURITY				TOTAL
	Amortized cost		Estimated fair value		Amortized cost		Estimated fair value		Amortized cost		Estimated fair value
	(in thousands)
December 31, 2008:
U.S. government sponsored agency securities	$	64,993	$	66,985	$	—	$	—	$	64,993	$	66,985
Collateralized mortgage obligations		152,198		151,703		—		—		152,198		151,703
Mortgage-backed securities		704,684		722,933		—		—		704,684		722,933
State and municipal obligations		137,958		138,175		—		—		137,958		138,175
Other debt securities		14,563		14,773		25		25		14,588		14,798
Total	$	1,074,396	$	1,094,569	$	25	$	25	$	1,074,421	$	1,094,594
December 31, 2007:
U.S. government sponsored agency securities	$	105,720	$	106,305	$	—	$	—	$	105,720	$	106,305
Collateralized mortgage obligations		167,509		165,577		—		—		167,509		165,577
Mortgage-backed securities		472,477		476,124		—		—		472,477		476,124
State and municipal obligations		143,271		144,340		—		—		143,271		144,340
Other debt securities		—		—		25		25		25		25
Total	$	888,977	$	892,346	$	25	$	25	$	889,002	$	892,371
December 31, 2006:
U.S. government sponsored agency securities	$	157,848	$	155,591	$	—	$	—	$	157,848	$	155,591
Collateralized mortgage obligations		165,297		161,439		—		—		165,297		161,439
Mortgage-backed securities		207,275		203,798		—		—		207,275		203,798
State and municipal obligations		147,566		147,982		—		—		147,566		147,982
Other debt securities		—		—		275		275		275		275
Total	$	677,986	$	668,810	$	275	$	275	$	678,261	$	669,085

Investment securities do not include investments in Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”) and Federal Reserve Bank stock of $29.6 million, $15.3 million, and $11.8 million, at December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, respectively. These investments are stated at cost, which approximates fair value.

The following table discloses the composition of our mortgage-related securities as of December 31, 2008 by type of issuer.

	Amortized Cost						Fair Value
	Pass Thru Securities		CMOs		Total		Pass Thru Securities		CMOs		Total
Government sponsored-enterprise securities	$	693,307	$	126,361	$	819,668	$	715,443	$	128,498	$	843,941
Private issuers		11,377		25,837		37,214		7,490		23,205		30,695
	$	704,684	$	152,198	$	856,882	$	722,933	$	151,703	$	874,636

41

In 2008, we purchased $352.8 million of investment securities. The majority of the purchases were GNMA mortgage-backed securities acquired in the fourth quarter of 2008. Our purchases, partly offset by maturities and repayments of mortgage-related securities, resulted in an increase to our investment portfolio during 2008 of $202.2 million, or 22.7%, to $1.1 billion at December 31, 2008 from $892.4 million at December 31, 2007. The overall weighted average life of our investment portfolio at December 31, 2008 was approximately 6.0 years, compared to approximately 5.4 years at December 31, 2007. Mortgage-related securities comprised 79.9% of the investment securities portfolio at December 31, 2008 as compared to 71.9% at December 31, 2007.

Our investment portfolio increased by $223.3 million, or 33.4%, to $892.4 million at December 31, 2007, compared to $669.1 million at year-end 2006. In 2007, we purchased $344.1 million of securities, the majority of which were government-sponsored-enterprise issued mortgage-backed securities.

At December 31, 2008, we had a net unrealized gain on the available for sale securities of $20.2 million, or 1.9% of amortized cost, compared to a net unrealized gain on the available for sale securities of $3.4 million, or 0.4% of amortized cost, at December 31, 2007. At December 31, 2008, we had 63 investment securities with a carrying value of $86.9 million that were in a gross unrealized loss position of $7.7 million. We analyze each of these securities to determine if other-than-temporary impairment has occurred. The factors we consider include the magnitude of the unrealized loss in comparison to the security’s carrying value, the length of time the security has been in an unrealized loss position and the current independent bond rating for the security. Those securities with unrealized losses for more than 12 months or for more than 10% of their carrying value are subjected to further analysis to determine if it is probable that not all the contractual cash flows will be received. We obtain fair value estimates from additional independent sources and perform cash flow analysis to determine if other than temporary impairment has occurred. Of the 63 securities with gross unrealized losses at December 31, 2008, only 6 securities have been in a loss position for 12 months or more and none had other than temporary impairment.

In 2008, we recognized other-than-temporary impairment on one private-label mortgage-backed security that is collateralized by adjustable rate loans with a fixed interest rate and interest only payments for the first five years. After the five year period, the principal is amortized over the remaining 25 year term of the mortgages and the interest rate adjusts annually. These mortgage loans are primarily in California and are scheduled to reset in mid-2009. The security’s carrying value was reduced by $2.4 million to $1.1 million at December 31, 2008, the fair value as determined by a nationally recognized independent pricing service. We held private-label mortgage-related securities with a carrying value of $37.2 million at December 31, 2008, the fair value of which was $30.7 million. These private label securities comprised 3.5% of our total investment portfolio at December 31, 2008. As part of our quarterly evaluation process, we obtain fair value estimates from additional independent sources and perform cash flow analysis to determine if other than temporary impairment has occurred. Our analysis indicates that it is probable all cash flows will be received and we do not believe that other than temporary impairment has occurred on these securities at December 31, 2008.

At December 31, 2008, we held no securities of any single issuer, other than U.S. government agencies, that exceeded 10% of stockholders’ equity. Although we hold securities issued by municipalities within the State of Illinois that, in the aggregate, exceed 10% of stockholders’ equity, none of the holdings from any individual municipal issuer exceed this threshold.

As a member, we are required to hold stock in the Federal Home Loan Bank and the Federal Reserve Bank. Our holdings of FHLB and FRB stock at December 31, 2008 and 2007 consisted of the following:

	December 31, 2008		December 31, 2007
	(in thousands)
Federal Home Loan Bank of Chicago (FHLB)	$	22,500	$	10,250
Federal Reserve Bank (FRB)		7,130		5,060
	$	29,630	$	15,310

42

The amount of FHLB stock required to be held is based on the Bank’s asset size and the amount of borrowings from the FHLB. The Bank increased FHLB advances to $450.0 million at December 31, 2008 from $205.0 million at December 31, 2007, which increased our stock holding requirement by $12 million. Currently, the FHLB of Chicago is under a formal written agreement with its regulator requiring the regulator’s prior approval for the payment of dividends or redemptions of capital stock. We have assessed the ultimate recoverability of our FHLB stock and we believe no impairment has occurred. We also hold $40.5 million of FHLB debt securities in our investment portfolio, the fair value of which exceeds our carrying value at December 31, 2008.

The amount of FRB stock required to be held is based on the Bank’s common stock and surplus. The Bank’s surplus increased during 2008 primarily as a result of $107.0 million in capital contributions from the parent bank holding company and $4.7 million from the issuance of warrants in connection with the subordinated debt issuance. The Bank will be required to increase its holdings of FRB stock in the first quarter of 2009 by an additional $1.4 million as a result of capital injected by the parent holding company in December 2008.

Investment securities with an approximate book value of $904 million and $549 million at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively, were pledged to collateralize certain deposits, securities sold under agreements to repurchase, FHLB advances, and for other purposes as required or permitted by law.

Investment Portfolio – Maturity and Yields

The following table summarizes the contractual maturity of investment securities and their weighted average yields:

	AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2008
	WITHIN ONE YEAR				AFTER ONE BUT WITHIN FIVE YEARS				AFTER FIVE BUT WITHIN TEN YEARS				AFTER TEN YEARS				TOTAL
	AMOUNT		YIELD		AMOUNT		YIELD		AMOUNT		YIELD		AMOUNT		YIELD		AMOUNT		YIELD
	(dollars in thousands)
Available-for-sale securities (1):
U.S. government sponsored agency securities	$	—		%	$	66,985	4.34	%	$	—		%	$	—		%	$	66,985	4.34	%
Collateralized mortgage obligations (2)		23,584	4.38			108,024	4.93			20,095	5.03			—				151,703	4.86
Mortgage-backed securities (2)		118,500	5.40			316,423	5.43			185,352	5.60			102,658	5.58			722,933	5.49
States and political subdivisions (3)		2,306	6.49			4,382	7.08			25,642	6.85			105,845	6.22			138,175	6.36
Other debt securities		—				—				—				14,773	9.05			14,773	9.05
Total available-for-sale		144,390	5.25			495,814	5.19			231,089	5.69			223,276	6.11			1,094,569	5.49
Held-to-maturity securities (4):
Other debt securities		25	2.25			—	—			—	—			—	—			25	2.25
Total held-to-maturity		25	2.25			—	—			—	—			—	—			25	2.25
Total securities	$	144,415	5.25	%	$	495,814	5.19	%	$	231,089	5.69	%	$	223,276	6.11	%	$	1,094,594	5.49	%

(1) Based on estimated fair value.

(2) Maturities of mortgage-backed securities and collateralized mortgage obligations (“CMOs”) are based on anticipated lives of the underlying mortgages, not contractual maturities. CMO maturities are based on cash flow (or payment) windows derived from broker market consensus.

(3) Rates on obligations of states and political subdivisions have been adjusted to tax equivalent yields using a 35% income tax rate.

(4) Based on amortized cost.

43

Loan Portfolio

Our primary source of income is interest on loans. The following table presents the composition of our loan portfolio by type of loan as of the dates indicated:

	As of December 31,
	2008			2007			2006			2005			2004
	(in thousands)
Commercial and industrial	$	1,485,673		$	850,196		$	770,863		$	665,023		$	656,099
Commercial real estate secured		1,058,930			839,629			791,962			793,965			732,251
Real estate – construction		531,452			671,678			744,317			684,737			531,868
Total commercial loans		3,076,055			2,361,503			2,307,142			2,143,725			1,920,218
Residential real estate – mortgages		53,859			60,195			62,453			63,789			64,569
Home equity loans and lines of credit		92,085			99,696			116,516			161,058			207,164
Consumer loans		9,163			10,551			13,237			14,972			18,386
Other loans		2,115			1,421			1,396			1,497			1,460
Gross loans		3,233,277			2,533,366			2,500,744			2,385,041			2,211,797
Less: Unearned discount		(16	)		(33	)		(59	)		(110	)		(191	)
Total loans		3,233,261			2,533,333			2,500,685			2,384,931			2,211,606
Less: Allowance for loan losses		(128,548	)		(54,681	)		(37,516	)		(37,481	)		(37,484	)
Loans, net	$	3,104,713		$	2,478,652		$	2,463,169		$	2,347,450		$	2,174,122

Our gross loan portfolio was $3.2 billion at December 31, 2008, an increase of $699.9 million, or 27.6%, compared to gross loans at December 31, 2007 of $2.5 billion. Our loan portfolio is comprised primarily of commercial loans, which constituted approximately 95% of our total loans at December 31, 2008. Our commercial loan portfolio, which includes commercial and industrial, commercial real estate secured, and real estate—construction loans totaled $3.08 billion at year-end, an increase of $714.6 million, or 30.3%, over the $2.36 billion of commercial loans at December 31, 2007. In 2008, we hired more than 50 experienced commercial bankers and support staff to support our strategic growth initiative.

Total commercial loans at December 31, 2007 were $54.4 million, or 2.4%, higher than commercial loans at December 31, 2006.

Our portfolio of consumer-oriented loan products, which includes residential real estate mortgages, home equity loans and lines of credit, and consumer loans, has continued to decline as anticipated. Consumer-oriented loan products totaled $157.2 million at year-end 2008, compared to $171.9 million at December 31, 2007 and $193.6 million at December 31, 2006. Consumer loans have continued to decline as, consistent with our strategy, we discontinued origination of indirect auto and manufactured homes loans, de-emphasized first mortgage products, and ceased acquiring home equity loans and lines from mortgage brokers.

Commercial and industrial (“C&I”) loans consist of loans to businesses or for business purposes that are either unsecured or secured by collateral other than commercial real estate. These loans totaled $1.5 billion, $850.2 million, and $770.9 million at December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, respectively, and have increased from 31% to 46% of our total loan portfolio over the last three years. C&I loans increased $635.5 million, or 74.7%, in 2008 compared to an increase of $79.3 million, or 10.3%, in 2007. Our strategy in 2008 was to increase our origination of C&I loans, thereby reducing the impact of real estate construction loans on our results of operations.

Loans secured by commercial real estate consist of commercial owner-occupied properties as well as investment properties. These loans totaled $1.1 billion, $839.6 million, and $792.0 million at December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, respectively, and have represented between 32% and 33% of our total loan portfolio over the last

44

three years. Commercial real estate secured loans increased by $219.3 million, or 26.1%, in 2008 compared to a $47.7 million increase in 2007. At December 31, 2008 and 2007, the composition of our commercial real estate secured portfolio was approximately as follows:

	December 31, 2008				December 31, 2007
	Percentage of Total Commercial Real Estate Secured		Percentage of Gross Loans		Percentage of Total Commercial Real Estate Secured		Percentage of Gross Loans
Commercial properties:
Non-owner occupied	60	%	20	%	59	%	20	%
Owner occupied	26		8		25		8
Subtotal	86		28		84		28
Residential income property	14		5		16		5
Total commercial real estate secured	100	%	33	%	100	%	33	%

Real estate-construction loans consist primarily of loans to professional real estate developers for the construction of single-family homes, town-homes, condominium conversions and commercial property. These loans totaled $531.5 million, $671.7 million, and $744.3 million at December 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, respectively. Real estate-construction loans decreased by $140.2 million, or 20.9%, in 2008, compared to a decrease of $72.6 million, or 9.8%, in 2007. Our volume of residential real estate construction loans has been impacted by the downturn in the real estate market. During 2008, we charged off or transferred to other real estate, residential construction loans of approximately $69 million. At year-end 2008, these loans comprised 16% of our loan portfolio, compared to 27% and 30% of the portfolio at December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively. At December 31, 2008 and 2007, the composition of our real estate-construction loan portfolio was approximately as follows:

	December 31, 2008				December 31, 2007
	Balance		Percentage of Gross Loans		Balance		Percentage of Gross Loans
	(dollars in thousands)
Residential construction and land	$	349,998	11	%	$	492,780	19	%
Commercial construction and land		181,454	5			178,898	8
Total real estate – construction	$	531,452	16	%	$	671,678	27	%

45

At December 31, 2008 and 2007, the composition of our residential real estate-construction portfolio was as follows:

	December 31, 2008						December 31, 2007
	Balance		Percentage of Total Construction Loans		Percentage of Gross Loans		Balance		Percentage of Total Construction Loans		Percentage of Gross Loans
	(dollars in thousands)
Residential properties:
Single family attached and detached housing	$	105,526	30	%	3	%	$	176,739	36	%	7	%
Condo (new & conversions)		95,705	27		3			127,112	26		5
Multi-family		57,495	17		1			68,976	14		2
Completed for sale		16,830	5		1			28,436	5		1
Total residential construction		275,556	79		8			401,263	81		15
Land – unimproved & farmland		52,321	15		2			68,188	14		3
Land – improved & entitled		3,921	1			*		5,344	1			*
Land – under development		18,200	5		1			17,985	4		1
Total land		74,442	21		3			91,517	19		4
Total residential construction and land	$	349,998	100	%	11	%	$	492,780	100	%	19	%

* Represents less than 1%.

Our portfolio of residential real estate mortgages continues to decline as a result of our decision to de-emphasize this product in 2001. At December 31, 2008, this portfolio totaled $53.9 million, compared to $60.2 million and $62.5 million at December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively. Correspondingly, this portfolio has declined to approximately 2% of our total loan portfolio at year end 2008. While we do not actively seek to originate new home mortgage loans, we do offer these products to our current customers, particularly to our business-owner customers.

Our portfolio of home equity loans and lines of credit also continues to decline as a result of our decision to discontinue the origination of third-party sourced home equity products in 2002. At December 31, 2008, this portfolio totaled $92.1 million, compared to $99.7 million and $116.5 million at December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively. Correspondingly, this portfolio as a percentage of total loans decreased to 3% at year-end 2008. The percentage of our home equity loans and lines that exceeded 80% of the appraised value of the underlying real estate at origination, (after giving effect to any outstanding first mortgage loans), was 9% at December 31, 2008. The Bank’s general underwriting guidelines do not allow lines in excess of 100% of the appraised value of the underlying collateral. The percentage of our outstanding home equity loans and lines that were originally sourced through mortgage brokers was 15% at year-end 2008.

Consumer loans were $9.2 million, $10.6 million, and $13.2 million at December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, respectively, and represented less than 1% of our total loans at December 31, 2008. Of total consumer loans at December 31, 2008, 77% were indirect manufactured home loans, 2% were indirect auto and boat loans, and the remaining 21% were other personal secured and unsecured loans. During 2003, we discontinued the origination of indirect auto and manufactured home loans. As a result, we expect our indirect consumer loan portfolio to continue to decline as these loans repay.

46

The following table shows our maturity distribution of gross loans as of the dates indicated:

	As of December 31, 2008 (1)
	ONE YEAR OR LESS		OVER 1 YEAR THROUGH 5 YEARS				OVER 5 YEARS
			FIXED RATE		FLOATING OR ADJUSTABLE RATE		FIXED RATE		FLOATING OR ADJUSTABLE RATE		TOTAL
	(in thousands)
Commercial and commercial real estate	$	1,019,916	$	618,345	$	754,274	$	91,669	$	60,399	$	2,544,603
Real estate – construction		401,260		18,848		110,146		—		1,198		531,452
Residential real estate – mortgages		16,399		5,511		27,230		2,984		1,735		53,859
Home equity loans and lines of credit		6,132		2,842		35,429		596		47,086		92,085
Consumer		1,545		2,186		—		5,083		349		9,163
Other loans		2,115		—		—		—		—		2,115
Total gross loans	$	1,447,367	$	647,732	$	927,079	$	100,332	$	110,767	$	3,233,277

(1) Maturities are based upon contractual dates. Demand loans are included in the one year or less category and totaled $3.5 million as of December 31, 2008.

Nonperforming Assets and Impaired Loans

Our lending officers and their managers are responsible for the ongoing review of present and projected future performance of the loans within their assigned portfolio and for risk rating such loans in accordance with the Bank’s risk rating system. In addition, an objective loan review function independently risk rates loans to monitor and confirm the reasonableness of the lending officer’s loan risk rating conclusion. Delinquency reports are reviewed monthly by the lending officers, their managers and credit administration. The responsible lending officer reports to a loan committee about the current status of loans past due or current but graded below a designated level. The committee evaluates whether the loan is appropriately risk rated and determines if the loan should be placed on nonaccrual, the need for a specific allowance for loan loss, or, if appropriate, a partial or full charge-off. Loans rated substandard or below are transferred to a separate loan work-out department, staffed by collection experts. During 2008, we upgraded and enlarged our loan work-out department to effectively handle the increase in nonperforming assets. When the loan is transferred to work-out, an independent legal review of the loan documents is performed and current appraisals are obtained.

Nonperforming loans include nonaccrual loans and interest-accruing loans contractually past due 90 days or more. All loans on which principal or interest is contractually past due 90 days or more are evaluated to determine if they are adequately secured and in the process of collection. If sufficient doubt exists as to the full collection of principal and interest on a loan, it is placed on nonaccrual and we discontinue recognizing interest income. Accrued unpaid interest, if any, on loans placed on nonaccrual is reversed against loan interest income to the extent earned in the current year, or charged off to the allowance for loan losses if applicable to the prior year.

47

The following table sets forth the amounts of nonperforming loans and other assets as of the dates indicated:

	As of December 31,
	2008			2007			2006			2005			2004
	(dollars in thousands)
Loans contractually past due 90 days or more but still accruing interest	$	153		$	4,253		$	10,046		$	2,615		$	1,807
Nonaccrual loans		200,227			71,412			23,111			10,834			12,286
Total nonperforming loans		200,380			75,665			33,157			13,449			14,093
Other real estate		13,179			2,599			412			1,139			46
Other repossessed assets		—			7			—			—			12
Total nonperforming assets	$	213,559		$	78,271		$	33,569		$	14,588		$	14,151
Restructured loans not included in nonperforming assets	$	—		$	—		$	—		$	—		$	1,777
Nonperforming loans to total loans		6.20	%		2.99	%		1.33	%		0.56	%		0.64	%
Nonperforming assets to total loans plus repossessed property		6.58	%		3.09	%		1.34	%		0.61	%		0.64	%
Nonperforming assets to total assets		4.87	%		2.20	%		0.99	%		0.44	%		0.49	%

The following table presents loans past due 30 to 89 days and still accruing as of the dates indicated:

	As of December 31,
	2008			2007			2006			2005			2004
	(dollars in thousands)
Loans contractually past due 30 through 89 days and still accruing	$	25,272		$	63,553		$	59,199		$	24,870		$	23,565
30 – 89 days past due to total loans		0.78	%		2.51	%		2.37	%		1.04	%		1.07	%

The following table presents the composition of nonaccrual loans as of December 31, 2008 and 2007.

	December 31, 2008						December 31, 2007
Loan Category	Amount		% of Nonaccrual Loans		% of Loan Category		Amount		% of Nonaccrual Loans		% of Loan Category
	(dollars in thousands)
Residential construction and land	$	114,160	57	%	33	%	$	52,978	74	%	11	%
Commercial construction and land		14,934	7		8			411	1			*
Commercial real estate		23,068	12		2			10,679	15		1
Commercial and industrial		42,263	21		3			4,348	6		1
Total commercial loans		194,425	97		6			68,416	96		3
Consumer loans		5,802	3		4			2,996	4		2
Total nonaccrual loans	$	200,227	100	%	6		$	71,412	100	%	3

* Represents less than 1%

Our nonperforming loans increased to $200.4 million at year-end 2008, compared to $75.7 million and $33.2 million at December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively. Nonperforming residential real estate construction loans comprised approximately 57% of total nonaccrual loans at December 31, 2008. The downturn in the residential housing market that began in 2006 persisted throughout 2008 and has reduced demand and market prices for developed residential lots and vacant land as well as homes. This depressed housing market has negatively impacted many of our residential real estate development customers and resulted in an increase in our nonperforming loans. We also experienced an increase in nonperforming loans in commercial and industrial and income producing commercial real estate properties during 2008. Nonaccrual commercial and industrial loans of

48

$42.3 million at December 31, 2008 included three loans that in aggregate totaled $26.7 million and represented 63.2% of nonaccrual C&I loans.

If a borrower fails to comply with the contractual terms of a loan agreement and the loan becomes past due, then we classify the loan as nonperforming. However, not all nonperforming loans are considered impaired loans. A loan may be contractually past due with respect to the note maturity date but current on interest or otherwise performing such that we believe the loan is probable of payment of interest and principal in full. A loan is considered impaired if, based upon current information and events, it is probable that we will be unable to collect the scheduled payments of principal and interest when due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. We regard all nonaccrual loans as impaired, as well as those accruing loans that we believe to have higher risk of noncompliance with the contractual repayment schedule for both interest and principal.

Once we determine that a loan has been impaired, we then determine what we believe is the likely amount of the impairment. While impaired loans exhibit weaknesses that may inhibit repayment in compliance with the original note terms, our impairment analysis may not always result in an allowance for loan loss for every impaired loan. The amount in the allowance for loan losses for impaired loans is based on the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate or, for collateral-dependent loans, impairment may be measured using the fair value of the collateral, net of cost to sell.

Information about impaired loans at or for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006 is as follows:

	2008		2007		2006
	(in thousands)
Recorded balance of impaired loans, at end of year:
With related allowance for loan loss	$	119,698	$	66,547	$	18,813
With no related allowance for loan loss		87,007		24,425		5,323
Total	$	206,705	$	90,972	$	24,136
Allowance for loan losses related to impaired loans, at end of year	$	41,451	$	9,375	$	2,528
Average balance of impaired loans for the year		161,654		46,695		33,928
Interest income recognized on impaired loans for the year		1,758		1,665		850

Certain categories of loans that are more homogenous, such as residential mortgage and consumer loans, are evaluated collectively for impairment. Therefore, we do not assign individual credit risk ratings to these loans and they are excluded from impaired loans.

The dollar amount of impaired loans increased to $206.7 million at December 31, 2008 as compared to $91.0 million the prior year end. Impaired loans increased $115.7 million in 2008, after net charge offs totaling $70.3 million, as loan quality continued to deteriorate. We experienced loan quality deterioration across all segments of our commercial loan portfolio, construction, commercial real estate secured and C&I. The allowance for loan losses related to impaired loans increased in both dollar amount and as a percentage of impaired loans. The allowance related to impaired loans was $41.5 million at December 31, 2008 compared to $9.4 million the prior year end and represented 20.1% and 10.3% of impaired loans at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively.

In addition to nonperforming and impaired loans, we also actively monitor performing loans where appropriate. The number and dollar amount of loans that, while performing currently, are receiving heightened monitoring, increased throughout 2008.

Allowance for Loan Losses

We have established an allowance for loan losses to provide for loans in our portfolio that may not be repaid in their entirety. The allowance is based on our regular, quarterly assessments of the probable estimated losses inherent in the loan portfolio. Our methodology for measuring the appropriate level of the allowance relies on

49

several key elements, which include the formula described below, specific allowances for identified problem loans and portfolio segments, and the unallocated allowance.

The formula portion of the allowance is calculated by applying loss factors to categories of loans outstanding in the portfolio. The loans are categorized by loan type as commercial and industrial, commercial real estate secured, residential real estate construction, commercial real estate construction loans, residential real estate mortgage and consumer loans. Those categories are further segregated by risk classification (for commercial loans) and by delinquency status (for consumer loans). Each commercial, commercial real estate and real estate construction loan has a risk grade based on formal defined criteria. For consumer loans, we further categorize the loans into consumer loan product types; for example home equity loans and loans secured by manufactured homes. Segregation of the loans into more discrete pools facilitates greater precision in matching historic and expected loan losses with the source of the loss. We adjust these pools from time to time, based on the changing composition of the loan portfolio, segmenting loans with similar attributes and risk characteristics. We calculate actual historic loss rates for prior years for each separate loan segment identified. Each of the prior years’ historical loss rates is then weighted based on our evaluation of the duration of the economic cycle to arrive at a current expected loss rate. In 2008, we attributed more weight to our loss experience in the most recent two years. The current expected loss rates are adjusted, if deemed appropriate, for other relevant factors affecting the portfolio segments, including changes in lending practices, trends in past due loans and industry, geographical, collateral and size concentrations. Finally, the resulting loss factors are multiplied against the current period loans outstanding to derive an estimated loss.

Specific allowances are established in cases where management has identified significant conditions or circumstances related to a loan that indicate a loss will probably be incurred, but the degree of certainty and loss quantification has not reached the charge-off level. The amount in the allowance for loan losses for impaired loans is determined based on the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, or the fair value of the collateral, net of cost to sell. Our estimate of the amount of loss on a loan secured by real estate has increased in complexity as a result of the current illiquidity in the real estate market. The degree of uncertainty and the sensitivity of real estate valuations to the underlying assumptions regarding holding period until sale and the collateral liquidation method, can have a material impact on our loss estimates on loans. If the measure of the impaired loan is less than the recorded investment in the loan, a specific allowance is established.

The unallocated portion of the allowance contains amounts that are based on management’s evaluation of conditions that are not directly measured in the determination of the formula and specific allowances. The evaluation of the inherent loss with respect to these conditions is subject to a higher degree of uncertainty because they are not identified with specific problem credits or portfolio segments. The factors assessed are more qualitative in nature. Conditions affecting the entire lending portfolio evaluated in connection with the unallocated portion of the allowance include: general economic and business conditions, duration of the current business cycle, the impact of competition on our underwriting terms, current general market collateral valuations and findings of our independent loan review process. Management reviews these conditions quarterly in discussion with our senior lenders and credit officers. To the extent that any of these conditions is evidenced by a specifically identifiable problem credit or portfolio segment as of the evaluation date, management’s estimate of the effect of such condition may be reflected as part of the formula allowance applicable to such credit or portfolio segment. Where any of these conditions is not evidenced by a specifically identifiable problem credit or portfolio segment, management’s evaluation of the probable loss related to such conditions is reflected in the unallocated portion of the allowance.

Management believes that the allowance for loan losses is adequate to absorb probable losses on existing loans that may become uncollectible. However, there can be no assurance that our allowance will prove sufficient to cover actual loan losses in the future. In addition, various regulatory agencies, as an integral part of their examination process, periodically review the adequacy of our allowance for loan losses. Such agencies may require us to make additional provisions to the allowance based upon their judgments about information available to them at the time of their examinations.

50

The following table shows an analysis of our allowance for loan losses and other related data for the periods indicated:

	Year Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006			2005			2004
	(dollars in thousands)
Average total loans	$	2,790,723		$	2,507,395		$	2,430,590		$	2,271,681		$	2,045,723
Total loans at end of year	$	3,233,261		$	2,533,333		$	2,500,685		$	2,384,931		$	2,211,606
Allowance for loan losses:
Allowance at beginning of year	$	54,681		$	37,516		$	37,481		$	37,484		$	34,356
Charge-offs:
Commercial and commercial real estate		(16,176	)		(5,261	)		(5,341	)		(5,240	)		(6,783	)
Real estate – construction		(54,778	)		(8,926	)		(1,059	)		(103	)		(85	)
Residential real estate – mortgages		—			(180	)		(7	)		(260	)		(202	)
Consumer and other (1)		(1,517	)		(1,425	)		(824	)		(1,485	)		(2,050	)
Subtotal		(72,471	)		(15,792	)		(7,231	)		(7,088	)		(9,120	)
Recoveries:
Commercial and commercial real estate		1,523			702			904			761			1,550
Real estate – construction		220			54			1			89			2
Residential real estate – mortgages		2			—			2			—			47
Consumer and other (1)		435			301			359			712			566
Subtotal		2,180			1,057			1,266			1,562			2,165
Total net charge-offs		(70,291	)		(14,735	)		(5,965	)		(5,526	)		(6,955	)
Provision for loan losses		144,158			31,900			6,000			5,523			10,083
Allowance at end of year	$	128,548		$	54,681		$	37,516		$	37,481		$	37,484
Annualized net charge-offs to average total loans		2.52	%		0.59	%		0.25	%		0.24	%		0.34	%
Allowance to total loans at end of year		3.98	%		2.16	%		1.50	%		1.57	%		1.69	%
Allowance to non-performing loans		64.15	%		72.27	%		113.15	%		278.69	%		265.98	%

(1) Consumer loan charge-offs include charge-offs relating to indirect and direct auto loans, home equity loans and lines of credit, overdrafts and all other types of consumer loans.

Loans are charged off when the loss is highly probable and clearly identified. Net charge-offs were $70.3 million, or 2.52% of average loans, during 2008. In comparison, net charge-offs were $14.7 million, or 0.59% of average loans, during 2007 and $6.0 million, or 0.25% of average loans, during 2006. Net charge-offs have increased as a result of the increase in the volume of nonperforming and impaired loans.

The allowance for loan losses increased in 2008 to $128.5 million at December 31, 2008, as compared to $54.7 million at the prior year end. The allowance as a percentage of total loans also increased, representing 3.98% of total loans at December 31, 2008, compared to 2.16% at December 31, 2007. In 2008, the specific reserves established for impaired loans increased $32.1 million as both the volume of impaired loans and the severity of the estimated loss within the impaired loans increased. The increase in total loans combined with higher expected loss experience increased the formula portion of the allowance an additional $28.9 million. Qualitative factors, the most significant being the current economic environment also increased the allowance.

51

As a business bank, our loan portfolio is comprised primarily of commercial loans to businesses. These loans are inherently larger in amount than loans to individual consumers and therefore have higher potential losses on an individual loan basis. The individually larger commercial loans can cause greater volatility in reported credit quality performance measures, such as total impaired or nonperforming loans. Our current credit risk rating and loss estimate with respect to a single sizable loan can have a material impact on our reported impaired loans and related loss exposure estimates. In 2008, we increased our “in-house” exposure guidelines for certain portions of our non-real estate lending portfolio and increased the number of borrowing relationships in excess of $25 million. The deterioration of any one or a few loans over $25 million may cause a significant increase in uncollectible loans and, therefore, our allowance for loan losses. We review our estimates on a quarterly basis and, as we identify changes in estimates, the allowance for loan losses is adjusted through the recording of a provision for loan losses.

The table below presents an allocation of the allowance for loan losses among the various loan categories and sets forth the percentage of loans in each category to gross loans. The allocation of the allowance for loan losses as shown in the table should neither be interpreted as an indication of future charge-offs, nor as an indication that charge-offs in future periods will necessarily occur in these amounts or in the indicated proportions.

ALLOCATION OF THE ALLOWANCE FOR LOAN LOSSES

	As of December 31,
	2008				2007				2006				2005				2004
	AMOUNT		LOAN CATEGORY TO GROSS LOANS		AMOUNT		LOAN CATEGORY TO GROSS LOANS		AMOUNT		LOAN CATEGORY TO GROSS LOANS		AMOUNT		LOAN CATEGORY TO GROSS LOANS		AMOUNT		LOAN CATEGORY TO GROSS LOANS
	(dollars in thousands)
Allocated:
Commercial and commercial real estate	$	56,005	78.7	%	$	26,743	66.7	%	$	20,752	62.5	%	$	20,705	61.2	%	$	20,128	62.8	%
Real estate – construction		48,041	16.4			17,254	26.5			9,884	29.8			9,718	28.7			7,711	24.0
Residential real estate – mortgages		546	1.7			464	2.4			413	2.5			469	2.7			406	2.9
Consumer and other		2,752	3.2			2,101	4.4			1,875	5.2			2,292	7.4			3,501	10.3
Unallocated		21,204	—			8,119	—			4,592	—			4,297	—			5,738	—
Total allowance for loan losses	$	128,548	100.0	%	$	54,681	100.0	%	$	37,516	100.0	%	$	37,481	100.0	%	$	37,484	100.0	%

Premises, leasehold improvements and equipment, net

Premises, leasehold improvements, and equipment, net of accumulated depreciation and amortization, was $17.1 million at December 31, 2008, compared to $16.1 million at December 31, 2007, an increase of $1.0 million, or 6.3%. The increase resulted from the construction of a replacement building for one of our suburban branches. We relocated our branch between sites at a shopping center, incurring approximately $2.4 million in construction costs.

52

Other Real Estate and Repossessed Assets, net

Other real estate and repossessed assets net of the related allowance at December 31, 2008 and 2007 was as follows:

	December 31, 2008			December 31, 2007
	(dollars in thousands)
Other real estate owned	$	13,890		$	2,724
Repossessed assets		—			7
Allowance		(711	)		(125	)
Other real estate and repossessed property, net	$	13,179		$	2,606

During 2008, we transferred $14.5 million from loans into other real estate. In addition, we capitalized costs of $1.6 million to improve certain properties to prepare them for sale. We sold properties totaling $4.8 million and incurred losses on other real estate of $754,000.

In comparison, during 2007, we transferred $3.2 million from loans into other real estate, sold properties totaling $942,000 and incurred losses on other real estate of $59,000.

Deposits

Our deposits consist of noninterest and interest-bearing demand deposits, savings deposits, CDs, certain public funds and customer repurchase agreements. Our customer repurchase agreements are reported in other borrowings. We also use brokered CDs and money market accounts and other out-of-local-market CDs to support our asset base.

The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, the distribution of our average deposit account balances and average cost of funds on each category of deposits:

	Year Ended December 31,
	2008						2007						2006
	AVERAGE BALANCE		PERCENT OF DEPOSITS		RATE		AVERAGE BALANCE		PERCENT OF DEPOSITS		RATE		AVERAGE BALANCE		PERCENT OF DEPOSITS		RATE
	(dollars in thousands)
Noninterest-bearing demand deposits	$	409,322	14.0	%	—	%	$	393,494	15.3	%	—	%	$	401,258	15.6	%	—	%
NOW accounts		127,018	4.4		1.39			79,844	3.1		0.84			94,279	3.7		0.56
Money market accounts		620,983	21.3		1.83			808,398	31.5		4.24			677,848	26.4		3.90
Savings deposits		45,247	1.5		0.13			54,169	2.1		0.28			66,500	2.6		0.28
Time deposits:
Certificates of deposit		715,422	24.5		4.21			519,386	20.2		4.80			540,901	21.0		4.13
Out-of-local-market certificates of deposit		155,841	5.3		4.50			112,499	4.4		5.40			123,804	4.8		4.83
Brokered certificates of deposit		771,611	26.4		4.57			539,846	21.0		5.15			592,199	23.0		4.79
Public funds		75,698	2.6		3.50			61,549	2.4		5.09			73,620	2.9		4.59
Total time deposits		1,718,572	58.8		4.37			1,233,280	48.0		5.02			1,330,524	51.7		4.52
Total deposits	$	2,921,142	100.0	%			$	2,569,185	100.0	%			$	2,570,409	100.0	%

During 2008, average deposit balances increased $352.0 million, or 13.7%, to $2.92 billion in 2008 from $2.57 billion during 2007. Total average time deposits increased $485.3 million, or 39.3%, while average money market account balances declined $187.4 million, or 23.2%. Brokered and out-of-market CDs provided the

53

majority of the increase in time deposits, with the average balance increasing $275.1 million. Promotions of CDs in our local market increased CDs $196.0 million, or 37.7%, to $715.4 million. The decline in average money market account balances was attributable to both the loss of a large customer as well as the transfer of another large depositor’s balances from a money market to a NOW account.

Average deposit balances were relatively unchanged at approximately $2.57 billion during both 2007 and 2006. During 2007, a $130.6 million, or 19.3%, increase in money market accounts was largely offset by lower time deposits and other interest-bearing deposit products. Most of the increase in money market accounts was in our higher-rate market-priced money market accounts. Average time deposits decreased $97.2 million, or 7.3%, during 2007. A $52.4 million decline in brokered CDs, and declines of $21.5 million and $12.1 million in customer and public funds time deposits, respectively, comprised the decrease in time deposits. In addition, average NOW accounts decreased by $14.4 million, savings accounts by $12.3 million, and noninterest-bearing deposits by $7.8 million from 2006.

The following table sets forth the period end balances of total deposits at December 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, respectively, as well as categorizes our deposits as “in-market” and “out-of-market” deposits.

	At December 31,
	2008		2007		2006
	(in thousands)
In-market deposits:
Non-interest bearing deposits	$	470,990	$	471,770	$	447,862
NOW accounts		218,451		76,572		82,484
Savings accounts		42,275		49,386		59,523
Money market accounts		320,691		707,829		742,859
Customer certificates of deposit		870,183		543,443		516,624
Public time deposits		84,831		52,895		68,580
Total in-market deposits		2,007,421		1,901,895		1,917,932
Out-of-market deposits:
Brokered money market deposits		73,352		55,507		65,090
Out-of-local-market certificates of deposit		136,470		117,159		105,119
Brokered certificates of deposit		913,803		505,631		551,786
Total out-of-market deposits		1,123,625		678,297		721,995
Total deposits	$	3,131,046	$	2,580,192	$	2,639,927

Total period-end deposit balances increased $550.9 million, or 21.3%, to $3.13 billion at December 31, 2008, compared to $2.58 billion at December 31, 2007. Between the two year-ends, in-market deposits increased by $105.5 million, or 5.5%, while out-of-market deposits increased by $445.3 million, or 65.7%.

The increase in total in-market deposits was a result of local market CD promotions, which increased customer CDs by $326.7 million, or 60.1%, to $870.2 million at December 31, 2008. During the same period, money market account balances decreased $387.1 million, or 54.7%. Our in-market money market and NOW deposits include deposits from those who we describe as “deposit-rich” customers. Within this customer group, there were two customers with combined balances of $152.6 million at December 31, 2008, as compared to $298.5 million at December 31, 2007. During 2008, one significant customer withdrew the majority of their deposits and the other transferred their deposits from a money market account to a NOW account. On April 1, 2008, we sold one of our branches located in the City of Chicago to another financial institution. The branch’s deposits totaled $6.7 million on the date it was sold.

In October 2008, we entered the Certificate of Deposit Account Registry Service network, which allows the Bank to accommodate depositors with large funds seeking the full deposit insurance protection, by placing these

54

funds in CDs issued by other banks in the network. Through a matching system, we will receive funds back for CDs that we issue for other banks in the network, thus allowing us to retain the full amount of the original deposit. At December 31, 2008 we had deposits in this program totaling $5.7 million.

Total period-end deposit balances decreased $59.7 million, or 2.3%, to $2.58 billion at December 31, 2007, compared to $2.64 billion at December 31, 2006. Between the two year-ends, in-market deposits decreased by $16.0 million, or 0.8%, while out-of-market deposits decreased by $43.7 million, or 6.1%. Total in-market deposits were $1.90 billion at December 31, 2007, compared to $1.92 billion at December 31, 2006. Most of the decrease was associated with a $35.0 million decrease in customer money market accounts. During 2007, a money market customer with $203.7 million on deposit at December 31, 2006 withdrew its deposits. Increased money market account balances from a variety of other customers largely offset the impact of this withdrawal.

Time deposits in denominations of $100,000 or more, including public funds deposits, totaled $484.4 million at December 31, 2008. The following table sets forth the amounts and maturities of time deposits of $100,000 or more at December 31, 2008:

	December 31, 2008
	(in thousands)
3 months or less	$	113,045
Between 3 months and 6 months		149,627
Between 6 months and 12 months		133,379
Over 12 months		88,332
Total	$	484,383

In December 2008, the Bank elected to participate in the FDIC’s Temporary Liquidity Guarantee Program (TLGP). The program consists of two parts: the Transaction Account Guarantee Program (TAGP) and the Debt Guarantee Program (DGP), both of which the Bank elected to participate in. Under TAGP all noninterest bearing transaction accounts are fully guaranteed by the FDIC for the entire amount in the account through December 31, 2009. The FDIC will assess us a 10 basis point annual surcharge applied to noninterest-bearing transaction deposit amounts over $250,000 as part of its normal quarterly assessment process. Under the DGP, newly issued unsecured debt is guaranteed.

We utilize out-of-market CDs to fund the portion of our earning asset growth that is not funded with in-market deposits and other borrowings. We offer CDs to out-of-local-market customers by providing rates to a private third-party electronic system that provides certificate of deposit rates from institutions across the country to its subscribers. These CDs are generally issued at amounts of $100,000 or less as the purchasers sought to maintain full FDIC deposit insurance protection. The balance of CDs obtained through this marketing medium was $136.5 million at December 31, 2008, as compared to $117.2 million and $105.1 million at December 31, 2007, and 2006, respectively.

We also issue brokered CDs to support our asset growth. The balance of our brokered CDs was $913.8 million, $505.6 million, and $551.8 million at December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, respectively. Total brokered money market balances were $73.4 million, $55.5 million and $65.1 million at December 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, respectively.

Under FDIC regulations, only “well-capitalized” institutions may issue brokered CDs without prior regulatory approval. The Bank is currently categorized as “well-capitalized” and therefore may continue to utilize this funding source. Brokered CD distributors utilize capital ratios and other criteria in evaluating and approving those banks that they allow to issue brokered CDs through their distribution network. Extreme distress in the financial markets, combined with our adverse operating results at the Bank have resulted in a reduction in our access to some of these brokered CD distribution networks. Reduced access to the brokered CD market may

55

lead to an inability to replace brokered deposits at maturity, which would result in higher costs or limit asset growth at the Bank. The Bank manages this risk by utilizing multiple brokered CD distributors and has not experienced any difficulty acquiring sufficient deposits at market rates through this funding source.

At December 31, 2008 and 2007, the scheduled maturities of brokered CDs were as follows:

Maturity	December 31, 2008			December 31, 2007
	(in thousands)
Within one year	$	542,633		$	237,288
After one year but within two years		166,089			59,197
After two years but within three years		109,962			48,655
After three years		98,598			164,421
Subtotal		917,282			509,561
Unamortized broker placement fees		(3,108	)		(1,733	)
Unamortized fair value adjustment		(371	)		(2,197	)
Total	$	913,803		$	505,631

We have shortened the duration of our brokered CD portfolio to take advantage of the shape of the yield curve and reduce our overall funding costs and better match the re-pricing characteristics of our loans.

Brokered CDs are carried net of the related broker placement fees and the remaining unamortized fair value adjustments associated with brokered CDs previously accounted for as fair value hedges. The broker placement fees and unamortized fair value adjustments are amortized to the maturity date of the related brokered CDs and included in deposit interest expense.

A portion of our brokered CDs were issued with options that allow us to call the brokered CDs at par prior to their scheduled maturity date. During 2008, we called $190 million of brokered CDs and recognized $2.5 million of early extinguishment of debt expense for the amount of unamortized broker placement fees and fair value adjustments. Brokered CDs callable by us totaled $52.5 million at December 31, 2008.

Other Borrowings

At December 31, 2008, our other borrowings totaled $275.6 million, as compared to $389.1 million at December 31, 2007. Our other borrowings include securities sold under agreements to repurchase, federal funds purchased and U.S. Treasury tax and loan note option accounts. The decline in total other borrowings was largely a result of the $104.4 million decline in overnight repurchase agreements and the $40.0 million decline in U.S. Treasury tax and loan note option borrowings.

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase (“repos”) include overnight and term agreements. The overnight securities sold under agreements to repurchase are collateralized financing transactions and are primarily executed with local Bank customers. Overnight repos totaled $21.0 million and $125.5 million at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. We believe the decline in the volume of overnight repos was primarily a result of our reduction of the interest rates paid on these funds, as short-term market interest rates declined during 2008.

Our term repos totaled $200.0 million at both December 31, 2008 and 2007 and include embedded derivatives. These structured repos consist of $100 million with embedded interest rate caps and a five year term with a two year no-call provision, $80 million with a three year term and a three month no-call provision, and $20 million with a five year term and a three month no-call provision. At December 31, 2008, $100 million of the term repos were currently eligible to be called at the counterparty’s option and the remaining $100 million will

56

be callable in 2009. In addition, the structured repo agreements allow the counterparty to terminate the agreement prior to the call date if the Bank were to lose its well-capitalized status.

At December 31, 2008 and 2007, subject to available collateral and in addition to the amounts already outstanding, the Bank had available pre-approved repurchase agreement lines of $390 million and $610 million, respectively. Available collateral totaled $341.3 million at December 31, 2008, compared with $361.3 million at the December 31, 2007.

The following table shows categories of other borrowings having average balances during the period greater than 30% of stockholders’ equity at the end of each period. During each reported period, securities sold under repurchase agreements, which includes both overnight and term agreements, was the only category meeting this criteria.

	Year Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006
	(dollars in thousands)
Securities sold under repurchase agreements:
Balance at year end	$	313,896		$	325,461		$	226,415
Weighted average interest rate at year end		3.69	%		3.52	%		4.05	%
Maximum amount outstanding (1)	$	313,896		$	325,461		$	276,134
Average amount outstanding during the year	$	281,567		$	218,125		$	227,237
Daily average interest rate during the year		3.24	%		4.01	%		3.91	%

(1) Based on amount outstanding at month end during each year.

At December 31, 2008, our federal funds purchased totaled $54.5 million, an increase of $31.0 million as compared to the $23.5 million purchased at December 31, 2007. All of these borrowings are unsecured and were provided on an overnight basis. At December 31, 2008 and 2007, the Bank had pre-approved overnight federal funds borrowing lines of $95 million and $260 million, respectively. Adverse operating results at the Bank have resulted in a reduction in our approved federal funds borrowing lines. Our number of pre-approved federal funds borrowing lines has declined as well, to four at December 31, 2008 from seven at December 31, 2007. Subsequent to year end, the Bank has increased its pre-approved borrowing lines for federal funds purchased by $35 million. The Bank has further increased its ability to purchase federal funds by cultivating relationships with a growing group of correspondent banking customers who may sell Federal Funds to the Bank in order to manage their excess liquidity.

Under the U.S. Treasury tax and loan note option, the Bank is authorized to accept U.S. Treasury Department deposits of excess funds along with deposits of customer taxes. These borrowings are collateralized by investment securities. Borrowings of this source were $61,000 at December 31, 2008 as compared to $40,125 at December 31, 2007.

For additional details of the other borrowings, see the section captioned “Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements–Other Borrowings” from our audited financial statements contained elsewhere in this annual report.

Notes Payable and FHLB Advances

At December 31, 2008, we had $12 million outstanding on our $15 million revolving credit facility, which was scheduled to mature on March 31, 2009. Subsequent to year-end 2008, we executed an amendment with our lender to extend this facility until March 31, 2010. In comparison, at December 31, 2007, we had not drawn on our revolving credit facility. The revolving credit facility was amended during 2008, reducing the commitment amount to $15 million from $20 million, primarily as a result of our adverse operating results in 2008. The underlying loan agreement requires that the Bank remain well capitalized and the holding company remain adequately capitalized as defined by regulatory guidelines. As of December 31, 2008, we were in compliance with these covenants. We are currently in discussions to renew our credit facility at maturity.

57

Our FHLB advances consist of borrowings from the Federal Home Loan Bank of Chicago (“FHLBC”). At December 31, 2008, total FHLB advances were $450.0 million, compared to $205.0 million at December 31, 2007. During 2008, the Bank increased its borrowing from the FHLB to fund purchases of investment securities. The FHLB advances are collateralized by investment securities and a blanket lien on qualified first-mortgage residential and home equity loans. As of December 31, 2008, $315.0 million of the FHLB advances were overnight and an additional $92.5 million were either callable or scheduled to mature within the next 12 months. The remaining $42.5 million of FHLB advances can be called in 2010.

Currently, the FHLBC is under a formal written agreement with its regulator requiring the regulator’s prior approval for the payment of dividends or redemptions of capital stock. Based on written correspondence and verbal communications with the FHLBC, we believe the order should not impact the FHLBC’s ability to provide us with liquidity and funding needs provided we continue to meet their credit standards.

For additional details of the FHLB advances, see the section captioned “Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements–Notes Payable and FHLB Advances” from our audited financial statements contained elsewhere in this annual report.

Junior Subordinated Debentures

At December 31, 2008 and 2007, we had $86.6 million of junior subordinated debentures that were comprised of $45.4 million issued to TAYC Capital Trust I and $41.2 million issued to TAYC Capital Trust II. Each of the trusts is a wholly-owned statutory trust. We report a liability for the total balance of the junior subordinated debentures issued to the trusts. We report the equity investments in the trusts of $2.6 million in other assets on our Consolidated Balance Sheet at both December 31, 2008 and 2007. Interest expense on the junior subordinated debentures is reported in interest expense.

TAYC Capital Trust I is a wholly-owned subsidiary we formed for the purpose of issuing trust preferred securities in October 2002. Proceeds from the sale of these trust preferred securities, along with $1.4 million received from the purchase of its common equity securities, were invested by TAYC Capital Trust I in our 9.75% junior subordinated debentures. At each of December 31, 2008 and 2007, $44.0 million of trust preferred securities and $45.4 million of subordinated debentures were outstanding. The sole assets of the TAYC Capital Trust I are our junior subordinated debentures. Interest on both the trust preferred securities and junior subordinated debentures are payable quarterly at a rate of 9.75% per year. We incurred issuance costs of $3.1 million that we are amortizing over the 30 year term of the junior subordinated debentures.

These trust preferred securities have been callable, at our option, since October 2007. However, the trust preferred securities market has deteriorated significantly since mid-2007 and this source of funding and regulatory capital is largely unavailable at this time. Unamortized issuance costs relating to these debentures were $2.4 million on December 31, 2008. Unamortized issuance costs would be recognized as an expense if the debentures were called by us.

In June 2004, we formed TAYC Capital Trust II, a wholly-owned subsidiary, for the purpose of issuing $40.0 million of floating rate trust preferred securities. Proceeds from the sale of these trust preferred securities, along with $1.2 million received from the purchase of its common equity securities, were invested by TAYC Capital Trust II in $41.2 million of our floating rate junior subordinated debentures. The sole assets of the TAYC Capital Trust II are our junior subordinated debentures. The interest rate on both the trust preferred securities and the junior subordinated debentures equals the three-month LIBOR plus 2.68% and re-prices quarterly on the 17^th of September, December, March and June. The interest rate on both was 4.55% and 7.67% at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. We incurred issuance costs of $470,000 that we are amortizing over the 30 year term of the junior subordinated debentures. At December 31, 2008, unamortized issuance costs relating to these debentures totaled $400,000.

58

Our obligations with respect to each of the trust preferred securities and the related debentures, in the aggregate, constitute a full, irrevocable and unconditional guarantee on a subordinated basis by us of the obligations of each of the trusts under the respective trust preferred securities.

Subordinated Notes

In September 2008, the Bank issued $60.0 million of eight year, 10% subordinated notes, pre-payable at the Bank’s option after three years. In addition, a warrant to purchase 15 shares of the Company’s common stock at an exercise price of $10.00 per share, was issued for every $1,000 in principal amount of the subordinated notes. The warrants, which represent an aggregate of 900,000 shares of common stock, will expire on the fifth anniversary of issuance. The proceeds received from this transaction were allocated to the subordinated notes and the warrants based upon their relative fair values. At December 31, 2008, the subordinated notes reported on the Consolidated Balance Sheet totaled $55.3 million, which was net of $4.7 million of unamortized discount. The discount consists primarily of the fair value allocated to the warrants and was reported as an addition to surplus in the equity portion of the Consolidated Balance Sheet. The discount is being amortized as an additional interest expense of the subordinated notes, over the remaining contractual life of the notes.

Preferred Stock

During 2008, the holding company issued two series of preferred stock. Both the Series A and Series B preferred stock qualifies as Tier 1 capital for regulatory purposes.

Series A preferred stock was sold to private investors in September 2008 for gross proceeds of $60 million. The Series A preferred stock is noncumulative, carries a rate of 8% and each share of preferred stock is convertible into 2.5 shares of our common stock at a conversion price of $10.00 per common share. The non-detachable conversion right was determined to constitute a beneficial conversion feature because the conversion price was less than the market price of the Company’s stock on the commitment date. Therefore, the preferred stock was recorded upon issuance net of the $16.7 million beneficial conversion feature and increased to its stated value through the recording of a $16.7 million one-time, implied non-cash dividend to the holders of the preferred stock. On December 18, 2008, the Company’s Board of Directors declared a dividend payable to the Series A preferred stockholders for the period from issuance until January 14, 2009 of $0.5889 per share, or $1.4 million.

Series B preferred stock was sold to the U.S. Treasury Department under the Troubled Asset Relief Program (“TARP”) in November 2008 in exchange for gross proceeds of $104.8 million. The Series B preferred stock is cumulative and carries a rate of 5% for the first five years and 9% thereafter. In connection with the Series B preferred stock, the Company also issued a ten-year warrant to purchase 1,462,647 shares of the Company’s common stock at an exercise price of $10.75 per share. The proceeds received from this transaction were allocated to the Series B preferred stock and the warrants based upon their relative fair values. At December 31, 2008, the preferred stock reported on the Consolidated Balance Sheet totaled $97.3 million, which was net of $7.5 million of unamortized discount and accumulated unpaid dividends. The discount consists primarily of the fair value allocated to the warrants and was reported as an addition to surplus in the equity portion of the Consolidated Balance Sheet. The discount is being amortized as a non-cash dividend on the Series B preferred stock. Dividends accumulated and discounts on the Series B preferred stock from the date of issuance to December 31, 2008 totaled $737,000. Prior to the third anniversary of the Treasury’s purchase of the Series B Preferred, unless the Series B Preferred has been redeemed or the Treasury has transferred all of the Series B Preferred to third parties, the consent of the Treasury will be required for the Company to pay any dividend on its Common Stock or repurchase its Common Stock or other equity or capital securities, other than in connection with benefit plans consistent with past practice and certain other circumstances specified in the Series B Preferred purchase agreement.

For additional details on our preferred stock, see the section captioned “Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements—Stockholders’ Equity” from our financial statements contained elsewhere in this annual report.

59

Common Stock

In September 2008, we increased our authorized common stock to 45 million shares from the prior authorization of 18 million shares. The number of common shares was increased to accommodate the issuance of convertible preferred stock and warrants to purchase common stock. The convertible preferred stock (Series A) is convertible into an aggregate of 6.0 million shares of common stock at the option of the preferred stockholders at any time, and will be convertible at the Company’s option on or after September 29, 2013. In addition, warrants were issued for the purchase of 2.9 million shares of common stock. Warrants for the purchase of 2 million shares are currently exercisable by the holders. The remaining 900,000 warrants are exercisable on or after March 29, 2009.

For additional details on our warrants to purchase common stock, see the section captioned “Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements–Stockholders’ Equity” from our financial statements contained elsewhere in this annual report.

During 2008 and 2007, we declared common stock dividends of $0.10 and $0.40 per share, respectively, and paid dividends on common shares of $2.1 million and $4.4 million in 2008 and 2007, respectively. We discontinued our quarterly dividend after the first quarter of 2008. The Series B preferred stock requires the consent of the U.S. Treasury Department to pay any dividend on our common stock prior to November 21, 2011, unless the Series B preferred has been redeemed or the Treasury has transferred all of the Series B preferred to third parties. In addition, under the terms of the junior subordinated debentures and the Series A preferred stock, any deferral of the payment of interest or dividends results in a defined restriction in the payment of common dividends

Regulatory Capital

We monitor compliance with bank regulatory capital requirements, focusing primarily on the risk-based capital guidelines. Under the risk-based capital method of capital measurement, the ratio computed is dependent on the amount and composition of assets recorded on the balance sheet and the amount and composition of off-balance sheet items, in addition to the level of capital. Generally, Tier I capital includes common stockholders’ equity, noncumulative perpetual preferred stock and trust preferred securities (up to certain limits). Bank regulators however, also specifically approved the Series B preferred stock for inclusion in Tier 1 capital, in spite of its cumulative dividend feature. Total capital represents Tier I capital plus a portion of the allowance for loan loss (up to certain limits), subordinated debt and the portion of the trust preferred securities not includable in Tier I capital.

At December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, the holding company was considered “well capitalized” under capital guidelines set by the Federal Reserve for bank holding companies. In 2008, while the dollar amount of regulatory capital increased, an increase in risk-weighted assets resulted in two of the three capital ratios declining at December 31, 2008 as compared to the prior year end. Regulatory capital increased as a result of the issuance of both series of preferred stock and the warrants to purchase common stock. These capital injections more than offset the net loss applicable to common shareholders of $143.4 million in 2008. The holding company’s regulatory ratios at December 31, 2007 decreased in comparison to the end of 2006 primarily as a result of our repurchase of $17.6 million of holding company common stock during 2007.

At December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, the Bank was considered “well capitalized” under regulatory capital guidelines. During 2008, the Bank’s capital ratios decreased as the increase in risk weighted assets and average assets outpaced the increase in regulatory capital. Regulatory capital increased in 2008, as a result of capital injections from the parent holding company of $107 million and the issuance of subordinated debt and common stock warrants for $60 million. The subordinated debt qualifies as Tier 2 capital under regulatory guidelines. The Bank’s capital ratios also decreased during 2007, as growth in risk-weighted and average assets outpaced the increase in regulatory capital. The Bank paid no dividends to the holding company in 2008 and paid $15.0 million in dividends to the holding company in 2007.

60

The holding company and the Bank’s capital ratios were as follows for the dates indicated:

	ACTUAL			FOR CAPITAL ADEQUACY PURPOSES			TO BE WELL CAPITALIZED UNDER PROMPT CORRECTIVE ACTION PROVISIONS
	AMOUNT	RATIO		AMOUNT	RATIO		AMOUNT	RATIO
	(dollars in thousands)
As of December 31, 2008:
Total Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets)
Taylor Capital Group, Inc.	$474,287	13.02	%	>$291,497	>8.00	%	>$364,371	>10.00	%
Cole Taylor Bank	404,480	11.12		>290,864	>8.00		>363,580	>10.00
Tier I Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets)
Taylor Capital Group, Inc.	372,377	10.22		>145,748	>4.00		>218,622	>6.00
Cole Taylor Bank	302,668	8.32		>145,432	>4.00		>218,148	>6.00
Leverage (to average assets)
Taylor Capital Group, Inc.	372,377	8.73		>170,682	>4.00		>213,352	>5.00
Cole Taylor Bank	302,668	7.11		>170,285	>4.00		212,857	>5.00
As of December 31, 2007:
Total Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets)
Taylor Capital Group, Inc.	$368,188	12.74	%	>$231,175	>8.00	%	>$288,968	>10.00	%
Cole Taylor Bank	342,607	11.88		>230,677	>8.00		>288,346	>10.00
Tier I Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets)
Taylor Capital Group, Inc.	330,451	11.44		>115,587	>4.00		>173,381	>6.00
Cole Taylor Bank	306,333	10.62		>115,339	>4.00		>173,008	>6.00
Leverage (to average assets)
Taylor Capital Group, Inc.	330,451	9.40		>140,567	>4.00		>175,709	>5.00
Cole Taylor Bank	306,333	8.74		>140,232	>4.00		>175,290	>5.00
As of December 31, 2006:
Total Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets)
Taylor Capital Group, Inc.	$372,451	13.35	%	>$223,140	>8.00	%	>$278,925	>10.00	%
Cole Taylor Bank	334,293	12.01		>222,706	>8.00		>278,382	>10.00
Tier I Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets)
Taylor Capital Group, Inc.	337,553	12.10		>111,570	>4.00		>167,355	>6.00
Cole Taylor Bank	299,462	10.76		>111,353	>4.00		>167,029	>6.00
Leverage (to average assets)
Taylor Capital Group, Inc.	337,553	10.17		>132,825	>4.00		>166,031	>5.00
Cole Taylor Bank	299,462	9.04		>132,488	>4.00		>165,610	>5.00

Liquidity

In addition to the normal influx of liquidity from in-market deposit growth, in concert with repayments and maturities of loans and investments, the Bank utilizes brokered money market accounts and CDs, out-of-local-market CDs, FHLB borrowings, broker/dealer repurchase agreements and federal funds purchased to meet its liquidity needs. We manage the risks associated with this reliance on wholesale funding sources by maintaining adequate alternate sources of funding and excess collateral available for immediate use. For example, the Bank is able to borrow from the Federal Reserve Bank using securities or commercial loans as collateral through the Borrower-in-Custody Program. The Bank also maintains pre-approved overnight federal funds borrowing lines at various correspondent banks and repurchase agreement availability with major brokers and banks.

61

During 2008, our pre-approved borrowing lines for federal funds purchased and repurchase agreements declined. Our approved overnight federal funds borrowing lines have declined to $95 million at December 31, 2008 from $260 million at December 31, 2007. Our pre-approved repurchase agreement lines have declined to $390 million at December 31, 2008 from $610 million at December 31, 2007. In response, we have increased our pledge of qualifying commercial loan collateral under the Federal Reserve Bank’s Borrower-in-Custody Program, which increased our borrowing capacity to $640 million at December 31, 2008 from $307 million at December 31, 2007. Subsequent to year end, the Bank has increased its pre-approved borrowing lines for federal funds purchased by $35 million. The Bank has further increased its ability to purchase federal funds by cultivating relationships with a growing group of correspondent banking customers who may sell federal funds to the Bank in order to manage their excess liquidity.

Brokered CD distributors utilize capital ratios and other criteria in evaluating and approving those banks that they allow to issue brokered CDs through their distribution network. Extreme distress in the financial markets, combined with our adverse operating results at the Bank have resulted in a reduction in our access to some of these brokered CD distribution networks. Reduced access to the brokered CD market may lead to an inability to replace brokered deposits at maturity, which would result in higher costs or limit asset growth at the Bank. The Bank manages this risk by utilizing multiple brokered CD distributors and has not experienced any difficulty acquiring sufficient deposits at market rates through this funding source. At December 31, 2008, we had $987.2 million of brokered deposits.

In addition, an independent debt rating agency, Fitch Ratings, downgraded its rating of the holding company and the Bank three times during 2008. Fitch reduced the long and short-term debt and deposit ratings from investment grade to non-investment grade and revised their ratings outlook to negative from stable. We have also experienced a decline in our ratings from other independent bank rating entities such as IDC, LACE and Bankrate.com. These ratings declines could negatively impact our acquisition or retention of deposits and could increase our cost of borrowing or limit our asset growth.

Our total assets increased $832.4 million, or 23.4%, during 2008 to $4.39 billion at December 31, 2008, compared to total assets of $3.56 billion at December 31, 2007. The growth in total assets was funded primarily with increased time deposits and FHLB advances. Cash inflow from operations exceeded cash outflows by $28.3 million in 2008. We believe that our current sources of funds are adequate to meet all of our financial commitments and asset growth targets for 2009.

Our total assets increased $176.8 million, or 5.2%, during 2007 to $3.56 billion at December 31, 2007, compared to total assets of $3.38 billion at December 31, 2006. The growth in total assets was funded primarily with other borrowings and FHLB advances. Cash inflow from operations exceeded cash outflows by $39.9 million in 2007.

Our total assets increased $99.0 million, or 3.0%, during 2006 to $3.38 billion at December 31, 2006, compared to total assets of $3.28 billion at December 31, 2005. The growth in total assets was funded primarily with an increase in deposits. Cash inflow from operations exceeded cash outflows by $35.0 million in 2006.

Interest received net of interest paid was the principal source of our operating cash inflows in each of the above periods. Management of investing and financing activities and market conditions determine the level and the stability of our net interest cash flows.

Our net cash outflows from investing activities for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, were $977.0 million, $260.8 million, and $129.1 million, respectively. During 2008, the net cash outflow was primarily invested in $782.6 million in loans and $187.0 million in investment securities. During 2007, the net cash outflow was invested primarily in $210.6 million in investment securities and $46.3 million in loans. During 2006, the net cash flow was invested primarily in loans.

62

Our net cash inflows from financing activities for years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006 were $918.1 million, $169.5 million, and $68.0 million, respectively. During 2008, cash inflows from the issuance of preferred stock and warrants totaled $165.8 million and the subordinated debt issuance raised $54.0 million. The remainder of the cash inflows arose from the increase in deposits, primarily time deposits, and FHLB advances. During 2007, cash inflows came from net increases in other borrowings of $126.7 million and FHLB advances of $125.0 million. Cash was utilized in 2007 to fund net deposit outflows of $61.1 million and our repurchase of $17.6 million in shares of our common stock. During 2006, the majority of the cash inflow was from a net increase in deposits of $99.4 million and we utilized those funds to reduce other borrowings by $36.1 million.

Holding Company Liquidity. Historically, our primary source of funds has been dividends received from the Bank. In 2007 and 2006, the Bank declared dividends to the holding company of $15.0 million and $10.0 million, respectively. However, the Bank did not declare or pay any dividends to the holding company in 2008. The Bank is subject to dividend restrictions set forth by regulatory authorities, whereby the Bank may not, without prior approval of regulatory authorities, declare dividends in excess of the sum of the current year’s earnings plus the retained earnings from the prior two years. As of December 31, 2008, the Bank could not declare or pay dividends to us, without the approval of regulatory authorities.

Our primary source of cash at the holding company in 2008 was from our issuance of preferred stock and warrants. In 2008, we received net proceeds, after issuance costs, of $55 million from the issuance of our Series A preferred stock and $105 million from the issuance of our Series B preferred stock and associated warrants. In addition, we drew $12.0 million under our $15.0 million revolving credit facility. We contributed $107 million as capital to our subsidiary Bank, paid interest on our subordinated debentures and debt of $7.2 million, general operating expenses of $3.2 million and dividends of $2.1 million. At December 31, 2008, the holding company had cash of $76.5 million for general corporate purposes and to support future growth. We expect cash dividends paid on preferred stock to total $10.2 million in 2009. In addition, if market interest rates remain unchanged our interest expense on the subordinated debentures underlying our trust preferred securities would approximate $6.7 million in 2009.

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

Off-balance sheet arrangements include commitments to extend credit and financial guarantees. Commitments to extend credit and financial guarantees are used to meet the financial needs of our customers. We had commitments to extend credit of $928.4 million and $962.4 million at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. Commitments to extend credit are agreements to lend to a customer as long as there is no violation of any condition established in the contract. Commitments generally have fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses and may require payment of a fee. Many customers do not utilize the total approved commitment amounts. At December 31, 2008, 71% of available consumer and commercial loan commitment amounts were drawn compared to 63% as of December 31, 2007. The total commitment amounts do not typically represent future cash requirements.

We had $87.3 million and $97.0 million of financial and performance standby letters of credit at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. Financial standby letters of credit are conditional commitments issued by us to guarantee the payment of a specified financial obligation of a customer to a third party. Performance standby letters of credit are conditional commitments issued by us to make a payment to a specified third party in the event a customer fails to perform under a non-financial contractual obligation. The terms of these financial guarantees range from less than one to five years. The credit risk involved in issuing these letters of credit is essentially the same as that involved in extending loan facilities to customers. We expect most of these letters of credit to expire undrawn and we expect no significant loss from our obligation under financial guarantees to the extent not already recognized as a liability on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. At December 31, 2008, a liability for $2.9 million was established for commitments under standby letters of credit for which we believed funding and loss were probable.

63

The following table shows as of December 31, 2008 the loan commitments and financial guarantees by maturity date.

	December 31, 2008
	Within One Year		One to Three Years		Four to Five Years		After Five Years		Total
	(in thousands)
Commitments to extend credit:
Commercial	$	488,521	$	298,758	$	44,021	$	25,123	$	856,423
Consumer		11,499		6,311		7,222		46,971		72,003
Financial guarantees:
Financial standby letters of credit		63,244		—		—		—		63,244
Performance standby letters of credit		22,731		5		1,161		150		24,047

The following table shows, as of December 31, 2008, our contractual obligations and commitments to make future payments under contracts, debt and lease agreements and maturing time deposits.

	December 31, 2008
	Within One Year		One to Three Years		Four to Five Years		After Five Years		Total
	(in thousands)
Other borrowings (1)	$	75,560	$	80,000	$	120,000	$	—	$	275,560
Notes payable and FHLB advances (1)		327,000		92,500		42,500		—		462,000
Junior subordinated debentures (1)		—		—		—		86,607		86,607
Time deposits (1)		1,376,804		478,834		149,289		360		2,005,287
Subordinated debt (1)		—		—		—		60,000		60,000
Operating leases		3,870		7,853		8,107		18,009		37,839
Total	$	1,783,234	$	659,187	$	319,896	$	164,976	$	2,927,293

(1) Principal only, does not include interest.

Derivative Financial Instruments

We use derivative financial instruments to accommodate customer needs and to assist us in our interest rate risk management. We have used interest rate exchange agreements, or swaps, and interest rate floors and collars to manage the interest rate risk associated with our commercial loan portfolio and our portfolio of fixed rate brokered CDs.

64

The following table describes the derivative instruments outstanding at both December 31, 2008 and 2007:

	Notional Amount				Strike Rates	Scheduled Maturity	Fair Value
Product	Dec. 31, 2008		Dec. 31, 2007				Dec. 31, 2008			Dec. 31, 2007
	(dollars in thousands)
Derivative instruments designated as cash flow hedges:
Prime Floor	$	—	$	100,000	6.25%	7/12/2010	$	—		$	968
Subtotal		—		100,000
Non-hedging derivative instruments:
Prime Interest Rate Swap – receive fixed/pay variable		100,000		—	Receive 6.64% Pay 3.25%	7/1/2011		6,651			—
Prime Floor		—		100,000	5.50%	6/30/2010		—			467
Customer Interest Rate Swap – pay fixed/receive variable		126,971		5,658	Pay 5.14% Receive 2.05%	Wtd avg. 4.2 years		(11,940	)		(168	)
Customer Interest Rate Swap – receive fixed/pay variable		126,971		5,658	Receive 5.14% Pay 2.05%	Wtd avg. 4.2 years		11,927			168
Subtotal		353,942		111,316
Total	$	353,942	$	211,316

In order to accommodate individual customer borrowing needs, we have entered into interest rate swap agreements with customers. At the same time, in order to offset the exposure and manage interest rate risk, we enter into an interest rate swap with a different counterparty with offsetting terms. These derivative instruments are not designated as accounting hedges and changes in fair value of these instruments, as well as any net cash settlements, are recognized in noninterest income as other derivative income or expense. As of December 31, 2008 and 2007, we had notional amounts of $127.0 million and $5.7 million, respectively, of interest rate swaps with customers in which we agreed to receive a fixed interest rate and pay a variable interest rate. In addition, as of December 31, 2008 and 2007, we had offsetting interest rate swaps with other counterparties with a notional amount of $127.0 million and $5.7 million, respectively, of notional amount in which we agreed to receive a variable interest rate and pay a fixed interest rate.

We also use derivative instruments, such as interest rate swaps, floors and collars, in the management of our own interest rate risks. During the second quarter of 2008, we entered into a $100.0 million notional amount interest rate swap agreement that was designated as a cash flow hedge against interest receipts from prime-based loans. Under this agreement, we received payments at a fixed rate of 6.64%, computed on the notional amount, and paid a variable rate based upon the prime lending rate, computed on the notional amount. The fair value of cash flow hedging derivative instruments was recorded as an asset or liability with the effective portion of the corresponding unrealized gain or loss recorded in other comprehensive income in stockholders’ equity, net of tax. This cash flow hedge was highly effective, however, we elected to remove the hedge designation on this derivative in December 2008 when we determined that this hedge would no longer be considered highly effective in the future. The unrealized gain on the swap at the date of de-designation was $6.4 million. The amount in accumulated other comprehensive income, along with the related deferred tax liability, will be amortized over what would have been the remaining term of the hedge. During 2008, $105,000 of the deferred gain was reclassified into loan interest income and $2.5 million will be reclassified during 2009. From the date of de-designation to December 31, 2008, the change in fair value, along with net settlements attributed to this period, was recorded in other derivative income in non-interest income and totaled $394,000. This derivative was terminated in January 2009 for $6.6 million.

65

During March 2008, we terminated two interest rate floor agreements with a notional amount of $200.0 million. One of the floor agreements, with a notional amount of $100.0 million, was not designated as an accounting hedge. Other derivative income, reported in noninterest income, included $843,000 of income from changes in the fair value from this non-designated floor agreement during 2008 prior to termination. This floor agreement had been designated as a cash flow hedge, but we discontinued hedge accounting in May 2006. Upon de-designation, the balance in accumulated other comprehensive income, which was comprised of the change in fair value since inception less amortization of the original floor cost, net of tax, is being amortized to loan interest income over the remaining four year term of the floor. During 2008 and 2007, $157,000 and $76,000, respectively, was reclassified as a reduction in loan interest income and $201,000 is expected to be reclassified in 2009. We did not receive any payments in 2008 or 2007 under this floor agreement.

The second floor agreement, with a notional amount of $100.0 million was designated as a cash flow hedge. Upon termination of this floor agreement, the $1.1 million of unrealized gain that had been accumulated in other comprehensive income, which consisted of the increase in fair value since inception less the cumulative amortization of the floor premium, will be amortized over what would have been the remaining life of the floor agreement. This floor was scheduled to mature in July 2010. During 2008, $722,000 of deferred gains were amortized as additional loan interest income and $817,000 of the deferred gain will be amortized in 2009. We did not receive any payments in 2008 or 2007 under this floor agreement.

During 2006, we entered into two interest rate collars with a total notional amount of $300 million that were designated as cash flow hedges against interest receipts from prime-based loans. The collars were obtained at no cost. During 2007, we received $69,000 of settlements under the collar agreements when the floating rate decreased below the collar floor rate. These settlements were recorded as loan interest income. We did not make any payments under the collars in 2007. In December 2007, we terminated these collars with the counterparty. The fair value of the collars at termination was $7.5 million. Because the forecasted hedged transactions were probable of occurring, the gain realized upon termination was deferred and is amortized as loan interest income over what would have been the remaining life of the derivatives, which were scheduled to mature in May 2009 and May 2010. During 2008 and 2007, $3.5 million and $58,000, respectively of deferred gains were amortized as loan interest income and $3.3 million of the deferred gain will be amortized in 2009.

We also have used interest rate swaps (“CD swaps”) to hedge the interest rate risk inherent in certain of our brokered certificates of deposits (“brokered CDs”). The CD swaps were used to convert the fixed rate paid on the brokered CDs to a variable rate based upon 3-month LIBOR. In May 2006, we terminated all of the $330.0 million notional amount of CD swaps that had been used as fair value hedges against brokered CDs. Upon termination, we began amortizing the associated cumulative fair value adjustment to the hedged brokered CDs of $3.7 million as deposit interest expense over the remaining life of the CDs using an effective yield method. During 2008 and 2007, $343,000 and $932,000, respectively, of this fair value adjustment was amortized as deposit interest expense, and $73,000 of this adjustment is expected to be amortized in 2009. In addition, noninterest expense during 2008 included the write-off of $1.3 million of the unamortized fair value adjustments when we exercised our option to call certain of the brokered CDs before their maturity date.

For additional information concerning the accounting treatment for our derivative instruments, please see “Application of Critical Accounting Policies—Derivative Financial Instruments” and Notes 1 and 18 to our consolidated financial statements in this Annual Report on Form 10-K.

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure About Market Risks

Interest rate risk is the most significant market risk affecting us. Other types of market risk, such as foreign currency risk and commodity price risk, do not arise in the normal course of our business activities. Interest rate risk can be defined as the exposure to a movement in interest rates that could have an adverse effect on our net interest income or the market value of our financial instruments. The ongoing monitoring and management of this risk is an important component of our asset and liability management process, which is governed by policies

66

established by the Board of Directors and carried out by the Bank’s Asset/Liability Management Committee, or ALCO. ALCO’s objectives are to manage, to the degree prudently possible, our exposure to interest rate risk over both the one year planning cycle and the longer term strategic horizon and, at the same time, to provide a stable and steadily increasing flow of net interest income. Interest rate risk management activities include establishing guidelines for tenor and repricing characteristics of new business flow, the maturity ladder of wholesale funding and investment security purchase and sale strategies, as well as the use of derivative financial instruments.

We have used various interest rate contracts, including swaps and interest rate floors and collars, to manage interest rate and market risk. These contracts can be designated as hedges of specific existing assets and liabilities. Our asset and liability management and investment policies do not allow the use of derivative financial instruments for trading purposes.

Our primary measurement of interest rate risk is earnings at risk, which is determined through computerized simulation modeling. The primary simulation model assumes a static balance sheet, a parallel interest rate rising or declining ramp and uses the balances, rates, maturities and repricing characteristics of all of our existing assets and liabilities, including derivative financial instruments. These models are built with the sole objective of measuring the volatility of the embedded interest rate risk as of the balance sheet date and, as such, do not provide for growth or any changes in balance sheet composition. Projected net interest income is computed by the model assuming market rates remaining unchanged and compares those results to other interest rate scenarios with changes in the magnitude, timing, and relationship between various interest rates. The impact of embedded options in the balance sheet such as callable agencies and mortgage-backed securities, real estate mortgage loans, and callable borrowings are also considered. Changes in net interest income in the rising and declining rate scenarios are then measured against the net interest income in the rates unchanged scenario. ALCO utilizes the results of the model to quantify the estimated exposure of net interest income to sustained interest rate changes.

Net interest income for year one in a 200 basis points rising rate scenario was calculated to be $6.8 million, or 2.66%, higher than the net interest income in the rates unchanged scenario at December 31, 2008. At December 31, 2007, the projected variance in the rising rate scenario was $2.4 million, or 2.36% higher than the rates unchanged scenario. These exposures were within our policy guidelines of 10%. No simulation for net interest income at risk in a falling rate scenario was calculated because of the low level of market interest rates at December 31, 2008.

Computation of prospective effects of hypothetical interest rate changes are based on numerous assumptions, including, among other factors, no change in the balance sheet size or composition, relative levels of market interest rates, product pricing, reinvestment strategies and customer behavior influencing loan and security prepayments and deposit decay and should not be relied upon as indicative of actual results. Further, the computations do not contemplate any actions we may take in response to changes in market interest rates. We cannot assure you that our actual net interest income would increase or decrease by the amounts computed by the simulations.

The following table indicates the estimated impact on net interest income in year one under various parallel ramp interest rate scenarios at December 31, 2008 and 2007:

	Change in Future Net Interest Income
	At December 31, 2008				At December 31, 2007
Change in interest rates	Dollar Change		Percentage Change		Dollar Change			Percentage Change
	(dollars in thousands)
+200 basis points over one year	$	6,805	6.28	%	$	2,433		2.36	%
- 200 basis points over one year		n/a	n/a			(1,926	)	(1.87	)%

67

We also monitor the repricing terms of our assets and liabilities through gap matrix reports for the rates in unchanged, rising and falling interest rate scenarios. The reports illustrate, at designated time frames, the dollar amount of assets and liabilities maturing or repricing under the different interest rate scenarios.

The following table sets forth the amounts of our interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities outstanding at December 31, 2008, on a consolidated basis, that we anticipate, based upon certain assumptions, to reprice or mature in each of the future time periods shown. The projected repricing of assets and liabilities anticipates prepayments and scheduled rate adjustments, as well as contractual maturities under an interest rate unchanged scenario within the selected time intervals. While we believe such assumptions are reasonable, there can be no assurance that assumed repricing rates would approximate our actual future experience.

	Volumes Subject to Repricing Within
	0-30 Days			31-180 Days			181-365 Days			1-3 Years			4-5 Years			Over 5 Years			Total
	(dollars in thousands)
Interest-earning assets:
Short-term investments and federal funds sold	$	250		$	—		$	—		$	—		$	—		$	—		$	250
Investment securities and FHLB/Federal Reserve Bank stock		12,604			60,003			71,799			291,752			204,039			484,027			1,124,224
Loans		2,087,806			120,023			106,104			353,487			361,847			203,994			3,233,261
Total interest-earning assets		2,100,660			180,026			177,903			645,239			565,886			688,021			4,357,735
Interest-bearing liabilities:
Interest-bearing checking, savings and money market accounts		341,385			100,851			1,063			—			—			211,470			654,769
Certificates of deposit		164,049			705,551			505,756			480,144			149,631			156			2,005,287
Other borrowings		75,560			—			—			80,000			120,000			—			275,560
Notes payable/FHLB advances		315,000			12,000			—			92,500			42,500			—			462,000
Junior subordinated debentures		—			41,238			—			—			—			45,369			86,607
Subordinated notes, net		—			—			—			—			—			55,303			55,303
Total interest-bearing liabilities		895,994			859,640			506,819			652,644			312,131			312,298			3,539,526
Period gap	$	1,204,666		$	(679,614	)	$	(328,916	)	$	(7,405	)	$	253,755		$	375,723		$	818,209
Cumulative gap	$	1,204,666		$	525,052		$	196,136		$	188,731		$	442,486		$	818,209
Period gap to total assets		27.45	%		(15.48	)%		(7.49	)%		(0.17	)%		5.78	%		8.56	%
Cumulative gap to total assets		27.45	%		11.97	%		4.48	%		4.31	%		10.09	%		18.65	%
Cumulative interest-earning assets to cumulative interest-bearing liabilities		234.45	%		129.91	%		108.67	%		106.47	%		113.71	%		123.12	%

Certain shortcomings are inherent in the method of analysis presented in the gap table. For example, although certain assets and liabilities may have similar maturities or periods of repricing, they may react in different degrees to changes in market interest rates. Additionally, certain assets, such as adjustable-rate loans, have features that restrict changes in interest rates, both on a short-term basis and over the life of the asset. More importantly, changes in interest rates, prepayments and early withdrawal levels may deviate significantly from those assumed in the calculations in the table. As a result of these shortcomings, we focus more on earnings at risk simulation modeling than on gap analysis. Even though the gap analysis reflects a ratio of cumulative gap to total assets within acceptable limits, the earnings at risk simulation modeling is considered by management to be more informative in forecasting future income at risk.

Finally, we also monitor core funding utilization in each interest rate scenario as well as market value of equity. These measures are used to evaluate long-term interest rate risk beyond the two year planning horizon.

68

Litigation

We are from time to time a party to litigation arising in the normal course of business. Management knows of no such threatened or pending legal actions against us that are likely to have a material adverse impact on our business, financial condition, liquidity or operating results.

New Accounting Pronouncements

In May 2008, the FASB issued SFAS No. 162, “The Hierarchy of Generally Accepted Accounting Principles” (“SFAS 162”). SFAS 162 identifies the sources of accounting principles and the framework for selecting the principles to be used in the preparation of financial statements of non-governmental entities that are presented in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States. SFAS 162 will be effective 60 days following the Securities and Exchange Commission’s approval of amendments to certain Public Company Accounting Oversight Board standards. The hierarchical guidance provided by SFAS 162 will not have a significant impact on our financial statements.

In March 2008, the FASB issued SFAS No. 161, “Disclosures about Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities” (“SFAS 161”). SFAS 161 amends SFAS 133 and requires qualitative disclosures about how and why an entity uses derivative instruments, how derivative instruments and related hedged items are accounted for under SFAS 133 and its related interpretations, and how derivative instruments and the related hedged items affect an entity’s financial position, financial performance, and cash flows. SFAS 161 is effective for fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2008. The adoption of SFAS 161 on January 1, 2009, did not have a material impact on our consolidated financial statements.

In December 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 160, “Noncontrolling Interests in Financial Statements” (“SFAS 160”). SFAS 160 establishes accounting and reporting standards for the noncontrolling interest in a subsidiary, formerly referred to as minority interest, and provides guidance on accounting for changes in the parent’s ownership interest in a subsidiary. In addition, SFAS 160 establishes standards of accounting for the deconsolidation of a subsidiary due to loss of control. SFAS 160 is effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2008 and early adoption is prohibited. The adoption of SFAS 160 on January 1, 2009, did not have a material impact on our consolidated financial statements.

In December 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 141 (revised 2007), “Business Combinations” (“SFAS 141R”). This statement revises and replaces SFAS No. 141 (“Business Combinations”), which was issued in June 2001. SFAS 141R establishes principles and requirements for how an acquirer in a business combination should recognize and measure in its financial statements the identifiable assets acquired, liabilities assumed, and any noncontrolling interest in the acquiree, recognize and measure goodwill acquired, and determine what information to disclose to enable the users of the financial statements to evaluate the nature and financial effects of the business combination. SFAS 141R applies prospectively to business combinations for which the acquisition date is on or after the beginning of the first annual reporting period beginning on or after December 15, 2008.

In February 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 159, “The Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities” (“SFAS 159”). SFAS 159 provides companies with an option to report selected financial assets and liabilities at fair value. The objective of SFAS 159 is to improve financial reporting by providing entities with the opportunity to mitigate volatility in reported earnings caused by measuring related assets and liabilities differently without having to apply complex hedge accounting. This Statement also establishes presentation and disclosure requirements designed to facilitate comparisons between companies that choose different measurement attributes for similar types of assets and liabilities. The Statement was effective for financial statements issued for fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2007. We adopted SFAS 159 on January 1, 2008 and did not elect the fair value option for any financial assets or liabilities as of that date nor for any asset acquired or liability incurred subsequent to January 1, 2008.

69

The FASB issued SFAS No. 157, “Fair Value Measurements,” (“SFAS 157”) in September 2006. SFAS 157 defines fair value, establishes a framework for measuring fair value in generally accepted accounting principles and expands disclosure related to the use of fair value measures in financial statements. This Statement applies under other accounting pronouncements that require or permit fair value measurements, and does not expand the use of fair value measures in financial statements, but standardizes its definition and guidance in generally accepted accounting principles. The Statement emphasizes that fair value is a market-based measurement, and not an entity-specific measurement, based on an exchange transaction between market participants in which an entity sells an asset or transfers a liability. SFAS 157 also establishes a fair value hierarchy from observable market data as the highest level to fair value based on an entity’s own fair value assumptions as the lowest level. The Statement was effective for financial statements issued for fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2007. The adoption of SFAS 157 on January 1, 2008 did not have a material impact on our consolidated financial statements.

Quarterly Financial Information

The following table sets forth unaudited financial data regarding our operations for each of the four quarters of 2008 and 2007. This information, in the opinion of management, includes all adjustments necessary to present fairly our results of operations for such periods, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments for the periods indicated. The operating results for any quarter are not necessarily indicative of results for any future period.

	2008 Quarter Ended												2007 Quarter Ended
	Dec. 31			Sept. 30			June 30			Mar. 31			Dec. 31			Sept. 30		June 30			Mar. 31
	(in thousands, except per share data)
Interest income	$	54,624		$	50,764		$	46,406		$	52,654		$	56,879		$	57,483	$	56,691		$	56,006
Interest expense		30,210			28,866			24,841			28,180			31,392			31,176		30,235			29,551
Net interest income		24,414			21,898			21,565			24,474			25,487			26,307		26,456			26,455
Provision for loan losses		30,353			52,700			49,355			11,750			23,000			3,400		1,900			3,600
Noninterest income		255			3,066			3,965			3,215			3,612			5,404		4,065			3,238
Other derivative income (expense)		830			154			65			887			270			159		(61	)		24
Noninterest expense		21,630			27,301			22,623			21,816			17,515			18,059		17,652			18,062
Goodwill impairment		—			—			—			—			23,237			—		—			—
Income(loss) before income taxes		(26,484	)		(54,883	)		(46,383	)		(4,990	)		(34,383	)		10,411		10,908			8,055
Income taxes (benefit)		(11,648	)		25,653			(21,067	)		(1,150	)		(5,118	)		3,190		3,756			2,733
Net income (loss)		(14,836	)		(80,536	)		(25,316	)		(3,840	)		(29,265	)		7,221		7,152			5,322
Preferred dividends and discounts		(2,150	)		(16,680	)		—			—			—			—		—			—
Net income (loss) available to common shareholders	$	(16,986	)	$	(97,216	)	$	(25,316	)	$	(3,840	)	$	(29,265	)	$	7,221	$	7,152		$	5,322
Earnings (loss) per common share:
Basic	$	(1.62	)	$	(9.30	)	$	(2.42	)	$	(0.37	)	$	(2.78	)	$	0.68	$	0.65		$	0.48
Diluted		(1.62	)		(9.30	)		(2.42	)		(0.37	)		(2.78	)		0.67		0.65			0.48

70

CAUTIONARY NOTE REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

Certain of the statements under “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and elsewhere in this Annual Report on Form 10-K constitute forward-looking statements. These forward looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act and Section 21E of the Exchange Act reflect our current expectations and projections about our future results, performance, prospects and opportunities. We have tried to identify these forward-looking statements by using words including “may,” “will,” “expect,” “anticipate,” “believe,” “intend,” “could” and “estimate” and similar expressions. These forward-looking statements are based on information currently available to us and are subject to a number of risks, uncertainties and other factors that could cause our actual results, performance, prospects or opportunities in 2009 and beyond to differ materially from those expressed in, or implied by, these forward-looking statements. These risks, uncertainties and other factors include, without limitation: the effect on our profitability if interest rates fluctuate as well as the effect of our customers’ changing use of our deposit products; the possibility that our wholesale funding sources may prove insufficient to replace deposits at maturity and support our growth; the risk that our allowance for loan losses may prove insufficient to absorb probable losses in our loan portfolio; possible volatility in loan charge-offs and recoveries between periods; the decline in residential real estate sales volume and the likely potential for continuing illiquidity in the real estate market, including within the Chicago metropolitan area; the risks associated with the high concentration of commercial real estate loans in our portfolio; the uncertainties in estimating the fair value of developed real estate and undeveloped land in light of declining demand for such assets and continuing illiquidity in the real estate market; the risks associated with management changes, employee turnover and our commercial banking growth initiative, including our expansion of our asset-based lending operations and our entry into new geographical markets; negative developments and disruptions in the credit and lending markets, including the impact of the ongoing credit crisis on our business and on the businesses of our customers as well as other banks and lending institutions with which we have commercial relationships; a continuation of the recent unprecedented volatility in the capital markets; the effectiveness of our hedging transactions and their impact on our future results of operations; the risks associated with implementing our business strategy and managing our growth effectively, including our ability to preserve and access sufficient capital to execute on our strategy; changes in general economic and capital market conditions, interest rates, our debt credit ratings, deposit flows, loan demand, including loan syndication opportunities and competition; changes in legislation or regulatory and accounting principles, policies or guidelines affecting our business; and other economic, competitive, governmental, regulatory and technological factors impacting our operations.

For further information about these and other risks, uncertainties and factors, please review the disclosure included in the section of this Annual Report on Form 10-K captioned “Risk Factors.”

You should not place undue reliance on any forward-looking statements. Except as otherwise required by federal securities laws, we undertake no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statements or risk factors, whether as a result of new information, future events, changed circumstances or any other reason.

Item 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk

The information contained in the section captioned “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure About Market Risks” is incorporated herein by reference.

71

Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data

INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

	Page
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm	73
Financial Statements:
Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2008 and 2007	74
Consolidated Statements of Operations for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006	75
Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006	76
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006	77
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements	79

72

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Stockholders and Board of Directors of Taylor Capital Group, Inc.:

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and subsidiaries (the Company) as of December 31, 2008 and 2007, and the related consolidated statements of operations, changes in stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2008. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2008 and 2007, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2008, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2008, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, and our report dated March 11, 2009 expressed an unqualified opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Chicago, Illinois

March 11, 2009

73

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

(in thousands, except share and per share data)

	December 31,
	2008			2007
ASSETS
Cash and cash equivalents:
Cash and due from banks	$	52,762		$	74,353
Federal funds sold		200			4,550
Short-term investments		50			4,658
Total cash and cash equivalents		53,012			83,561
Investment securities:
Available-for-sale, at fair value		1,094,569			892,346
Held-to-maturity, at amortized cost (fair value of $25 at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively)		25			25
Loans, net of allowance for loan losses of $128,548 and $54,681 at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively		3,104,713			2,478,652
Premises, leasehold improvements and equipment, net		17,124			16,109
Investment in Federal Home Loan Bank and Federal Reserve Bank stock, at cost		29,630			15,310
Other real estate and repossessed assets, net		13,179			2,606
Other assets		76,637			67,854
Total assets	$	4,388,889		$	3,556,463
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Deposits:
Noninterest-bearing	$	470,990		$	471,770
Interest-bearing		2,660,056			2,108,422
Total deposits		3,131,046			2,580,192
Other borrowings		275,560			389,054
Accrued interest, taxes and other liabilities		71,286			41,354
Notes payable and FHLB advances		462,000			205,000
Junior subordinated debentures		86,607			86,607
Subordinated notes, net		55,303			—
Total liabilities		4,081,802			3,302,207
Stockholders’ equity:
Preferred stock, $0.01 par value, 10,000,000 and 5,000,000 shares authorized at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively;
Series A, 8% non-cumulative convertible perpetual, 2,400,000 shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2008, $25.00 liquidation value		60,000			—
Series B, 5% fixed rate cumulative perpetual, 104,823 shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2008, $1,000 liquidation value		97,314			—
Common stock, $0.01 par value; 45,000,000 and 18,000,000 shares authorized at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively; 12,068,604 and 11,504,662 shares issued at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively; 11,115,936 and 10,551,994 shares outstanding at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively		121			115
Surplus		224,872			197,214
Retained earnings (deficit)		(69,294	)		75,145
Accumulated other comprehensive income, net		18,710			6,418
Treasury stock, at cost, 952,668 shares at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively		(24,636	)		(24,636	)
Total stockholders’ equity		307,087			254,256
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity	$	4,388,889		$	3,556,463

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements

74

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

(in thousands, except per share data)

	For the Years Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006
Interest income:
Interest and fees on loans	$	158,564		$	192,530		$	188,375
Interest and dividends on investment securities:
Taxable		38,633			26,643			24,779
Tax-exempt		5,830			6,076			5,554
Interest on cash equivalents		1,421			1,810			2,292
Total interest income		204,448			227,059			221,000
Interest expense:
Deposits		88,279			97,030			87,266
Other borrowings		9,648			11,051			10,622
Notes payable and FHLB advances		5,511			6,342			4,105
Junior subordinated debentures		7,013			7,931			7,815
Subordinated notes		1,646			—			—
Total interest expense		112,097			122,354			109,808
Net interest income		92,351			104,705			111,192
Provision for loan losses		144,158			31,900			6,000
Net interest income (loss) after provision for loan losses		(51,807	)		72,805			105,192
Noninterest income:
Service charges		9,136			7,709			7,738
Trust and investment management fees		3,578			3,864			4,155
Impairment loss on investment securities		(2,399	)		—			—
Loan syndication fees		116			2,600			1,317
Other derivative income		1,936			392			494
Other noninterest income		70			2,146			2,561
Total noninterest income		12,437			16,711			16,265
Noninterest expense:
Salaries and employee benefits		47,855			37,771			40,652
Goodwill impairment		—			23,237			—
Occupancy of premises		7,812			8,673			7,842
Furniture and equipment		3,094			3,431			3,627
Legal fees, net		5,016			2,464			2,166
Non-performing asset expense		4,711			643			542
FDIC assessment		2,687			307			320
Early extinguishment of debt		2,500			—			—
Other professional services		2,311			2,427			1,629
Other noninterest expense		17,384			15,572			16,481
Total noninterest expense		93,370			94,525			73,259
Income (loss) before income taxes		(132,740	)		(5,009	)		48,198
Income tax expense (benefit)		(8,212	)		4,561			2,035
Net income (loss)		(124,528	)		(9,570	)		46,163
Preferred dividends and discounts		(2,150	)		—			—
Implied non-cash preferred dividend		(16,680	)		—			—
Net income (loss) applicable to common shareholders	$	(143,358	)	$	(9,570	)	$	46,163
Basic earnings (loss) per common share	$	(13.72	)	$	(0.89	)	$	4.22
Diluted earnings (loss) per common share		(13.72	)		(0.89	)		4.15

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements

75

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY

(in thousands, except per share data)

	Preferred Stock, Series A			Preferred Stock, Series B		Common Stock		Surplus			Retained Earnings (Deficit)			Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (Loss)			Treasury Stock			Total
Balance at December 31, 2005	$	—		$	—	$	113	$	189,494		$	45,988		$	(9,220	)	$	(7,057	)	$	219,318
Amortization of stock based compensation awards		—			—		—		1,577			—			—			—			1,577
Exercise of stock options		—			—		2		2,673			—			—			—			2,675
Tax benefit on stock options exercised and stock awards		—			—		—		943			—			—			—			943
Comprehensive income:
Net income		—			—		—		—			46,163			—			—			46,163
Change in unrealized gains and losses on available-for-sale investment securities, net of income taxes		—			—		—		—			—			2,612			—			2,612
Change in unrealized gains and losses from cash flow hedging instruments, net of income taxes		—			—		—		—			—			2,005			—			2,005
Change in deferred gain from termination of cash flow hedging instruments, net of income taxes		—			—		—		—			—			(995	)		—			(995	)
Total comprehensive income																					49,785
Common stock dividends – $0.28 per share		—			—		—		—			(3,106	)		—			—			(3,106	)
Balance at December 31, 2006		—			—		115		194,687			89,045			(5,598	)		(7,057	)		271,192
Amortization of stock based compensation awards		—			—		—		1,611			—			—			—			1,611
Exercise of stock options		—			—		—		717			—			—			—			717
Tax benefit on stock options exercised and stock awards		—			—		—		199			—			—			—			199
Purchase of treasury stock		—			—		—		—			—			—			(17,579	)		(17,579	)
Comprehensive income (loss):
Net loss		—			—		—		—			(9,570	)		—			—			(9,570	)
Change in unrealized gains and losses on available-for-sale investment securities, net of income taxes		—			—		—		—			—			7,626			—			7,626
Change in unrealized gains and losses from cash flow hedging instruments, net of income taxes		—			—		—		—			—			4,104			—			4,104
Change in deferred gains and losses from termination of cash flow hedging instruments, net of income taxes		—			—		—		—			—			286			—			286
Total comprehensive income																					2,446
Common stock dividends – $0.40 per share		—			—		—		—			(4,330	)		—			—			(4,330	)
Balance at December 31, 2007		—			—		115		197,214			75,145			6,418			(24,636	)		254,256
Issuance of preferred stock, Series A, net of issuance costs		60,000			—		—		(3,642	)		—			—			—			56,358
Discount from preferred stock beneficial conversion feature		(16,680	)		—		—		16,680			—			—			—			—
Implied non-cash preferred dividend for beneficial conversion feature		16,680			—		—		—			(16,680	)		—			—			—
Issuance of preferred stock, Series B, net of discount and issuance costs		—			96,577		—		—			—			—			—			96,577
Issuance of warrants to purchase common stock, net of issuance costs		—			—		—		12,835			—			—			—			12,835
Issuance of restricted stock grants		—			—		6		(6	)		—			—			—			—
Exercise of stock options		—			—		—		30			—			—			—			30
Amortization of stock based compensation awards		—			—		—		2,222			—			—			—			2,222
Tax benefit on stock options exercised and stock awards		—			—		—		(461	)		—			—			—			(461	)
Comprehensive income (loss):
Net loss		—			—		—		—			(124,528	)		—			—			(124,528	)
Change in unrealized gains and losses on available-for-sale investment securities, net of reclassification adjustment and of income taxes		—			—		—		—			—			10,142			—			10,142
Change in unrealized gains and losses from cash flow hedging instruments, net of income taxes		—			—		—		—			—			3,868			—			3,868
Changes in deferred gains and losses from termination of cash flow hedging instruments, net of income taxes		—			—		—		—			—			(1,718	)		—			(1,718	)
Total comprehensive loss																					(112,236	)
Common stock dividends – $0.10 per share		—			—		—		—			(1,081	)		—			—			(1,081	)
Preferred stock dividends declared, Series A – $0.5889 per share		—			—		—		—			(1,413	)		—			—			(1,413	)
Preferred stock dividends accumulated, Series B		—			737		—		—			(737	)		—			—			—
Balance at December 31, 2008	$	60,000		$	97,314	$	121	$	224,872		$	(69,294	)	$	18,710		$	(24,636	)	$	307,087

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements

76

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

(in thousands)

	For the Years Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006
Cash flows from operating activities:
Net income (loss)	$	(124,528	)	$	(9,570	)	$	46,163
Adjustments to reconcile net income (loss) to net cash provided by operating activities:
Provision for loan losses		144,158			31,900			6,000
Goodwill impairment		—			23,237			—
Other derivative income		(1,936	)		(392	)		(494	)
Loss on investment securities		2,399			—			—
Amortization of premiums and discounts, net		(831	)		(157	)		687
Deferred loan fee amortization		(2,200	)		(4,308	)		(4,874	)
Depreciation and amortization		3,090			3,550			3,487
Deferred income tax expense (benefit)		8,222			(7,806	)		2,690
Losses on other real estate		754			59			224
Tax benefit (expense) on stock options exercised or stock awards		(461	)		199			943
Excess tax benefit on stock options exercised and stock awards		190			(112	)		(654	)
Cash received (paid) on termination of derivative instruments		3,934			7,477			(12,239	)
Other, net		57			2,422			856
Changes in other assets and liabilities:
Accrued interest receivable		581			934			(56	)
Other assets		(22,939	)		(9,159	)		(1,377	)
Accrued interest, taxes and other liabilities		17,803			1,622			(6,373	)
Net cash provided by operating activities		28,293			39,896			34,983
Cash flows from investing activities:
Purchases of available-for-sale securities		(352,772	)		(344,069	)		(115,072	)
Proceeds from principal payments and maturities of available-for-sale securities		165,784			133,236			105,492
Proceeds from principal payments and maturities of held-to-maturity securities		—			250			—
Net increase in loans		(782,601	)		(46,270	)		(117,409	)
Net additions to premises, leasehold improvements and equipment		(4,105	)		(4,860	)		(3,181	)
Proceeds from sales of other real estate		4,776			942			1,067
Capital improvements to other real estate owned		(1,625	)		—			—
Net cash paid on sale of branch		(6,444	)		—			—
Net cash used in investing activities		(976,987	)		(260,771	)		(129,103	)

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements

77

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS—(Continued)

(in thousands)

	For the Years Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006
Cash flows from financing activities:
Net increase (decrease) in deposits	$	557,118		$	(61,081	)	$	99,435
Net increase (decrease) in other borrowings		(113,494	)		126,735			(36,107	)
Repayments of notes payable and FHLB advances		(55,000	)		(240,000	)		(100,000	)
Proceeds from notes payable and FHLB advances		312,000			365,000			105,000
Repayment of junior subordinated debentures		—			—			(1,031	)
Net proceeds from issuance of subordinated notes		58,749			—			—
Net proceeds from issuance of preferred stock		161,068			—			—
Proceeds from exercise of employee stock options		30			717			2,675
Excess tax benefit on stock options exercised and stock awards		(190	)		112			654
Purchase of treasury stock		—			(17,579	)		—
Dividends paid		(2,136	)		(4,388	)		(2,651	)
Net cash provided by financing activities		918,145			169,516			67,975
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents		(30,549	)		(51,359	)		(26,145	)
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year		83,561			134,920			161,065
Cash and cash equivalents, end of year	$	53,012		$	83,561		$	134,920
Supplemental disclosure of cash flow information:
Cash paid (received) during the year for:
Interest	$	106,208		$	122,668		$	105,078
Income taxes		(3,793	)		17,809			12,093
Supplemental disclosures of noncash investing and financing activities:
Change in fair value of available-for-sale investment securities, net of income taxes	$	10,142		$	7,626		$	2,612
Loans transferred to other real estate		14,478			3,195			432

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements

78

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. Summary of Significant Accounting and Reporting Policies

The accounting and reporting policies of Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (the “Company”) conform to accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America and general reporting practices within the financial services industry. The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the consolidated financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from these estimates. Significant items subject to such estimates and assumptions include the allowance for loan losses, the valuation of deferred tax assets, and the valuation of financial instruments such as investment securities and derivatives. The current economic environment has increased the degree of uncertainty inherent in those estimates and assumptions.

The following is a summary of the more significant accounting and reporting policies:

Basis of Presentation and Consolidation:

The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and its wholly-owned subsidiary, Cole Taylor Bank (the “Bank”). The Bank is a $4.4 billion asset commercial bank with banking offices located in the Chicago metropolitan area. The Bank provides a full range of commercial banking services, primarily to small and midsize business, and consumer banking products and services. All significant intercompany balances and transactions between consolidated companies have been eliminated. The Company also owns all of the common stock of TAYC Capital Trust I and TAYC Capital Trust II (each, a “Trust” and collectively, the “Trusts”), both of which are unconsolidated subsidiaries. Each of the Trusts is a Delaware statutory trust created to issue trust preferred securities.

The Company’s products and services consist of commercial banking credit and deposit products delivered by a single operations area. The Company does not have separate and discrete operating segments.

Cash and Cash Equivalents:

Cash and cash equivalents include cash on hand, amounts due from banks, interest-bearing deposits with banks or other financial institutions, federal funds sold, and securities purchased under agreements to resell with original maturities less than 90 days. All federal funds are sold overnight with daily settlement required.

Investment Securities:

Securities that may be sold as part of the Company’s asset/liability or liquidity management or in response to, or in anticipation of, changes in interest rates and resulting prepayment risk, or for other similar factors, are classified as available-for-sale and carried at fair value. Unrealized holding gains and losses on such securities are reported, net of tax, in accumulated other comprehensive income in stockholders’ equity. Securities that the Company has the ability and positive intent to hold to maturity are classified as held-to-maturity and carried at amortized cost. Premiums and discounts on investment securities are amortized over the estimated life of the security, using an effective interest method. In estimating the estimated life of mortgage-related securities, certain judgments are required as to the time and amount of future principal repayments, and these judgments are made based upon the actual performance of the underlying security and the general market consensus regarding changes in mortgage interest rates and underlying prepayment estimates. A decline in fair value of any available-for-sale or held-to-maturity security below cost that is deemed other-than-temporary results in a reduction in carrying amount to fair value, a charge to earnings, and a new cost basis for the security. In

79

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

determining if an impairment is other-than-temporary, the Company considers whether it has the ability and intent to hold an investment until market price recovery, the reasons for impairment, the severity and duration of the impairment, changes in value subsequent to year-end, and the forecasted performance of the security. Realized gains and losses on the sales of all securities are reported in income and computed using the specific identification method. Securities classified as trading are carried at fair value with unrealized gains or losses included in noninterest income. Dividends and interest income are recognized when earned.

Loans:

Loans are stated at the principal amount outstanding, net of unearned discount. Unearned discount on consumer loans is recognized as income over the terms of the loans using the sum-of-the-months-digits method, which approximates an effective interest method. Interest income on other loans is generally recognized using the level-yield method. Loan origination and commitment fees and certain direct loan origination costs are deferred and the net amount is amortized over the life of the loan as an adjustment of the related loans’ yields.

Allowance for Loan Losses:

An allowance for loan losses has been established to provide for those loans that may not be repaid in their entirety. The allowance is increased by provisions for loan losses charged to expense and decreased by charge-offs, net of recoveries. Loans are charged off when the loss is highly probable and clearly identified. Although a loan is charged off, collection efforts may continue and future recoveries may occur. Management maintains the allowance at a level considered adequate to absorb probable losses inherent in the portfolio as of the balance sheet date.

In evaluating the adequacy of the allowance for loan losses, consideration is given to numerous quantitative and qualitative factors, including historical charge-off experience, growth and changes in the composition of the loan portfolio, the volume of delinquent and criticized loans, information about specific borrower situations, including their financial position, work out plans, and estimated collateral values, general economic and business conditions, duration of the business cycle, impact of competition on the Company’s underwriting terms, general market collateral values, and other factors and estimates which are subject to change over time. Estimating the risk of loss and amount of loss on any loan is necessarily subjective and ultimate losses may vary from current estimates. These estimates are reviewed quarterly and, as changes in estimates are identified by management, the amounts are reflected in income through the provision for loan losses in the appropriate period.

A portion of the total allowance for loan losses is related to impaired loans. Certain homogenous loans, including residential mortgage and consumer loans, are collectively evaluated for impairment and, therefore, excluded from impaired loans. A loan is considered impaired if, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Company will be unable to collect the scheduled payments of principal or interest when due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Impaired loans include all nonaccrual loans as well as certain accruing loans judged to have higher risk of noncompliance with the present contractual repayment schedule for both interest and principal. Once a loan has been determined to be impaired, it is measured to establish the amount of the impairment, if any, based on the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, except that collateral-dependent loans may be measured for impairment based on the fair value of the collateral, less cost to sell. If the measure of the impaired loan is less than the recorded investment in the loan, a valuation allowance is recognized. While impaired loans exhibit weaknesses that may inhibit repayment in compliance with the original note terms, the measurement of impairment may not always result in an allowance for loan loss for every impaired loan.

80

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Income Recognition on Nonaccrual Loans:

Loans are placed on a nonaccrual basis for recognition of interest income when sufficient doubt exists as to the full collection of principal and interest. Generally, a loan whose principal and interest is contractually past due 90 days is placed on nonaccrual, unless the loan is adequately secured and in the process of collection. The nonrecognition of interest income on an accrual basis does not constitute forgiveness of the interest. After a loan is placed on nonaccrual status, any current period interest previously accrued but not yet collected is reversed against current income. Interest is included in income subsequent to the date the loan is placed on nonaccrual status only as interest is received and so long as management is satisfied that there is a high probability that principal will be collected in full. The loan is returned to accrual status only when the borrower has demonstrated the ability to make future payments of principal and interest as scheduled.

Premises, Leasehold Improvements and Equipment:

Premises, leasehold improvements and equipment are reported at cost less accumulated depreciation and amortization. Depreciation and amortization is charged to operating expense using the straight-line method for financial reporting purposes over a three to twenty-five year period, based upon the estimated useful lives of the assets. Leasehold improvements are amortized over the shorter of the lease term or the estimated useful life of the improvement.

Premises offered or contracted for sale are reported at the lower of cost or fair value, less cost to sell, and depreciation on such assets is ceased. A charge to expense for the abandonment of a leased facility is recorded in the period that the Company ceases to occupy the space. The charge is determined based upon the remaining lease rentals, reduced by estimated sublease rentals that could reasonably be obtained from the property. Leasehold improvements associated with abandoned facilities are charged to expense in the period in which the Company ceases to occupy the space.

Other Real Estate and Repossessed Assets:

Other real estate and repossessed assets primarily includes properties acquired through foreclosure or deed in lieu of foreclosure. At foreclosure, other real estate is recorded at the lower of the amount of the loan balance or the fair value of the real estate, less estimated cost to sell, through a charge to the allowance for loan losses, if necessary. Generally, the fair value of the real estate at foreclosure is determined through the use of a current appraisal. Subsequent write-downs required by changes in estimated fair value or disposal expenses are recorded through a valuation allowance and a provision for losses charged to noninterest expense. Carrying costs of these properties, net of related income, and gains or losses on the sale from their disposition are also included in current operations as other noninterest expense.

Goodwill and Intangible Assets:

Goodwill represents the excess of purchase price over the fair value of net assets acquired. Goodwill is not amortized, but tested annually for impairment or between annual tests if an event occurs or circumstances change that would more likely than not reduce the fair value of the reporting unit below its carrying value. At any time impairment exists, the Company will record an impairment loss with an impairment charge recorded in noninterest expense. During 2007, the Company recorded a $23.2 million goodwill impairment charge to write-off the remaining goodwill that was created from the 1997 acquisition of the Bank. Intangible assets with finite lives are amortized on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives and tested for impairment only when events or circumstances indicate that the carrying value of the asset may not be recovered.

81

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Income Taxes:

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are reflected at currently enacted income tax rates applicable to the period in which the deferred tax assets or liabilities are expected to be realized or settled. As changes in tax laws or rates are enacted, deferred tax assets and liabilities are adjusted through the income tax provision in the period in which the law is enacted. Deferred tax assets are reduced by a valuation allowance, when in the opinion of Management, it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax asset will not be realized. In determining the realizability of the deferred tax assets, Management evaluates both positive and negative evidence, including the existence of any cumulative losses in the current year and prior two years, the amount of taxes paid in available carry-back years, the forecasts of future income, applicable tax planning strategies, and assessments of current and future economic and business conditions.

At times, the Company applies different tax treatment for selected transactions for tax return purposes than for financial reporting purposes. The accrual for income taxes includes reserves for those differences in tax positions. On January 1, 2007, the Company adopted Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) Interpretation No. 48, “Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes—an interpretation of FASB Statement No. 109” (“FIN 48”). In accordance with FIN 48, the Company initially recognizes the financial statement effects of a tax position when it is more likely than not, based on the technical merits, that the position will be sustained upon examination. Subsequently, the reserves are then utilized or reversed when the Company determines the more likely than not threshold is no longer met, once the statute of limitations has expired, or the tax matter is effectively settled. The Company includes any interest and penalties associated with uncertain tax positions as income tax expense on the Consolidated Statements of Operations. Prior to the adoption of FIN 48, the reserves for uncertain tax positions were utilized or reversed once the statute of limitations expired or the Company determined that it was probable that the position taken on the tax return will be sustained by the taxing authorities. Any change in reserves for interest and penalties related to uncertain tax positions were also included in income tax expense on the Consolidated Statements of Operations.

Earnings Per Share:

Basic earnings per share is computed as net income applicable to common shareholders divided by the weighted-average number of common shares outstanding during the period excluding non-vested restricted stock awards. Net income applicable to common shareholders represents net income or loss for the period less dividends declared or accumulated on preferred stock, including any discount amortization. Diluted earnings per share considers the dilutive effect of common stock equivalents, including stock options, warrants to purchase shares of common stock, and preferred stock that can be converted into shares of common stock. The dilutive impact of stock options and warrants are computed using the treasury stock method. The dilutive impact of convertible preferred stock is computed using the if-converted method which assumes the convertible security is converted at the beginning of the period (or issuance if later), resulting in an increase to the number of common shares outstanding but a decrease to the amount of preferred dividends that would have been included in the determination of net income applicable to common shareholders. The computation of diluted earnings per share does not assume conversion or exercise of common stock equivalents that would have an antidilutive effect on earnings per share. A reconciliation of the net income applicable to common shareholders and weighted average shares used in the basic and diluted earnings per share computation is included in Note 23—“Earnings Per Share.”

Employee Benefit Plans:

Stock-based Compensation: The Company has an incentive compensation plan that allows the issuance of nonqualified stock options and restricted stock awards to employees and directors. These awards are accounted for under Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 123 (revised 2004), “Share-Based

82

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Payment” (“SFAS 123R”), which requires the measurement and recognition of compensation expense for all share-based payment awards made to employees and directors, including employee stock options. Prior to the adoption of SFAS 123R on January 1, 2006, the Company accounted for these awards under Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, “Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees” (“APB 25”), under which no stock-based compensation expense had been recognized for stock options granted to employees and directors because the exercise price of the Company’s stock options equaled the fair market value of the underlying stock at the date of grant. However, compensation costs for restricted stock awards were recognized, based upon the fair value of the stock on the grant date, over the vesting period.

Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan: The Company maintains a nonqualified deferred compensation program for certain key employees which allow participants to defer a portion of their base salaries, commissions, or incentive compensation. The amount of compensation deferred by a participant, along with any Company discretionary contributions to the plan, are held in a rabbi trust for the participant. The Company’s discretionary contributions are recorded as additional compensation expense when contributed. While the Company maintains ownership of the assets, the participants are allowed to direct the investment of the assets in several equity and fixed income mutual funds. These assets are recorded at their approximate fair market value in other assets on the Consolidated Balance Sheets. A liability is established, in accrued interest, taxes and other liabilities on the Consolidated Balance Sheets, for the fair value of the obligation to the participants. Any increase or decrease in the fair market value of plan assets is recorded in other noninterest income on the Consolidated Statements of Operations. Any increase or decrease in the fair value of the deferred compensation obligation to participants is recorded as additional compensation expense or a reduction of compensation expense on the Consolidated Statements of Operations.

Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities:

The Company uses derivative financial instruments (derivatives), including interest rate exchange agreements and interest rate floor or collar agreements to accommodate individual customer borrowing needs and to assist in its interest rate risk management. The Company’s asset and liability management and investment policies do not allow the use of derivatives for trading purposes. In accordance with SFAS No. 133, “Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities” (“SFAS 133”), all derivatives are measured and reported at fair value on the Consolidated Balance Sheet as either an asset or a liability. For derivatives that are designated and qualify as a fair value hedge, the gain or loss on the derivative, as well as the offsetting loss or gain on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk, are recognized in current earnings during the period of the change in the fair values. For derivatives that are designated and qualify as a cash flow hedge, the effective portion of the gain or loss on the derivative is reported as a component of other comprehensive income and reclassified into earnings in the same period or periods during which the hedged transaction affects earnings. For all hedging relationships, derivative gains and losses that are not effective in hedging the changes in fair value or expected cash flows of the hedged item are recognized immediately in current earnings during the period of the change in fair value of the derivative. Similarly, the changes in the fair value of derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting under SFAS 133 or are not designated as an accounting hedge are also reported currently in earnings, in noninterest income.

The net cash settlements on derivatives that qualify for hedge accounting are recorded in interest income or interest expense, based on the item being hedged. The net cash settlements on derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting or are not designated as an accounting hedge are reported in noninterest income.

At the inception of the hedge and quarterly thereafter, a formal assessment is performed to determine whether changes in the fair values or cash flows of the derivatives have been highly effective in offsetting the changes in the fair values or cash flows of the hedged item and whether they are expected to be highly effective

83

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

in the future. The Company discontinues hedge accounting prospectively when it is determined that the derivative is or will no longer be effective in offsetting changes in the fair value or cash flows of the hedged item, the derivative expires, is sold, or terminated, or management determines that designation of the derivative as a hedging instrument is no longer appropriate.

When hedge accounting is discontinued, the future gains and losses arising from any change in fair value are recorded as noninterest income. When a fair value hedge is discontinued, the hedged asset or liability is no longer adjusted for changes in fair value and the existing basis adjustment is amortized or accreted over the remaining life of the asset or liability. When a cash flow hedge is discontinued but the hedged cash flows or forecasted transaction is still expected to occur, gains or losses that were accumulated in other comprehensive income are amortized or accreted into earnings over the same periods in which the hedged transactions would have affected earnings.

The estimates of fair values of the Company’s derivatives are calculated using independent valuation models to estimate market-based valuations. The valuations are determined using widely accepted valuation techniques, including discounted cash flow analysis of the expected cash flow of each derivative. This analysis reflects the contractual terms of the derivative and uses observable market-based inputs, including interest rate curves and implied volatilities. In addition, the fair value estimate also incorporates a credit valuation adjustment to reflect the risk of nonperformance by both the Company and the counterparties in the fair value measurement. The resulting fair values produced by these proprietary valuation models are in part theoretical and, therefore, can vary between derivative dealers and are not necessarily reflective of the actual price at which the derivative contract could be traded. Small changes in assumptions can result in significant changes in valuation. The risks inherent in the determination of the fair value of a derivative may result in income statement volatility.

Debt Issuance Costs and Discounts:

In connection with the issuance of the Company’s junior subordinated debentures and the Bank’s subordinated notes, issuance costs were incurred, including underwriting fees, legal and professional fees, and other costs. These costs are included in other assets on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets and are being amortized over the contractual life of the debt as additional interest expense using an effective interest method. In addition, the Bank’s subordinated notes were issued with detachable warrants to purchase shares of the Company’s common stock. The proceeds from the issuance of the subordinated notes was allocated to the notes and warrants based upon their relative fair values. The allocation to the warrants created a discount on the subordinated notes. This discount is being amortized as additional interest expense on the subordinated notes over the remaining contractual life of the notes using an effective interest method.

Financial Instruments:

In the ordinary course of business, the Company enters into off-balance sheet financial instruments consisting of commitments to extend credit, unused lines of credit, letters of credit, and standby letters of credit. Such financial instruments are recorded in the financial statements when they are funded, except that the fair value of standby letters of credit are recorded as a liability on the Consolidated Balance Sheets and amortized over the commitment period. In addition, the Company will establish a reserve for unfunded commitments, in accrued interest, taxes and other liabilities on the Consolidated Balance Sheets, if it is probable that a liability has been incurred by the Company under a standby letter of credit or a loan commitment that has not yet been funded.

84

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Comprehensive Income:

Comprehensive income includes net income or loss, changes in unrealized holding gains and losses on available-for-sale securities, changes in unrealized gains and losses associated with cash flow hedging instruments, and the amortization of deferred gains and losses associated with terminated cash flow hedges. The statement of comprehensive income is included within the Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity. See Note 22—“Other Comprehensive Income” for further details.

New Accounting Standards:

In May 2008, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued SFAS No. 162, “The Hierarchy of Generally Accepted Accounting Principles” (“SFAS 162”). SFAS 162 identifies the sources of accounting principles and the framework for selecting the principles to be used in the preparation of financial statements of non-governmental entities that are presented in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States. The hierarchical guidance provided by SFAS 162 will not have a significant impact on the Company’s financial statements.

In March 2008, the FASB issued SFAS No. 161, “Disclosures about Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities” (“SFAS 161”). SFAS 161 amends SFAS 133 and requires qualitative disclosures about how and why an entity uses derivative instruments, how derivative instruments and related hedged items are accounted for under SFAS 133 and its related interpretations, and how derivative instruments and the related hedged items affect an entity’s financial position, financial performance, and cash flows. SFAS 161 is effective for fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2008. The adoption of SFAS 161 on January 1, 2009 did not have a material impact on the consolidated financial statements.

In December 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 160, “Noncontrolling Interests in Financial Statements” (“SFAS 160”). SFAS 160 establishes accounting and reporting standards for the noncontrolling interest in a subsidiary, formerly referred to as minority interest, and provides guidance on accounting for changes in the parent’s ownership interest in a subsidiary. In addition, SFAS 160 establishes standards of accounting for the deconsolidation of a subsidiary due to loss of control. SFAS 160 will be effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2008 and early adoption is prohibited. The adoption of SFAS 160 on January 1, 2009 did not have a material impact on the consolidated financial statements.

In December 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 141 (revised 2007), “Business Combinations” (“SFAS 141R”). This Statement revises and replaces SFAS No. 141 (“Business Combinations”), which was issued in June 2001. SFAS 141R establishes principles and requirements for how an acquirer in a business combination should recognize and measure in its financial statements the identifiable assets acquired, liabilities assumed, and any noncontrolling interest in the acquiree, recognize and measure goodwill acquired, and determine what information to disclose to enable the users of the financial statements to evaluate the nature and financial effects of the business combination. SFAS 141R applies prospectively to business combinations for which the acquisition date is on or after the beginning of the first annual reporting period beginning on or after December 15, 2008.

In February 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 159, “The Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities” (“SFAS 159”). SFAS 159 provides companies with an option to report selected financial assets and liabilities at fair value. The objective of SFAS 159 is to improve financial reporting by providing entities with the opportunity to mitigate volatility in reported earnings caused by measuring related assets and liabilities differently without having to apply complex hedge accounting. This Statement also establishes presentation and disclosure requirements designed to facilitate comparisons between companies that choose

85

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

different measurement attributes for similar types of assets and liabilities. The Statement was effective for financial statements issued for fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2007. The Company adopted SFAS 159 on January 1, 2008 and did not elect the fair value option for any financial assets or liabilities as of that date nor for any asset acquired or liability incurred subsequent to January 1, 2008.

The FASB issued SFAS No. 157, “Fair Value Measurements,” (“SFAS 157”) in September 2006. SFAS 157 defines fair value, establishes a framework for measuring fair value in generally accepted accounting principles and expands disclosure related to the use of fair value measures in financial statements. This Statement applies under other accounting pronouncements that require or permit fair value measurements, and does not expand the use of fair value measures in financial statements, but standardizes its definition and guidance in generally accepted accounting principles. The Statement emphasizes that fair value is a market-based measurement, and not an entity-specific measurement, based on an exchange transaction between market participants in which an entity sells an asset or transfers a liability. SFAS 157 also establishes a fair value hierarchy from observable market data as the highest level to fair value based on an entity’s own fair value assumptions as the lowest level. The Statement was effective for financial statements issued for fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2007. The adoption of SFAS 157 on January 1, 2008 did not have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

Reclassifications:

Amounts in the prior years’ consolidated financial statements are reclassified whenever necessary to conform to the current year’s presentation.

2. Cash and Due From Banks

The Bank is required to maintain a balance with the Federal Reserve Bank to cover reserve and clearing requirements. The average balance required to be maintained for each of the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007 was approximately $2.0 million.

86

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

3. Investment Securities

The amortized cost, gross unrealized gains, gross unrealized losses, and estimated fair value of investment securities at December 31, 2008 and 2007 are as follows:

	December 31, 2008
	Amortized Cost		Gross Unrealized Gains		Gross Unrealized Losses			Estimated Fair Value
	(in thousands)
Available-for-sale:
U.S. government sponsored agency securities	$	64,993	$	1,992	$	—		$	66,985
Collateralized mortgage obligations		152,198		2,174		(2,669	)		151,703
Mortgage-backed securities		704,684		22,182		(3,933	)		722,933
State and municipal obligations		137,958		1,347		(1,130	)		138,175
Other debt securities		14,563		210		—			14,773
Total available-for-sale		1,074,396		27,905		(7,732	)		1,094,569
Held-to-maturity:
Other debt securities		25		—		—			25
Total held-to-maturity		25		—		—			25
Total	$	1,074,421	$	27,905	$	(7,732	)	$	1,094,594
	December 31, 2007
	Amortized Cost		Gross Unrealized Gains		Gross Unrealized Losses			Estimated Fair Value
	(in thousands)
Available-for-sale:
U.S. government sponsored agency securities	$	105,720	$	629	$	(44	)	$	106,305
Collateralized mortgage obligations		167,509		691		(2,623	)		165,577
Mortgage-backed securities		472,477		5,655		(2,008	)		476,124
State and municipal obligations		143,271		1,304		(235	)		144,340
Total available-for-sale		888,977		8,279		(4,910	)		892,346
Held-to-maturity:
Other debt securities		25		—		—			25
Total held-to-maturity		25		—		—			25
Total	$	889,002	$	8,279	$	(4,910	)	$	892,371

Investment securities with an approximate book value of $904 million and $549 million at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively, were pledged to collateralize certain deposits, securities sold under agreements to repurchase, Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”) advances, and for other purposes as required or permitted by law.

Investment securities do not include the Bank’s investment in FHLB and Federal Reserve Bank stock of $29.6 million and $15.3 million at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. These investments are required for membership and are carried at cost. The Bank also must maintain a specified level of investment in FHLB stock based upon the amount of outstanding FHLB borrowings. Since October 2007, the Federal Home Loan Bank of Chicago (“FHLBC”) has been under a consensual cease and desist order with its regulator. Under the terms of the

87

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

order, capital stock repurchases, redemptions of FHLBC stock and dividend declarations are subject to prior written approval from the FHLBC’s regulator. The FHLBC has not declared or paid a dividend since the third quarter of 2007. At December 31, 2008, the Company held, at cost, $22.5 million of FHLBC stock, all of which Management believes will ultimately be recovered. The Company also held $40.5 million of FHLB debt securities in the investment portfolio, the fair value of which exceeds the carrying value at December 31, 2008.

No gross gains or losses were realized on the sale of available-for-sale investment securities in 2008, 2007, and 2006. However, during 2008, a $2.4 million charge for other-than temporary impairment was recorded on one private label mortgage-backed security because the Company believed that it was probable that it would not receive all of the contractual cash flows. The Company recorded the charge to reduce the $3.5 million carrying value of the security to its estimated fair value of $1.1 million.

The Company had 63 investment securities in an unrealized loss position at December 31, 2008. Each quarter, the Company analyzes securities in its investment portfolio which have an unrealized loss for other-than-temporary impairment. The Company reviews factors such as the severity and duration of the unrealized loss, credit ratings, and other pertinent information. Those securities with unrealized losses for more than 12 months or for more than 10% of their carrying value are subjected to further analysis to determine if it is probable that not all the contractual cash flows will be received. The Company obtains fair value estimates from additional independent sources and performs cash flow analysis to determine if other than temporary impairment has occurred. The Company does not believe that any other investment securities have other-than-temporary impairment, and that, in general, the unrealized losses in the portfolio are temporary in nature and due primarily to changes in interest rates and not credit related. The Company, however, monitors certain private label mortgage-backed and collateralized mortgage obligation securities for which it believes that current quoted fair values have been impacted by illiquidity in the financial markets for these types of securities. At December 31, 2008, the Company held private-label mortgage-backed and collateralized mortgage obligations with an amortized cost of $37.2 million, the fair value of which was $30.7 million. The Company’s analysis indicates that it is probable all cash flows will be received and, therefore, no other than temporary impairment has been recognized on these securities at December 31, 2008.

As of December 31, 2008, the Company had six securities in its investment portfolio that have been in an unrealized loss position for twelve or more months. Since Management believes the declines in market value of these securities are primarily attributed to changes in interest rates and not credit quality, and because the Company has both the intent and ability to hold all of these securities for the time necessary until a recovery of their fair values, which may be maturity, the Company does not consider these investments to be other-than-temporarily impaired at December 31, 2008 and 2007. The assessment of other-than-temporary impairment is based in part upon factual data and qualitative information available at the time of evaluation and subject to certain risks and uncertainties, including changes in general economic conditions, the issuer’s financial condition, the impact of changes in interest rates or credit spreads, and the expected time to recover fair value. Because this evaluation process is subjective and requires the use of judgment and estimates, the determination of other-than-temporary impairment is subject to change over time.

88

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The following table summarizes, for investment securities with unrealized losses as of December 31, 2008 and 2007, the amount of the unrealized loss and the related fair value of investment securities with unrealized losses. The unrealized losses have been further segregated by investment securities that have been in a continuous unrealized loss position for less than twelve months and those that have been in a continuous unrealized loss position for twelve or more months.

	December 31, 2008
	Length of Continuous Unrealized Loss Position
	Less than 12 months					12 months or longer					Total
	Fair Value		Unrealized Losses			Fair Value		Unrealized Losses			Fair Value		Unrealized Losses
	(in thousands)
Available-for-sale:
Collateralized mortgage obligations	$	16,009	$	(391	)	$	11,840	$	(2,278	)	$	27,849	$	(2,669	)
Mortgage-backed securities		6,948		(2,762	)		3,828		(1,171	)		10,776		(3,933	)
State and municipal obligations		45,312		(1,084	)		2,935		(46	)		48,247		(1,130	)
Temporarily impaired securities – Available-for-sale	$	68,269	$	(4,237	)	$	18,603	$	(3,495	)	$	86,872	$	(7,732	)
	December 31, 2007
	Length of Continuous Unrealized Loss Position
	Less than 12 months					12 months or longer					Total
	Fair Value		Unrealized Losses			Fair Value		Unrealized Losses			Fair Value		Unrealized Losses
	(in thousands)
Available-for-sale:
U.S. government sponsored agency securities	$	9,994	$	(6	)	$	19,962	$	(38	)	$	29,956	$	(44	)
Collateralized mortgage obligations		38,880		(865	)		84,915		(1,758	)		123,795		(2,623	)
Mortgage-backed securities		22,019		(159	)		98,667		(1,849	)		120,686		(2,008	)
State and municipal obligations		22,648		(123	)		13,543		(112	)		36,191		(235	)
Temporarily impaired securities – Available-for-sale	$	93,541	$	(1,153	)	$	217,087	$	(3,757	)	$	310,628	$	(4,910	)

89

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The following table shows the contractual maturities of debt securities, categorized by amortized cost and estimated fair value, at December 31, 2008.

	Amortized Cost		Estimated Fair Value
	(in thousands)
Available-for-sale:
Due in one year or less	$	2,295	$	2,306
Due after one year through five years		69,348		71,368
Due after five years through ten years		24,974		25,642
Due after ten years		120,897		120,617
Collateralized mortgage obligations		152,198		151,703
Mortgage-backed securities		704,684		722,933
Total	$	1,074,396	$	1,094,569
Held-to-maturity:
Due after one year through five years	$	25	$	25
Total	$	25	$	25

4. Loans

Loans classified by type at December 31, 2008 and 2007 are as follows:

	2008			2007
	(in thousands)
Commercial and industrial	$	1,485,673		$	850,196
Commercial real estate secured		1,058,930			839,629
Real estate-construction		531,452			671,678
Residential real estate mortgages		53,859			60,195
Home equity loans and lines of credit		92,085			99,696
Consumer		9,163			10,551
Other loans		2,115			1,421
Gross loans		3,233,277			2,533,366
Less: Unearned discount		(16	)		(33	)
Total loans		3,233,261			2,533,333
Less: Allowance for loan losses		(128,548	)		(54,681	)
Loans, net	$	3,104,713		$	2,478,652

Nonperforming loans include nonaccrual loans and interest-accruing loans contractually past due 90 days or more. Loans are placed on a nonaccrual basis for recognition of interest income when sufficient doubt exists as to the full collection of principal and interest. Generally, loans are to be placed on nonaccrual when principal and interest is contractually past due 90 days, unless the loan is adequately secured and in the process of collection.

90

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The following table sets forth the amounts of nonperforming loans at December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006 and the related interest on nonaccrual loans for the years then ended:

	2008		2007		2006
	(in thousands)
Recorded balance of loans contractually past due 90 days or more but still accruing interest, at end of year	$	153	$	4,253	$	10,046
Recorded balance of nonaccrual loans, at end of year		200,227		71,412		23,111
Total nonperforming loans	$	200,380	$	75,665	$	33,157
Interest on nonaccrual loans recognized in income	$	8,086	$	4,891	$	723
Interest on nonaccrual loans which would have been recognized under the original terms of the loans		19,285		8,431		3,168

Impaired loans include all nonaccrual loans as well as certain accruing loans judged to have higher risk of noncompliance with the present contractual repayment schedule for both interest and principal. Once a loan has been determined to be impaired, it is measured to establish the amount of the impairment based on the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, except that collateral-dependent loans may be measured for impairment based on the fair value of the collateral, less estimated cost to sell. If the measure of the impaired loan is less than the recorded investment in the loan, a valuation allowance is recognized. While impaired loans exhibit weaknesses that may inhibit repayment in compliance with the original note terms, the measurement of impairment may not always result in an allowance for loan loss for every impaired loan.

Information about the Company’s impaired loans at or for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006 is as follows:

	2008		2007		2006
	(in thousands)
Recorded balance of impaired loans, at end of year:
With related allowance for loan loss	$	120,973	$	66,547	$	18,813
With no related allowance for loan loss		85,732		24,425		5,323
Total	$	206,705	$	90,972	$	24,136
Allowance for loan losses related to impaired loans, at end of year	$	41,451	$	9,375	$	2,528
Average balance of impaired loans for the year		161,654		46,695		33,928
Interest income recognized on impaired loans for the year		1,758		1,665		850

The Company provides several types of loans to its customers, including residential, construction, commercial, and consumer loans. Lending activities are conducted with customers in a wide variety of industries as well as with individuals with a wide variety of credit requirements. The Company does not have a concentration of loans in any specific industry. Credit risks tend to be geographically concentrated in that the majority of the Company’s customer base lies within the Chicago metropolitan area. Furthermore, as of December 31, 2008, 54% of the Company’s loan portfolio involves loans that are to some degree secured by real estate properties located primarily within the Chicago metropolitan area.

91

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Activity in the allowance for loan losses for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006 consisted of the following:

	2008			2007			2006
	(in thousands)
Balance at beginning of year	$	54,681		$	37,516		$	37,481
Provision for loan losses		144,158			31,900			6,000
Loans charged-off		(72,471	)		(15,792	)		(7,231	)
Recoveries on loans previously charged-off		2,180			1,057			1,266
Net charge-offs		(70,291	)		(14,735	)		(5,965	)
Balance at end of year	$	128,548		$	54,681		$	37,516

During 2007 and throughout 2008, the Company experienced deterioration in credit quality, primarily in its residential construction and land portfolio. This portfolio of loans totaled $350.0 million at December 31, 2008, as compared to $492.8 million at December 31, 2007. The downturn in the residential housing market that has persisted throughout 2008 has reduced demand and market prices for developed residential lots and vacant land as well as homes. The economic downturn and the depressed housing market has negatively impacted many residential real estate development customers and resulted in an increase in nonperforming loans. At December 31, 2008, $275.6 million, or 79%, of this portfolio was secured by single family, condominium, or multi-family developments and the remaining $74.4 million was secured by land. Most of these developments and land are located in Illinois, primarily in the Chicago metropolitan and surrounding areas. Nonaccrual loans in this portfolio totaled $114.2 million at December 31, 2008 and the Company charged-off $54.5 million from this portfolio in 2008. At December 31, 2008, $114.2 million of the residential construction and land portfolio was considered impaired and Management performed an analysis of the underlying collateral and determined a valuation allowance of $23.8 million was required on such impaired loans. The analysis was based primarily on appraisals, available sales contracts, and other opinions of values, adjusted for expected costs to sell. The valuation process is subject to the use of significant estimates and actual results could differ from estimates.

The Company has extended loans to directors and executive officers of the Bank, the Company and their related interests. The aggregate loans outstanding to the directors and executive officers of the Bank, the Company and their related interests totaled $63.8 million and $82.0 million at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. During 2008 and 2007, new loans to such persons and their related interests totaled $36.9 million and $64.1 million, respectively and repayments totaled $55.1 million and $31.5 million, respectively. In the opinion of management, these loans were made in the normal course of business and on substantially the same terms for comparable transactions with other borrowers and do not involve more than a normal risk of collectibility.

92

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

5. Premises, Leasehold Improvements and Equipment

Premises, leasehold improvements and equipment at December 31, 2008 and 2007 are summarized as follows:

	2008			2007
	(in thousands)
Land and improvements	$	1,094		$	1,158
Buildings and improvements		8,253			5,803
Leasehold improvements		7,379			7,739
Furniture, fixtures and equipment		20,342			21,023
Total cost		37,068			35,723
Less accumulated depreciation and amortization		(19,944	)		(19,614	)
Net book value	$	17,124		$	16,109

6. Other Real Estate and Repossessed Assets

Other real estate owned and repossessed assets totaled $13.2 million and $2.6 million at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. Activity in the allowance for losses on other real estate and repossessed assets for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, are as follows:

	2008			2007			2006
	(in thousands)
Balance at beginning of year	$	125		$	130		$	99
Provision for losses on other real estate		857			7			216
Charge-offs		(271	)		(12	)		(185	)
Balance at end of year	$	711		$	125		$	130

7. Interest-Bearing Deposits

Interest-bearing deposits at December 31, 2008 and 2007 are summarized as follows:

	2008		2007
	(in thousands)
NOW accounts	$	218,451	$	76,572
Savings accounts		42,275		49,386
Money market deposits		394,043		763,336
Time deposits:
Certificates of deposit of less than $100,000		385,800		229,474
Certificates of deposit of $100,000 or more		484,383		313,969
Out-of-local-market certificates of deposit		136,470		117,159
Brokered certificates of deposit		913,803		505,631
Public time deposits		84,831		52,895
Total time deposits		2,005,287		1,219,128
Total	$	2,660,056	$	2,108,422

Interest expense on time deposits with balances of $100,000 or more was $13.2 million, $11.6 million, and $11.5 million for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, respectively.

93

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

At December 31, 2008, the scheduled maturities of total time deposits are as follows:

Year	Amount
	(in thousands)
2009	$	1,376,804
2010		317,021
2011		161,813
2012		86,824
2013		62,465
Thereafter		360
Total	$	2,005,287

8. Other Borrowings

Other borrowings at December 31, 2008 and 2007 are summarized as follows:

	2008				2007
	Amount Borrowed		Weighted Average Rate		Amount Borrowed		Weighted Average Rate
	(dollars in thousands)
Securities sold under agreements to repurchase:
Overnight	$	21,017	0.18	%	$	125,461	2.67	%
Term		200,000	4.05			200,000	4.05
Federal funds purchased		54,482	0.36			23,468	4.00
U.S. Treasury tax and loan note option		61	0.00			40,125	4.25
Total	$	275,560	3.03	%	$	389,054	3.62	%

As of December 31, 2008 and 2007, the term repurchase agreements consisted of the following:

	December 31, 2008		December 31, 2007
	(in thousands)
Term Repurchase Agreements:
Repurchase agreement – rate 4.08%, due September 13, 2010, callable after December 13, 2007	$	40,000	$	40,000
Repurchase agreement – rate 4.02%, due October 10, 2010, callable after January 10, 2008		40,000		40,000
Repurchase agreement – rate 3.20%, due December 13, 2012, callable after March 13, 2008		20,000		20,000
Structured repurchase agreement – rate 4.41%, due August 31, 2012, callable after August 31, 2009, with embedded double interest rate caps at LIBOR of 5.58% and a floor of 0.00%		40,000		40,000
Structured repurchase agreement – rate 4.31%, due September 27, 2012, callable after September 27, 2009, with embedded double interest rate caps at LIBOR of 5.20% and a floor of 0.00%		40,000		40,000
Structured repurchase agreement – rate 3.70%, due December 13, 2012, callable after December 13, 2009, with embedded double interest rate caps at LIBOR of 5.11% and a floor of 0.00%		20,000		20,000
Total term repurchase agreements	$	200,000	$	200,000

94

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Under the terms of the securities sold under agreements to repurchase, if the market value of the pledged securities declines below the repurchase liability, the Bank may be required to provide additional collateral to the counterparty. For overnight repurchase agreements, the Bank maintains control of the pledged securities, however, for the term repurchase agreements, the pledged securities are held by the counterparty. All of the $200.0 million of term repurchase agreements are callable before their actual maturity date. At December 31, 2008, $100 million of term repurchase agreements were currently eligible to be called and the remaining $100 million are eligible to be called beginning in 2009.

Information concerning securities sold under agreements to repurchase, including both the overnight and term agreements, for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006 is summarized as follows:

	2008			2007			2006
	(dollars in thousands)
Daily average balance during the year	$	281,567		$	218,125		$	227,237
Daily average rate during the year		3.24	%		4.01	%		3.91	%
Maximum amount outstanding at any month end	$	313,896		$	325,461		$	276,134

Under the treasury tax and loan note option, the Bank is authorized to accept U.S. Treasury Department deposits of excess funds along with the deposits of customer taxes. These liabilities bear interest at a rate of 0.25% below the average federal funds rate (0.00% at December 31, 2008) and are collateralized by a pledge of various investment securities. The Bank also participates in the U.S. Treasury Department’s Term Investment Option program whereby the Bank can obtain additional short-term funding from the U.S. Treasury at the prevailing short-term market rates and are collateralized by commercial loans.

At December 31, 2008, subject to available collateral, the Bank had total pre-approved overnight federal funds borrowings and repurchase agreement lines of $95 million and $390 million, respectively.

9. Income Taxes

The components of the income tax expense (benefit) for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006 are as follows:

	2008			2007			2006
	(in thousands)
Current tax expense (benefit):
Federal	$	(16,143	)	$	10,474		$	(2,344	)
State		(291	)		1,893			1,689
Total		(16,434	)		12,367			(655	)
Deferred tax expense (benefit):
Federal		6,045			(6,175	)		2,054
State		2,177			(1,631	)		636
Total		8,222			(7,806	)		2,690
Applicable income taxes	$	(8,212	)	$	4,561		$	2,035

95

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Income tax expense (benefit) was different from the amounts computed by applying the federal statutory rate of 35% for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006 to income (loss) before income taxes because of the following:

	2008			2007			2006
	(in thousands)
Federal income tax expense (benefit) at statutory rate	$	(46,459	)	$	(1,753	)	$	16,869
Increase (decrease) in taxes resulting from:
Increase in valuation allowance		46,397			—			—
State tax benefit before valuation allowance		(6,398	)		546			1,511
Impact of enacted state tax legislation		—			(376	)		—
Tax-exempt interest income, net of disallowed interest deduction		(1,804	)		(1,878	)		(1,834	)
Goodwill impairment		—			8,133			—
Addition (reversal) of allocated tax reserves, net		—			(34	)		(14,643	)
Other, net		52			(77	)		132
Total	$	(8,212	)	$	4,561		$	2,035

During 2008, the Company recorded an $8.2 million income tax benefit, which included $46.4 million of additional income tax expense to establish a valuation allowance against the Company’s net deferred tax asset. Under generally accepted accounting principles, a valuation allowance is required to be recognized if it is “more likely than not” that a deferred tax asset will not be realized. The determination of the realizability of the deferred tax assets is highly subjective and dependent upon judgment concerning management’s evaluation of both positive and negative evidence, the forecasts of future income, applicable tax planning strategies, and assessments of current and future economic and business conditions. Positive evidence includes the existence of taxes paid in available carry-back years as well as the probability that taxable income will be generated in future periods, while negative evidence includes the cumulative losses in the current year and prior two years and general business and economic trends. At December 31, 2008, the Company determined a valuation allowance was necessary, largely based on the negative evidence represented by a cumulative loss in the most recent three-year period caused by the loan loss provisions recorded during 2008 associated with the residential real estate construction portfolio. In addition, general uncertainty surrounding future economic and business conditions has increased the potential volatility and uncertainty of projected earnings. Management is required to re-evaluate the deferred tax asset and the related valuation allowance quarterly.

The net recorded deferred tax asset, after valuation allowance, at December 31, 2008 was $6.9 million. The remaining deferred tax asset was supported by remaining carry-backs of income taxes paid in prior years and available tax planning strategies. The deferred tax asset is also net of deferred tax liabilities associated with net unrealized gains on available for sale investment securities and hedging activities recorded in other comprehensive income.

During 2007, despite a pre-tax loss of $5.0 million, the Company recorded income tax expense of $4.6 million, largely because the goodwill impairment charge was not deductible for income tax purposes. In addition, during 2007, the State of Illinois passed legislation that increased the Company’s effective tax rate beginning in 2008. As a result of the enactment of this legislation, the Company recognized a reduction in income tax expense in 2007 of $376,000 due to an increase in deferred tax assets caused by the higher expected state tax rate. During 2006, income tax expense was reduced by the recognition of $15.5 million of tax benefit relating to deductions taken on prior year tax returns that had not been recognized for financial reporting purposes. Tax liabilities established for these tax uncertainties were no longer required primarily as a result of the expiration of the statute

96

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

of limitations of the Company’s 2002 federal income tax return and the results of examinations in 2006 by taxing authorities with respect to other tax years.

The tax effects of temporary differences that give rise to significant portions of the deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities at December 31, 2008 and 2007 are presented below:

	2008			2007
	(in thousands)
Deferred Tax Assets:
Loans, principally due to allowance for loan losses	$	52,375		$	21,892
Deferred income, principally net loan origination fees		3,281			1,840
Employee benefits		4,292			4,324
Deferred rent		1,686			1,587
Premises, leasehold improvements and equipment, principally due to differences in depreciation		688			789
Federal tax credit carry forwards		2,304			—
State taxes net operating loss carry forwards, net		2,217			—
Other		1,394			358
Gross deferred tax assets		68,237			30,790
Less: Valuation allowance		(46,397	)		—
Net deferred tax assets		21,840			30,790
Deferred Tax Liabilities:
FHLB stock dividends		(790	)		(788	)
Brokered CD swaps		(727	)		(1,553	)
Discount accretion		(126	)		(94	)
Other		(1,010	)		(946	)
Tax effect of other comprehensive income		(12,287	)		(4,184	)
Gross deferred tax liabilities		(14,940	)		(7,565	)
Net deferred tax assets	$	6,900		$	23,225

At December 31, 2008, the Company had $3.4 million of state net operating loss carry forwards that will expire in 2020. In addition, the Company had a federal tax credit carry forward of $439,000 that will expire in 2028 and a $1.8 million alternative minimum tax credit carry forward that can be carried forward indefinitely.

The Company adopted Financial Accounting Standards Board Interpretation No. 48, “Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes—an interpretation of FASB Statement No. 109” (“FIN 48”), on January 1, 2007. The implementation of FIN 48 resulted in no change in the liability for unrecognized tax benefits. The following table provides a rollforward of the Company’s unrecognized tax positions for the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007.

	2008			2007
	(in thousands)
Balance at beginning of period	$	173		$	456
Additions based on tax positions related to the current year		39			28
Additions based on tax positions related to prior years		—			56
Reduction for tax positions settled or paid		(113	)		(367	)
Reductions for lapse of statutes of limitations		(16	)		—
Balance at end of period	$	83		$	173

97

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The total amount of unrecognized tax benefits at December 31, 2008 was $83,000, all of which would affect the effective income tax rate if recognized. The Company believes that it is reasonably possible that $15,000 of unrecognized tax benefits, primarily related to the resolution of potential state tax liabilities, is expected to reverse in the next twelve months.

During the year ended December 31, 2008, the Company recognized a reduction in income tax expense of approximately $65,000 related to interest and penalties and had approximately $6,000 accrued for the payment of interest and penalties at December 31, 2008 on the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The Company’s policy is to recognize interest and penalties in income tax expense on the Consolidated Statements of Operations.

The Company is no longer subject to examination by federal tax authorities for the years of 2004 and prior because the statute of limitations has expired. The Company, which is located and primarily does business in Illinois, is no longer subject to examination by the Illinois taxing authorities for the years of 2004 and prior.

10. Notes Payable and FHLB Advances

Notes Payable and FHLB advances at December 31, 2008 and December 31, 2007 consisted of the following:

	December 31, 2008		December 31, 2007
	(in thousands)
Taylor Capital Group, Inc.:
Revolving credit facility – $15.0 million and $20.0 million maximum available at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively; interest, at the Company’s election, at the prime rate or LIBOR plus 1.15%, interest rate at December 31, 2008 was 2.62%; matures March 31, 2009	$	12,000	$	—
Total notes payable		12,000		—
Cole Taylor Bank:
FHLB Advance – interest determined daily at the Fed Funds rate minus 3 basis points, interest rate at December 31, 2007 was 3.68%, matured January 14, 2008		—		100,000
FHLB advance – interest determined quarterly at the 3-month LIBOR plus 0.23%, with maximum interest rate of 5.48%; interest rate at December 31, 2007 was 5.47%; matured April 7, 2008		—		30,000
FHLB advance – interest determined quarterly at the 3-month LIBOR plus 0.255%, with maximum interest rate of 5.76%; interest rate at December 31, 2007 was 5.50%, matured July 13, 2008		—		25,000
FHLB advance – 4.59%, due April 5, 2010, callable after April 4, 2008		25,000		25,000
FHLB advance – 4.83%, due February 1, 2011, callable after January 8, 2004		25,000		25,000
FHLB advance – 0.25%, due January 2, 2009		275,000		—
FHLB advance – 0.30%, due January 2, 2009		40,000		—
FHLB advance – 2.29%, due April 7, 2011, callable after April 7, 2009		25,000		—
FHLB advance – 2.84%, due July 14, 2011, callable after July 14, 2009		17,500		—
FHLB advance – 2.57%, due April 8, 2013, callable after April 7, 2010		25,000		—
FHLB advance – 3.26%, due July 15, 2013, callable after July 14, 2010		17,500		—
Total FHLB advances		450,000		205,000
Total notes payable and FHLB advances	$	462,000	$	205,000

98

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Notes payable: At December 31, 2008, the Company had a $15.0 million revolving credit facility, of which $12.0 million of the revolver was outstanding. The facility is secured by the Company’s pledge of its capital stock of the Bank and includes certain restrictions in the event of default. Interest on any drawn upon amounts would be, at the Company’s election, at the prime rate or LIBOR plus 1.15%. The underlying loan agreement requires that the Bank remain well capitalized and the holding company remain adequately capitalized as defined by regulatory guidelines. As of December 31, 2008, the Company was in compliance with these covenants. Subsequent to year-end 2008, the Company executed an amendment with its lender to extend this facility from March 31, 2009 until March 31, 2010.

FHLB advances: The Company’s advances consist of borrowings from the Federal Home Loan Bank of Chicago (“FHLBC”). At December 31, 2008, the FHLB advances were collateralized by $499.4 million of investment securities and a blanket lien on $155.2 million of qualified first-mortgage residential and home equity loans. Based on the value of collateral pledged at December 31, 2008, the Bank had additional borrowing capacity at the FHLB of $146.7 million. The weighted average interest rates at December 31, 2008 and 2007 were 1.21% and 4.42%, respectively.

Since October 2007, the FHLBC has been under a consensual cease and desist order with its regulator. Under the terms of the order, capital stock repurchases, redemptions of FHLBC stock and dividend declarations are subject to prior written approval from the FHLBC’s regulator. The FHLBC has not declared or paid a dividend since the third quarter of 2007. Based on written correspondence and verbal communications with the FHLBC, Management believes the order should not impact the FHLBC’s ability to provide the Company with liquidity and funding needs, provided the Company continues to meet the FHLBC’s credit standards.

Following are the scheduled maturities of notes payable and FHLB advances, categorized by the earlier of call or contractual maturity, at December 31, 2008:

Year	Amount
	(in thousands)
2009	$	419,500
2010		42,500
Total	$	462,000

11. Junior Subordinated Debentures

The following table summarizes the amount of junior subordinated debentures issued by the Company to TAYC Capital Trust I and TAYC Capital Trust II as of December 31, 2008 and 2007:

	TAYC Capital Trust I		TAYC Capital Trust II
	(dollars in thousands)
Issuance Date		Oct. 21, 2002		June 17, 2004
Maturity Date		Oct. 21, 2032		June 17, 2034
Annual Rate		9.75%		3-mo LIBOR + 2.68%
Amount of Junior Subordinated Debentures:
At December 31, 2007	$	45,369	$	41,238
At December 31, 2008		45,369		41,238
Amount of Trust Preferred Securities Issued by Trust:
At December 31, 2007	$	44,000	$	40,000
At December 31, 2008		44,000		40,000

99

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

In June 2004, the Company formed TAYC Capital Trust II, a wholly-owned subsidiary and a Delaware statutory trust. In June 2004, TAYC Capital Trust II issued $40.0 million of floating rate trust preferred securities and invested the proceeds, along with $1.2 million received from the purchase of its common equity securities, in $41.2 million of floating rate junior subordinated debentures of the Company. The sole assets of the TAYC Capital Trust II are the Company’s junior subordinated debentures. The interest rate on both the trust preferred securities and the junior subordinated debentures equals the three-month LIBOR plus 2.68% and re-prices quarterly on the 17^th of September, December, March and June. The interest rate on both the trust preferred securities and the junior subordinated debentures was 4.55% and 7.67% at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. The Company may redeem all or part of the debentures at any time on or after June 17, 2009, subject to approval by the Federal Reserve Bank, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the aggregate liquidation amount of the debentures plus any accumulated and unpaid distributions thereon to the date of redemption. The trust preferred securities are subject to mandatory redemption when the junior subordinated debentures are paid at maturity in 2034 or upon any earlier redemption of the debentures. The trust preferred securities may also be redeemed at any time in the event of unfavorable changes in certain laws or regulations, provided that any redemption prior to June 17, 2009 would require the payment of a prepayment penalty.

In October 2002, the Company formed TAYC Capital Trust I, a wholly-owned subsidiary and a Delaware statutory trust to issue trust preferred securities. TAYC Capital Trust I used $44.0 million of proceeds from the sale of these trust preferred securities, along with $1.4 million received from the purchase of its common equity securities, to invest in $45.4 million of 9.75% junior subordinated debentures of the Company. The sole assets of the TAYC Capital Trust I are the Company’s junior subordinated debentures. Interest on both the trust preferred securities and junior subordinated debentures is payable quarterly at a rate of 9.75% per year. The Company may redeem all or part of these debentures at any time on or after October 21, 2007, subject to approval by the Federal Reserve Bank, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the aggregate liquidation amount of the debentures plus any accumulated and unpaid distributions thereon to the date of redemption. The trust preferred securities are subject to mandatory redemption when the junior subordinated debentures are paid at maturity in 2032 or upon any earlier redemption of the debentures. The trust preferred securities may also be redeemed at any time in the event of unfavorable changes in certain laws or regulations.

The Company may defer the payment of interest on each of the junior subordinated debentures at any time for a period not exceeding 20 consecutive quarters, provided that the deferral period does not extend past the stated maturity. During any such deferral period, distributions on the corresponding trust preferred securities will also be deferred and the Company’s ability to pay dividends on its common shares will be restricted. Issuance costs from each issuance of the trust preferred securities, consisting primarily of underwriting discounts and professional fees, were capitalized and are being amortized over 30 years, or through the maturity dates, to interest expense using the straight-line method. At December 31, 2008, unamortized issuance costs related to TAYC Capital Trust I and TAYC Capital Trust II were $2.4 million and $400,000, respectively.

The Company’s obligations with respect to each of the trust preferred securities and the related debentures, in the aggregate, constitute a full, irrevocable and unconditional guarantee on a subordinated basis by the Company of the obligations of each of the Trusts under the respective trust preferred securities.

The Company does not consolidate TAYC Capital Trust I and TAYC Capital Trust II. The equity investments in the Trusts of $2.6 million are reported in other assets on the Consolidated Balance Sheet at December 31, 2008 and 2007.

12. Subordinated Notes

In September 2008, the Bank issued $60.0 million of 10% subordinated notes. The subordinated notes pay interest quarterly at an annual rate of 10% and will mature on September 29, 2016, but may be prepaid at the

100

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Bank’s option after September 29, 2011. The subordinated notes are subordinated unsecured obligations of the Bank and are subordinate to all deposits, purchased funds, and senior indebtedness of the Bank. The notes also contain restrictions on the Bank’s ability to pay dividends to the Company in the event the Bank fails to make any required principal and interest payments. In addition, for every $1,000 in principal amount of the subordinated notes, investors received a warrant to purchase 15 shares of the Company’s common stock at an exercise price of $10.00 per share, subject to customary anti-dilution adjustments, which represents an aggregate of 900,000 shares of common stock. The warrants will expire on September 29, 2013. The proceeds received from this transaction were allocated to the subordinated notes and the warrants based upon their relative fair values. At December 31, 2008, the subordinated notes reported on the Consolidated Balance Sheets totaled $55.3 million, which was net of $4.7 million of unamortized discount, which represents the fair value allocated to the warrants. The discount is being amortized as additional interest expense on the subordinated notes over the remaining contractual life of the notes. The fair value allocated to the warrants, totaling $4.7 million at the issuance date, was credited to surplus in stockholders’ equity on the Consolidated Balance Sheet. The subordinated notes qualify as Tier II capital for regulatory capital purposes.

13. Employee Benefit Plans

The Company’s employees participate in employee benefit plans consisting of a 401(k) Plan and a Profit Sharing/Employee Stock Ownership Plan (“ESOP”), collectively called the “Plans”. Contributions to the Plans are made at the discretion of the Board of Directors, with the exception of certain 401(k) matching of employee contributions. The 401(k) plan allows participants a choice of several equity and fixed income mutual funds. Company common stock is not an investment option for 401(k) participants. For the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, contributions paid to the Plans were $ 1.1 million, $1.8 million, and $2.3 million, respectively. The ESOP owned 290,366 shares and 291,577 shares of the Company’s common stock as of December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. These shares are held in trust for the participants by the ESOP’s trustee. As of December 31, 2008, all shares of Company common stock owned by the ESOP were allocated to plan participants.

On May 31, 2008, the Company filed a request to terminate the ESOP. Participants became fully vested in their accounts when the request was filed and will be entitled to take a distribution or rollover their account balances once a final determination is received from the Internal Revenue Service.

The Company also maintains a non-qualified deferred compensation plan for certain key employees that allow participants to defer a portion of base and incentive compensation. The Company also may make contributions and discretionary matching contributions to the plan. The deferrals and Company contributions are held in a rabbi trust for the participants. While the Company maintains ownership of the assets, the participants are able to direct the investment of the assets into several equity and fixed income mutual funds. Company common stock is not an investment option for the participants. The Company records the assets at their fair value in other assets on the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The liability to participants is recorded in other liabilities on the Consolidated Balance Sheets. Total assets and the corresponding liability in the nonqualified deferred compensation plan totaled $4.2 million and $6.6 million at December 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively.

14. Stock-Based Compensation

The Company has an Incentive Compensation Plan (the “Plan”) that allows for the granting of stock-based compensation awards. Under the Plan, directors, officers and employees selected by the Board of Directors will be eligible to receive awards, including incentive stock options, nonqualified stock options, stock appreciation rights, stock awards, and performance awards. The Company has only issued nonqualified stock options and restricted stock awards under the Plan. As of December 31, 2008, a total of 2,773,243 shares of common stock were authorized for use in the Plan and 563,223 shares were available for future grants.

101

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

During 2008, the Company recognized $2.2 million of stock based compensation which consisted of $1.4 million of expense related to restricted stock grants and $811,000 of expense related to stock options grants. In comparison, during 2007, the Company recognized $1.6 million of stock based compensation expense which consisted of $686,000 for restricted stock grants and $925,000 for stock options grants, while total stock based compensation in 2006 was $1.6 million which consisted of $671,000 for restricted stock grants and $906,000 for stock option grants.

Stock Options:

SFAS 123R requires companies to estimate the fair value of share-based payment awards on the date of grant using an option-pricing model. The value of the portion of the award that is ultimately expected to vest is recognized as compensation expense in the Company’s Consolidated Statements of Operations over the requisite service periods using a straight-line method. Since stock-based compensation expense recognized is based on awards ultimately expected to vest, the expense has been reduced for estimated forfeitures. Forfeitures are estimated at the time of grant and revised, if necessary, in subsequent periods if actual forfeitures differ from those estimates.

Generally, stock options are granted with an exercise price equal to the fair market value of the common stock on the date of grant. Since 2006, stock options granted vest over a four year period (vesting at 25% per year) and expire eight years following grant date. Stock options granted prior to 2006 vest over a five year period (vesting at 20% per year) and expire 10 years following the grant date. In either case, upon death, disability, retirement or change of control of the Company (as defined in the Plan) vesting may be accelerated to 100%.

During 2008, the Company granted options to purchase up to 150,000 shares of common stock to a new member of the Company’s Board of Directors at an exercise price of $20.00 per share, which was greater than the closing stock price of the Company’s common stock on the date of grant. This award was immediately vested and had a 10 year term. The entire $162,000 cost of the grant was recognized as compensation expense in 2008.

The following is a summary of stock option activity for the year ended December 31, 2008:

	Shares		Weighted- Average Exercise Price		Weighted- Average Remaining Contractual Term in Years	Aggregate Intrinsic Value ($000)
Outstanding at January 1, 2008	744,986		$	26.17
Granted	200,000			20.00
Exercised	(1,800	)		16.67
Forfeited	(86,452	)		32.02
Expired	(140,092	)		25.77
Outstanding at December 31, 2008	716,642			23.85	5.8	$	—
Exercisable at December 31, 2008	554,813			22.76	5.6		—

During 2008, the Company received $30,000 of cash from the exercise of stock option awards and recorded a $2,000 tax benefit from these exercises. Plan participants realized an intrinsic value of $4,000 from the exercise of these stock options during 2008. In comparison, Plan participants realized an intrinsic value of $416,000 and $2.2 million from the exercise of stock options during 2007 and 2006, respectively. As of December 31, 2008, the total compensation cost related to nonvested stock options that have not yet been recognized totaled $852,000 and the weighted average period which these costs are expected to be recognized over is approximately 2.1 years.

102

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Restricted Stock:

Under the Plan, the Company can grant restricted stock awards that vest upon completion of future service requirements or specified performance criteria. The fair value of these awards is equal to the market price of the common stock at the date of grant. The Company recognizes stock-based compensation expense for these awards over the vesting period, using the straight-line method, based upon the number of awards ultimately expected to vest. For grants prior to 2006, the Company recognized compensation cost for the restricted stock over the service period of each separately vesting portion of the award, in effect treating each vesting portion as a separate award. Generally, restricted stock awards based upon completion of future service requirements vest 50% at the end of year three, 75% at the end of year four and 100% at the end of year five or upon death, disability, retirement or change of control (as defined in the Plan) of the Company. However, the Company granted in 2008 a restricted stock award to an executive that vested 25% per year over a four year term. If a participant terminates employment prior to the end of the continuous service period, the unearned portion of the stock award is forfeited. The Company may also issue awards that vest upon satisfaction of specified performance criteria. For these types of awards, the final measure of compensation cost is based upon the number of shares that ultimately vest considering the performance criteria.

The following table provides information regarding nonvested restricted stock:

Nonvested Restricted Stock	Shares		Weighted- Average Grant- Date Fair Value
Nonvested at January 1, 2008	115,979		$	33.37
Granted	619,410			14.18
Vested	(21,939	)		32.93
Forfeited	(57,269	)		22.57
Nonvested at December 31, 2008	656,181			16.21

During 2008, the Company reduced surplus by $169,000 for the tax effect associated with vesting of restricted stock awards because the market price of the Company’s common stock at the vesting dates was less than the grant date market price of the common stock. The fair value of restricted stock awards that vested during 2008 was $722,000, compared to $720,000 and $670,000 during the years ended December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively. As of December 31, 2008, the total compensation cost related to nonvested restricted stock that has not yet been recognized totaled $8.6 million, and the weighted average period during which these costs are expected to be recognized over is approximately 4.0 years.

Valuation Information:

The Company uses the modified Black-Scholes option-pricing model (“Black-Scholes model”) for determining the fair value of stock options issued to employees and directors. The determination of the fair value of share-based payment awards using the Black-Scholes model is impacted by the Company’s stock price on the date of grant as well as several assumptions used as inputs into the model. The assumptions include the risk-free interest rate at grant date, expected stock price volatility, expected dividend payout, and expected option life.

The risk-free interest rate assumption is based upon observed interest rates for the expected term of the Company’s stock options. The expected volatility input into the model takes into account the historical volatility of the Company’s common stock over the period that it has been publicly traded and the historical volatility over the expected term of the option of a peer group. The expected dividend yield assumption is based upon the

103

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Company’s historical dividend payout determined at the date of grant. In addition, the Company used the methodology used in the Securities and Exchange Commission’s Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 107 in determining the expected life of the awards. This methodology takes into account the vesting periods and the contractual term of the award.

The following are the assumptions used to determine the weighted average fair value of stock option awards, using the Black-Scholes model, for each of the periods indicated:

	For the Years Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006
Grant date fair value per share	$	2.21		$	9.25		$	11.76
Significant assumptions:
Risk-free interest rate at grant date		2.73	%		4.68	%		4.40	%
Expected stock price volatility		39.00	%		29.00	%		27.50	%
Expected dividend payout		0.50	%		1.32	%		0.64	%
Expected option life, in years		6.94			5.25			5.25

15. Stockholders’ Equity

In September 2008, the Company increased its authorized capital stock to 55 million shares, consisting of 45 million shares of common stock, par value $0.01 per share, and 10 million shares of preferred shares, par value $0.01 per share. In September 2008, the Company designated and issued 2.4 million preferred shares as 8% Non-Cumulative Convertible Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series A (“Series A Preferred”), and in November 2008, the Company designated and issued 104,823 shares of preferred shares as Fixed Rate Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series B (“Series B Preferred”). Prior to September 2008, the authorized capital stock of the Company was 23 million shares, of which 18 million shares were common stock, par value $0.01 per share, and 5 million shares were preferred shares, par value $0.01 per share.

Common Stock:

The holders of outstanding shares of common stock are entitled to receive dividends out of assets legally available therefrom at such times and in such amounts as the Company’s Board of Directors may determine. The Series B Preferred requires the consent of the U.S. Treasury Department to pay any dividend on the Company’s common stock prior to November 21, 2011, unless the Series B preferred has been redeemed or the Treasury has transferred all of the Series B Preferred to third parties. In addition, under the terms of the junior subordinated debentures and the Series A Preferred, any deferral of the payment of interest or dividends results in a defined restriction in the payment of common dividends. The shares of common stock are neither redeemable nor convertible, and the holders thereof have no preemptive or subscription rights to purchase any securities of the Company. Upon liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Company, the holders of common stock are entitled to receive, pro rata, the assets of the Company which are legally available for distribution, after payment of all debts and other liabilities and subject to the prior rights of any holders of preferred stock then outstanding. Each outstanding share of common stock is entitled to one vote on all matters submitted to a vote of stockholders.

Preferred stock:

The Company’s Third Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation authorizes its Board of Directors to issue preferred stock in classes or series and to establish the designations, preferences, qualifications, limitations or restrictions of any class or series with respect to the rate and nature of dividends, the price and

104

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

terms and conditions on which shares may be redeemed, the terms and conditions for conversion or exchange into any other class or series of the stock, voting rights and other terms.

Series A Preferred: In connection with a private placement in September 2008, the Company issued a total of 2.4 million shares of 8% Non-Cumulative Convertible Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series A, with a purchase price and liquidation preference of $25.00 per share. The Series A Preferred pays non-cumulative dividends at an annual rate of 8% of the liquidation preference beginning in January 2009 and each share of Series A Preferred can be converted in to 2.5 shares of the Company’s common stock at a conversion price of $10.00 per common share. The Series A Preferred is convertible into an aggregate of 6.0 million shares of the Company’s common stock at the option of the preferred stockholders at any time, and will be convertible at the Company’s option on or after September 29, 2013. The Series A Preferred holders are entitled to vote on all matters voted on by the holders of the common stock on an as-converted basis. The Company will be restricted from declaring and paying dividends on its common stock if the full quarterly dividends on the Series A Preferred have not been paid or declared. The Series A Preferred will cease to pay dividends after September 29, 2010, if the volume weighted average price of the Company’s common stock on the Nasdaq Global Select Market exceeds 200% of the then applicable conversion price for at least 20 trading days in any consecutive 30-day period, or after September 29, 2011, if the volume weighted average price of the Company’s common stock on the Nasdaq Global Select Market exceeds 130% of the then-applicable conversion price for at least 20 trading days in any consecutive 30-day period.

In the event of any voluntary or involuntary liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the affairs of the Company, each holder of the Series A Preferred will be entitled, before any distributions or payments of the Company’s assets may be made to or set aside for the common stock shareholder and subject to the rights of the Company’s creditors, to receive a liquidation distribution in an amount equal to $25.00 per share, plus any accrued but unpaid dividends. A merger, consolidation, or sale of all or substantially all of the Company’s assets is considered a liquidation.

In connection with the Series A Preferred offering, the Company recorded a $16.7 million accounting adjustment to reflect the difference between the $12.78 per share market value of the Company’s common stock on September 4, 2008 (the date of the Series A Preferred stock purchase agreement), and the conversion price of $10.00 per share. When it was issued, the Series A Preferred was recorded net of this accounting adjustment, which was reported as a one-time, implied non-cash dividend to the holders of the Series A Preferred in the third quarter of 2008. There was no impact on stockholders’ equity as a result of this adjustment, however the implied non-cash dividend was considered in the determination of the net loss available to common stockholders and loss per common share. In December 2008, the Company declared the first quarterly dividend, payable on January 15, 2009, to Series A Preferred holders, in the aggregate amount of $1.4 million.

Series B Preferred: On November 21, 2008, as part of the United States Department of the Treasury’s (“Treasury”) TARP Capital Purchase Program, the Company entered into a Letter Agreement and Securities Purchase Agreement (“Purchase Agreement”) with the Treasury, pursuant to which the Company sold, for an aggregate purchase price of $104.8 million, 104,823 shares of the Company’s Fixed Rate Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series B, with a purchase price and liquidation preference of $1,000 per share, and warrants to purchase 1,462,647 shares of the Company’s common stock.

The total proceeds received of $104.8 million were allocated to the Series B Preferred and the warrants based upon their relative fair values. The fair value allocated to the Series B Preferred and warrants upon issuance was $96.6 million and $8.2 million, respectively. The Series B Preferred is recorded on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets at the aggregate liquidation amount less the discount created by the allocation of a portion of the proceeds to the warrants. At December 31, 2008, the recorded balance of the Series B Preferred

105

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

was $97.3 million, which is equal to the liquidation amount, net of unamortized discount of $8.1 million plus accumulated but undeclared dividends of $582,000. The discount on the Series B Preferred is being amortized as a dividend yield adjustment over five years, the period that the Company expects the Series B Preferred to remain outstanding. The $8.2 million of proceeds allocated to the warrants was credited to Surplus resulting in an increase in stockholders’ equity.

The Series B Preferred qualifies as Tier 1 capital for regulatory capital purposes and pays cumulative compounding dividends at a rate of 5% per year for the first five years, and 9% per year thereafter. The Company may not redeem the Series B Preferred during the first three years except with proceeds from the sale of qualifying equity securities of the Company (a “Qualified Equity Offering”). After three years, the Company may redeem shares of the Series B Preferred for the per share liquidation amount of $1,000 per share, plus any accrued and unpaid dividends.

Prior to the third anniversary of the Treasury’s purchase of the Series B Preferred, unless the Series B Preferred has been redeemed or the Treasury has transferred all of the Series B Preferred to third parties, the consent of the Treasury will be required for the Company to pay any dividend on its Common Stock or repurchase its Common Stock or other equity or capital securities, other than in connection with benefit plans consistent with past practice and certain other circumstances specified in the Series B Preferred purchase agreement. The Series B Preferred will be non-voting except for the class voting rights on matters that would adversely affect the rights of the holders of the Series B Preferred. The Series B Preferred is not subject to any contractual restrictions on transfer.

In the event of any voluntary or involuntary liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the affairs of the Company, each holder of Series B Preferred will be entitled to receive the liquidation amount per share and the amount of any accrued and unpaid dividends, whether or not declared to the date of payment, out of the Company’s assets or proceeds available for distribution to stockholders of the Company, subject to the rights of any creditors and before any distribution of such assets or proceeds is made to or set aside for the Company’s common stock shareholders. The Series B Preferred ranks equally with the Series A Preferred in the event of a liquidation.

Warrants to purchase common stock:

At December 31, 2008, an aggregate of 2,862,647 warrants were issued and outstanding to purchase share of the Company’s common stock. The warrants were issued in three different transactions as follows:

	Warrants issued	Warrants outstanding at Dec. 31, 2008	Exercise Price		Date Exercisable	Expiration Date
Warrants:
FIC warrants	500,000	500,000	$	20.00	Sept. 29, 2008	Sept. 29, 2018
Detachable warrants issued with subordinated notes	900,000	900,000	$	10.00	Mar. 29, 2009	Sept. 29, 2013
Series B Preferred warrants	1,462,647	1,462,647	$	10.75	Nov. 21, 2008	Nov. 21, 2018
Total	2,862,647	2,862,647

On September 29, 2008, the Company entered into a Management Services Agreement (“MSA”) with Financial Investments Corporation (“FIC”). The term of the MSA is nine months and expires in June 2009. In connection with the MSA, in exchange for FIC providing the Company with certain management, advisory and

106

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

consulting services, the Company paid FIC a cash fee of $750,000 and issued FIC warrants to purchase up to 500,000 shares of the Company’s common stock at an exercise price of $20.00 per share. The FIC warrants are not transferable or assignable after their initial issuance, and are exercisable anytime up to the September 29, 2018 expiration date. A portion of the total cost of the MSA, which included the cash payment and the fair value of the FIC warrants, was allocated to the capital transaction and accounted for as other issuance costs. The remaining costs will be recognized as an operating expense for services to be provided during the term of the MSA. During 2008, $250,000 was recognized as operating expense related to the MSA and $500,000 will be recognized as operating expense in 2009. In accordance with the terms of MSA, two executives of FIC currently serve on the Company’s Board of Directors. In addition, the Company’s Certificate of Incorporation allowed for the creation of a three member Executive Committee, the chairman of which is an executive at FIC.

In connection with the issuance of $60 million of subordinated notes on September 29, 2008, the Company issued detachable warrants to purchase an aggregate amount of 900,000 shares of the Company’s common stock. The exercise price of the warrants is $10.00 and the warrants are exercisable on or after March 29, 2009 and the warrants expire on September 29, 2013. The proceeds from the subordinated notes offering were allocated to the subordinated notes and the warrants based upon their relative fair values. The fair value of the warrants of $4.7 million was credited to surplus resulting in an increase in stockholders’ equity.

In connection with the Series B Preferred offering, the Company issued to the Treasury a warrant to purchase 1,462,647 shares of the Company’s common stock. This warrant has a 10-year term and is immediately exercisable upon its issuance, with an exercise price, subject to anti-dilution adjustments, equal to $10.75 per share of the Common Stock. The warrant is not subject to any contractual restrictions on transfer, provided that the Treasury may only transfer a portion or portions of the warrant with respect to, or exercise the warrant for, more than one-half of the initial warrant shares prior to the earlier of the date on which the Company has received aggregate gross proceeds of at least $104.8 million, from one or more Qualified Equity Offerings, and December 31, 2009. If the Company completes one or more Qualified Equity Offerings on or prior to December 31, 2009 that result in the Company receiving aggregate gross proceeds equal to at least $104.8 million, then the number of warrant shares will be reduced to 50% of the original number of warrant shares. The Treasury has agreed not to exercise voting power with respect to any shares of common stock issued upon exercise of the warrant.

16. Regulatory Disclosures:

The Company and the Bank are subject to various capital requirements administered by the federal banking agencies. Failure to meet minimum capital requirements can initiate certain mandatory and possibly additional discretionary actions by regulators, which, if undertaken, could have a direct material effect on the Company’s financial statements. Under capital adequacy guidelines and the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action, the Company and the Bank must meet specific capital guidelines that involve quantitative measures of the entity’s assets, liabilities, and certain off-balance sheet items as calculated under regulatory accounting practices. The Bank’s and Company’s capital amounts and classification are also subject to qualitative judgments by the regulators about components, risk weightings, and other factors.

Quantitative measures established by regulation to ensure capital adequacy require the Company and the Bank to maintain minimum amounts and ratios (set forth in the table below) of total and Tier I capital (as defined in the regulations) to risk-weighted assets (as defined), and of Tier I capital (as defined) to average assets (as defined). Based on these quantitative measures, as of December 31, 2008 and 2007, the Company and the Bank were categorized as “well-capitalized”.

107

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

As of December 31, 2008 and 2007, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation categorized the Bank as “well-capitalized” under the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action. To be categorized “well-capitalized” the Bank must maintain minimum total risk-based, Tier I risk-based, and Tier I leverage ratios as set forth in the table. At December 31, 2008, there were no conditions or events since that notification that management believes have changed the institution’s category.

The Company’s and the Bank’s actual and required capital amounts and ratios as of December 31, 2008 and 2007 are presented in the following table:

	Actual				For Capital Adequacy Purposes			To Be Well Capitalized Under Prompt Corrective Action Provisions
	Amount		Ratio		Amount	Ratio		Amount	Ratio
	(dollars in thousands)
As of December 31, 2008:
Total Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets):
Taylor Capital Group, Inc. – Consolidated	$	474,287	13.02	%	>$291,497	>8.00	%	>$364,371	>10.00	%
Cole Taylor Bank		404,480	11.12		>290,864	>8.00		>363,580	>10.00
Tier I Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets):
Taylor Capital Group, Inc. – Consolidated	$	372,377	10.22	%	>$145,748	>4.00	%	>$218,622	>6.00	%
Cole Taylor Bank		302,668	8.32		>145,432	>4.00		>218,148	>6.00
Leverage (to Average Assets):
Taylor Capital Group, Inc. – Consolidated	$	372,377	8.73	%	>$170,682	>4.00	%	>$213,352	>5.00	%
Cole Taylor Bank		302,668	7.11		>170,285	>4.00		>212,857	>5.00
As of December 31, 2007:
Total Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets):
Taylor Capital Group, Inc. – Consolidated	$	368,188	12.74	%	>$231,175	>8.00	%	>$288,968	>10.00	%
Cole Taylor Bank		342,607	11.88		>230,677	>8.00		>288,346	>10.00
Tier I Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets):
Taylor Capital Group, Inc. – Consolidated	$	330,451	11.44	%	>$115,587	>4.00	%	>$173,381	>6.00	%
Cole Taylor Bank		306,333	10.62		>115,339	>4.00		>173,008	>6.00
Leverage (to Average Assets):
Taylor Capital Group, Inc. – Consolidated	$	330,451	9.40	%	>$140,567	>4.00	%	>$175,709	>5.00	%
Cole Taylor Bank		306,333	8.74		>140,232	>4.00		>175,290	>5.00

The Bank is also subject to dividend restrictions set forth by regulatory authorities. Under such restrictions, the Bank may not, without prior approval of regulatory authorities, declare dividends in excess of the sum of the current year’s earnings (as defined) plus the retained earnings (as defined) from the prior two years. Because of the recent net losses, as of December 31, 2008, the Bank could not declare and pay dividends to the Company without the approval of regulatory authorities. Payment of any such dividends would also be subject to the Bank remaining in compliance with all applicable capital ratios.

108

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

17. Commitments and Financial Instruments with Off-Balance Sheet Risks

Commitments:

The Company is obligated in accordance with the terms of various long-term non-cancelable operating leases for certain premises (land and building) and office space and equipment, including the Company’s principal offices. The terms of the leases generally require periodic adjustment of the minimum lease payments based on an increase in the consumer price index. In addition, the Company is obligated to pay the real estate taxes assessed on the properties and certain maintenance costs. Certain of the leases contain renewal options for periods of up to five years. Total rental expense for the Company in connection with these leases for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006 was approximately $4.2 million, $4.9 million, and $4.7 million, respectively. Estimated future minimum rental commitments under all operating leases as of December 31, 2008 are as follows:

Year	Amount
	(in thousands)
2009	$	3,870
2010		3,890
2011		3,963
2012		4,003
2013		4,104
Thereafter		18,009
Total	$	37,839

Financial Instruments with Off-Balance Sheet Risks:

At times, the Company is party to various financial instruments with off-balance sheet risks. The Company uses these financial instruments in the normal course of business to meet the financing needs of customers. These financial instruments include commitments to extend credit and financial guarantees, such as financial and performance standby letters of credit. When viewed in terms of the maximum exposure, those instruments may involve, to varying degrees, elements of credit and interest rate risk in excess of the amount recognized in the Consolidated Balance Sheet. Credit risk is the possibility that a counterparty to a financial instrument will be unable to perform its contractual obligations. Interest rate risk is the possibility that, due to changes in economic conditions, the Company’s net interest income will be adversely affected.

The Company mitigates its exposure to credit risk through its internal controls over the extension of credit. These controls include the process of credit approval and review, the establishment of credit limits, and, when deemed necessary, securing collateral. Collateral held varies but may include deposits held in financial institutions; U.S. Treasury securities; other marketable securities; income-producing commercial or multi-family rental properties, vacant land or land under development; accounts receivable; inventories; and property, plant and equipment. The Company manages its exposure to interest rate risk generally by setting variable rates of interest on extensions of credit and administered rates on interest bearing non-maturity deposits and, on a limited basis, by using derivative financial instruments to offset existing interest rate risk of its assets and liabilities.

The following is a summary of the contractual or notional amount of each significant class of financial instrument with off-balance sheet credit risk outstanding. The Company’s maximum exposure to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by the counterparty to the financial instrument for commitments to extend credit and financial guarantees is represented by the contractual notional amount of these instruments.

109

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

At December 31, 2008 and 2007, the contractual amounts were as follows:

	2008		2007
	(in thousands)
Financial instruments wherein contract amounts represent credit risk:
Commitments to extend credit	$	928,426	$	962,418
Financial guarantees:
Financial standby letters of credit		63,244		52,895
Performance standby letters of credit		24,047		44,090

Commitments to extend credit are agreements to lend to a customer as long as there is no violation of any condition established in the contract. Commitments generally have fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses and may require payment of a fee. Many customers do not utilize the total approved commitments amounts. Historically, available commitment amounts are not always drawn. Therefore, the total commitment amounts do not usually represent future cash requirements.

The Company issues financial guarantees in the form of financial and performance standby letters of credit to meet the needs of customers. Financial standby letters of credit are conditional commitments issued by the Company to guarantee the payment of a specified financial obligation of a customer to a third party. Performance standby letters of credit are conditional commitments issued by the Company to make a payment to a specified third party in the event a customer fails to perform under a non-financial contractual obligation. The terms of these financial guarantees primarily range from less than one year to three years. A contingent liability is recognized if it is probable that a liability has been incurred by the Company under a standby letter of credit. The credit risk involved in issuing these letters of credit is essentially the same as that involved in extending loan facilities to customers. Management expects most of the Company’s letters of credit to expire undrawn. Management expects no significant loss from its obligation under these financial guarantees to the extent not already recognized as a liability on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. At December 31, 2008, a reserve of $2.9 million for unfunded commitments was established because it was probable that a liability has been incurred by the Company under standby letters of credit that have not yet been funded. The Company had outstanding $7.2 million of letters of credit related to nonaccrual and impaired loans as of December 31, 2008.

18. Derivative Financial Instruments

The Company uses derivative financial instruments, including interest rate exchange contracts (“swaps”) and interest rate floor and collar agreements, to assist in interest rate risk management and to accommodate the needs of its customers. An interest rate swap is an agreement in which two parties agree to exchange, at specified intervals, interest payment streams calculated on an agreed-upon notional principal amount with at least one stream based on a specified floating-rate index. Under an interest rate floor agreement, in the event a specified floating-rate index decreases below a pre-determined interest rate floor level, the Company will receive an amount, from the counterparty, equal to the difference between the floor level and the current floating-rate index computed based upon the notional amount. In an interest rate collar agreement, a pre-determined floor and ceiling interest rate levels are set with the counterparty. If the specified floating-rate index decreases below the interest rate floor level, the Company will receive an amount equal to the difference between the floor level and the current floating-rate index, computed based upon the notional amount. If the specified floating-rate index increases above the interest rate ceiling level, the Company will pay an amount equal to the difference between the current floating-rate index and the ceiling level, computed based upon the notional amount. For all types of these agreements, the notional amount does not represent the direct credit exposure. The Company is exposed to credit-related losses in the event of non-performance by the counterparty on the interest rate exchange or floor or collar payment, but does not anticipate that any counterparty will fail to meet its payment obligation.

110

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The following table describes the derivative instruments outstanding at both December 31, 2008 and 2007 (dollars in thousands):

	Notional Amount				Strike Rates	Scheduled Maturity	Fair Value
Product	Dec. 31, 2008		Dec. 31, 2007				Dec. 31, 2008			Dec. 31, 2007
Derivative instruments designated as cash flow hedges:
Prime Floor	$	—	$	100,000	6.25%	7/12/2010	$	—		$	968
Subtotal		—		100,000
Non-hedging derivative instruments:
Prime Interest Rate Swap – receive fixed/pay variable		100,000		—	Receive 6.64% Pay 3.25%	7/1/2011	$	6,651			—
Prime Floor		—		100,000	5.50%	6/30/2010		—			467
Customer Interest Rate Swap – pay fixed/receive variable		126,971		5,658	Pay 5.14% Receive 2.05%	Wtd avg. 4.2 years		(11,940	)		(168	)
Customer Interest Rate Swap –receive fixed/pay variable		126,971		5,658	Receive 5.14% Pay 2.05%	Wtd avg. 4.2 years		11,927			168
Subtotal		353,942		111,316
Total	$	353,942	$	211,316

In order to accommodate customer borrowing needs, the Company enters into interest rate swap agreements with customers. At the same time, in order to offset the exposure and manage interest rate risk, the Company enters into an interest rate swap with a different counterparty with offsetting terms. These derivative instruments are not designated as accounting hedges and changes in fair value of these instruments, as well as any net cash settlements, are recognized in noninterest income as other derivative income or expense. As of December 31, 2008 and 2007, the Company had notional amounts of $127.0 million and $5.7 million, respectively, of interest rate swaps with customers in which the Company has agreed to receive a fixed interest rate and pay a variable interest rate. In addition, as of December 31, 2008 and 2007, the Company has offsetting interest rate swaps with other counterparties with a notional amount of $127.0 million and $5.7 million, respectively, in which the Company has agreed to receive a variable interest rate and pay a fixed interest rate.

The Company also uses derivative instruments, such as interest rate swaps, floors and collars, in the management of its own interest rate risks. During the second quarter of 2008, the Company entered into a $100.0 million notional amount interest rate swap agreement that was designated as a cash flow hedge against interest receipts from prime-base loans. Under this agreement, the Company received payments at a fixed rate of 6.64%, computed on the notional amount, and paid a variable rate based upon the prime lending rate, computed on the notional amount. The fair value of cash flow hedging derivative instruments was recorded as an asset or liability with the effective portion of the corresponding unrealized gain or loss recorded in other comprehensive income in stockholders’ equity, net of tax. This cash flow hedge had been highly effective during 2008, however, the Company elected to remove the hedge designation on this derivative in December 2008 when the Company determined that this hedge would no longer be considered highly effective in the future. The unrealized gain on the swap at the date of de-designation was $6.4 million. The amount of this gain that had accumulated in other comprehensive income, net of the related deferred tax liability, will be amortized over what would have been the remaining term of the hedge. The amount of the unrealized gain recorded in accumulated other comprehensive income in stockholders equity, net of tax, was $3.8 million at December 31, 2008. During 2008, $105,000 of the deferred gain was reclassified into loan interest income and $2.5 million will be reclassified during 2009. From the date of de-designation to December 31, 2008, the change in fair value, along with net settlements attributed to

111

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

this period, was recorded in other derivative income in non-interest income and totaled $394,000. This derivative was terminated in January 2009 and the Company received a cash payment $6.6 million, which represented the fair value of the swap at the date of termination.

During March 2008, the Company terminated two interest rate floor agreements with a notional amount of $200.0 million. One of the floor agreements, with a notional amount of $100.0 million, was not designated as an accounting hedge. Other derivative income, reported in noninterest income, included $843,000 of income from changes in the fair value from this non-designated floor agreement during 2008 prior to termination. This floor agreement had been designated as a cash flow hedge, but the Company discontinued hedge accounting in May 2006. Upon de-designation, the balance in accumulated other comprehensive income, which was comprised of the change in fair value since inception less amortization of the original floor cost, net of tax, is being amortized to loan interest income over the remaining four year term of the floor. As of December 31, 2008, the amount included in accumulated other comprehensive income was $202,000, net of tax. During 2008 and 2007, $157,000 and $76,000, respectively reclassified as a reduction in loan interest income and $201,000 is expected to be reclassified in 2009. The Company did not receive any payments on this floor agreement in 2008 or 2007.

The second floor agreement, with a notional amount of $100.0 million, was designated as a cash flow hedge. Upon termination of this floor agreement, the $1.1 million of unrealized gain that had been accumulated in other comprehensive income, which consisted of the increase in fair value since inception less the cumulative amortization of the floor premium, will be amortized over what would have been the remaining life of the floor agreement. This floor was scheduled to mature in July 2010. The amount of the deferred gain included in accumulated other comprehensive income at December 31, 2008, was $572,000, net of tax. During 2008, $722,000 of deferred gains was amortized and increased loan interest income and $817,000 of the deferred gain will be amortized in 2009. The Company did not receive any payments on this floor agreement in 2008 or 2007

During 2006, the Company entered into two interest rate collars with a total notional amount of $300 million that were designated as cash flow hedges against interest receipts from Prime-based loans. The collars were obtained at no cost. During 2007, the Company received $69,000 of settlements under the collar agreements when the floating rate decreased below the collar floor rate. These settlements were recorded as additions to loan interest income. The Company did not make any payments under the collars in 2007. In December 2007, the Company terminated these collars with the counterparty. The fair value of the collars at termination was $7.5 million. Because the forecasted hedged transactions were probable of occurring, the gain realized upon termination was deferred and is amortized as an increase of loan interest income over what would have been the remaining life of the derivatives, which were scheduled to mature in May 2009 and May 2010. The amount of the deferred gain included in accumulated other comprehensive income at December 31, 2008 and 2007 was $2.4 million and $2.5 million, respectively, net of tax. During 2008 and 2007, $3.5 million and $58,000, respectively, of deferred gains were amortized and increased loan interest income and $3.3 million of the deferred gain will be amortized in 2009.

The Company has also used interest rate swaps (“CD swaps”) to hedge the interest rate risk inherent in certain of its brokered certificates of deposits (“brokered CDs”). The CD swaps were used to convert the fixed rate paid on the brokered CDs to a variable rate based upon 3-month LIBOR. In May 2006, the Company terminated all of the $330.0 million notional amount of CD swaps that had been used as fair value hedges against brokered CDs. Upon termination, the associated cumulative fair value adjustment to the hedged brokered CDs of $3.7 million is being amortized into deposit interest expense over the remaining life of the CDs using an effective yield method. During 2008 and 2007, $343,000 and $932,000, respectively, of this fair value adjustment was amortized and recognized as deposit interest expense, and $73,000 of this adjustment is expected to be amortized

112

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

in 2009. In addition, noninterest expense during 2008 included the write-off of $1.3 million of the unamortized fair value adjustments when the Company exercised its option to call certain of the brokered CDs before their maturity date.

19. Fair Value of Financial Instruments

On January 1, 2008, the Company adopted SFAS 157 and SFAS 159. SFAS 157 defines fair value, establishes a framework for measuring fair value in generally accepted accounting principles and expands disclosure related to the use of fair value measures in financial statements. SFAS 157 establishes a fair value hierarchy from observable market data as the highest level to fair value based on an entity’s own fair value assumptions as the lowest level. In February 2008, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Financial Accounting Standards Board Staff Position No. 157-2, “Effective Date of FASB Statement No. 157,” (“FSP 157-2”). FSP 157-2 delays the effective date of SFAS 157 for all nonfinancial assets and nonfinancial liabilities, except those that are recognized or disclosed at fair value on a recurring basis (at least annually), to fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2008. In accordance with FSP 157-2, the Company has delayed application of SFAS 157 for non-financial assets, such as the Company’s other real estate owned assets, and non-financial liabilities. The impact of the adoption of SFAS 157 was not material.

SFAS 159 provides companies with an option to report selected financial assets and liabilities at fair value. The objective of SFAS 159 is to improve financial reporting by providing entities with the opportunity to mitigate volatility in reported earnings caused by measuring related assets and liabilities differently without having to apply complex hedge accounting. SFAS 159 was effective for the Company on January 1, 2008, however, the Company did not elect the fair value option for any financial assets or liabilities as of that date, nor for any asset acquired or liability incurred subsequent to January 1, 2008.

Fair Value Measurement

In accordance with SFAS 157, the Company groups financial assets and financial liabilities measured at fair value in three levels, based on the markets in which the assets and liabilities are traded and the reliability of the assumptions used to determine fair value. These levels are:

Level 1 – Quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in active markets that the entity has the ability to access as of the measurement date.

Level 2 – Significant other observable inputs other than Level 1 prices, such as quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities, quoted prices in markets that are not active, and other inputs that are observable or can be corroborated by observable market data.

Level 3 – Significant unobservable inputs that reflect an entity’s own assumptions about the assumptions that market participants would use in pricing an asset or liability.

The Company used the following methods and significant assumptions to estimate fair values:

Available-for-sale investment securities: For these securities, the Company obtains fair value measurements from an independent pricing service. The fair value measurements consider observable data that may include dealer quotes, market spreads, cash flows, the U.S. Treasury yield curve, live trading levels, trade execution data, market consensus prepayment speeds, credit information and the bond’s terms and conditions, among other things. The Company has determined that these valuations are classified in Level 2 of the fair value hierarchy.

Assets held in employee deferred compensation plans: Assets held in employee deferred compensation plans are recorded at fair value and included in “other assets” on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. The

113

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

assets associated with these plans are invested in mutual funds and classified as Level 1 as the fair value measurement is based upon available quoted prices. The Company also records a liability included in accrued interest, taxes and other liabilities on the consolidated balance sheets for the amount due to employees related to these plans.

Derivatives: The Company has determined that its derivative valuations in their entirety are classified in Level 2 of the fair value hierarchy. The valuation of these instruments is determined using widely accepted valuation techniques, including discounted cash flow analysis on the expected cash flows of each derivative. This analysis reflects the contractual terms of the derivatives, including the period to maturity, and uses observable market-based inputs, including interest rate curves and implied volatilities. To comply with the provisions of SFAS No. 157, the Company incorporates credit valuation adjustments to appropriately reflect both its own nonperformance risk and the respective counterparty’s nonperformance risk in the fair value measurements. In adjusting the fair value of its derivative contracts for the effect of nonperformance risk, the Company has considered the impact of netting and any applicable credit enhancements, such as collateral postings, thresholds, mutual puts and guarantees.

Loans: The Company does not record loans at their fair value on a recurring basis. However, the Company evaluates certain loans for impairment when it is probable the payment of interest and principal will not be made in accordance with the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Once a loan has been determined to be impaired, it is measured to establish the amount of the impairment, if any, based on the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, except that collateral-dependent loans may be measured for impairment based on the fair value of the collateral, less cost to sell. If the measure of the impaired loan is less than the recorded investment in the loan, a valuation allowance is recognized. At December 31, 2008, a portion of the Company’s total impaired loans were evaluated based on the fair value of the collateral. In accordance with SFAS 157, only impaired loans for which an allowance for loan loss has been established based on the fair value of collateral require classification in the fair value hierarchy. As a result, a portion, but not all, of the Company’s impaired loans are classified in the fair value hierarchy. When the fair value of the collateral is based on an observable market price or an estimate of fair value from an independent third-party real estate professional, the Company classifies the impaired loan as nonrecurring Level 2 in the fair value hierarchy.

Assets and Liabilities Measured on a Recurring Basis

Assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis are summarized below.

	Total Fair Value		Quoted Prices in Active Markets (Level 1)		Significant Other Observable Inputs (Level 2)		Significant Unobservable Inputs (Level 3)
	(in thousands)
Assets:
Available for sale securities	$	1,094,569	$	—	$	1,094,569	$	—
Assets held in employee deferred compensation plans		4,161		4,161		—		—
Derivative instruments		18,578		—		18,578		—
Liabilities:
Derivative instruments		11,940		—		11,940		—

Assets Measured on a Nonrecurring Basis

Assets measured at fair value on a nonrecurring basis are summarized below. The Company may be required, from time to time, to measure certain other financial assets at fair value on a nonrecurring basis. These

114

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

assets generally consist of loans considered impaired that may require periodic adjustment to the lower of cost or fair value.

	Total Fair Value		Quoted Prices in Active Markets (Level 1)		Significant Other Observable Inputs (Level 2)		Significant Unobservable Inputs (Level 3)
	(in thousands)
Assets:
Loans	$	120,973	$	—	$	75,094	$	45,879

Fair Value of Financial Instruments

SFAS No. 107, “Disclosures about Fair Value of Financial Instruments”, requires disclosure of the estimated fair value of financial instruments. A portion of the Company’s assets and liabilities are considered financial instruments as defined in SFAS No. 107. Many of the Company’s financial instruments, however, lack an available, or readily determinable, trading market as characterized by a willing buyer and willing seller engaging in an exchange transaction. The Company can use significant estimations and present value calculations for the purposes of estimating fair values. Accordingly, fair values are based on various factors relative to current economic conditions, risk characteristics, and other factors. The assumptions and estimates used in the fair value determination process are subjective in nature and involve uncertainties and significant judgment and, therefore, fair values cannot be determined with precision. Changes in assumptions could significantly affect these estimated values.

The methods and assumptions used to determine fair values for each significant class of financial instruments are presented below:

Cash and Cash Equivalents:

The carrying amount of cash, due from banks, interest-bearing deposits with banks or other financial institutions, federal funds sold, and securities purchased under agreement to resell with original maturities less than 90 days approximate fair value since their maturities are short-term.

Investment Securities:

The fair value measurements of investment securities consider observable data that may include dealer quotes, market spreads, cash flows, the U.S. Treasury yield curve, live trading levels, trade execution data, market consensus prepayment speeds, credit information and the bond’s terms and conditions, among other things.

Loans:

The fair values of loans have been estimated by the present value of future cash flows, using current rates at which similar loans would be made to borrowers with the same remaining maturities, less a valuation adjustment for general portfolio risks. However, certain loans are accounted for at fair value when it is probable the payment of interest and principal will not be made in accordance with the contractual terms and impairment exists. In these cases, the fair value is determined based on the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, except that collateral-dependent loans may be measured for impairment based on the fair value of the collateral, less cost to sell.

115

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Investment in FHLB and Federal Reserve Bank Stock:

The fair value of these investments in FHLB and Federal Reserve Bank Stock equals its book value as these stocks can only be sold back to the FHLB, Federal Reserve Bank, or other member banks at their par value per share.

Accrued Interest Receivable:

The carrying amount of accrued interest receivable approximates fair value since its maturity is short-term.

Derivative Financial Instruments:

The carrying amount and fair value of existing derivative financial instruments are based upon independent valuation models, which use widely accepted valuation techniques, including discounted cash flow analysis on the expected cash flows of each derivative. This analysis reflects the contractual terms of the derivatives, including the period to maturity, and uses observable market-based inputs, including interest rate curves and implied volatilities. The Company incorporates credit valuation adjustments to appropriately reflect both its own nonperformance risk and the respective counterparty’s nonperformance risk in the fair value measurements. In adjusting the fair value of its derivative contracts for the effect of nonperformance risk, the Company has considered the impact of netting and any applicable credit enhancements, such as collateral postings, thresholds, mutual puts and guarantees. On the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets, instruments that have a positive fair value are included in other assets and those instruments that have a negative fair value are included in accrued interest, taxes, and other liabilities.

Other Assets:

Financial instruments in other assets consist of assets in the Company’s nonqualified deferred compensation plan. The carrying value of these assets approximates their fair value and are based upon quoted market prices.

Deposit Liabilities:

Deposit liabilities with stated maturities have been valued at the present value of future cash flows using rates which approximate current market rates for similar instruments; unless this calculation results in a present value which is less than the book value of the reflected deposit, in which case the book value would be utilized as an estimate of fair value. Fair values of deposits without stated maturities equal the respective amounts due on demand.

Other Borrowings:

The carrying amount of overnight securities sold under agreements to repurchase, federal funds purchased, and the U.S. Treasury tax and loan note option, approximates fair value, as the maturities of these borrowings are short-term. Securities sold under agreements to repurchase with original maturies over one year have been valued at the present values of future cash flows using rates which approximate current market rates for instruments of like maturities.

Notes Payable and FHLB Advances:

Notes payable and FHLB advances have been valued at the present value of estimated future cash flows using rates which approximate current market rates for instruments of like maturities.

116

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Accrued Interest Payable:

The carrying amount of accrued interest payable approximates fair value since its maturity is short-term.

Junior Subordinated Debentures:

The fair value of the fixed rate junior subordinated debentures issued to TAYC Capital Trust I is computed based upon the publicly quoted market prices of the underlying trust preferred securities issued by the Trust. The fair value of the floating rate junior subordinated debentures issued to TAYC Capital Trust II is assumed to approximate its carrying value as the underlying interest rate adjusts quarterly based upon short-term market interest rates.

Subordinated Notes:

The subordinated notes issued by the Bank in 2008 have been valued at the present value of estimated future cash flows using rates which approximate current market rates for an instrument with a like maturity.

Off-Balance Sheet Financial Instruments:

The fair value of commercial loan commitments to extend credit are not material as they are predominantly floating rate, subject to material adverse change clauses, cancelable and not readily marketable. The carrying value and the fair value of standby letters of credit represent the unamortized portion of the fee paid by the customer. A reserve for unfunded commitments is established if it is probable that a liability has been incurred by the Company under a standby letter of credit or a loan commitment that has not yet been funded.

117

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The estimated fair values of the Company’s financial instruments are as follows:

	December 31, 2008				December 31, 2007
	Carrying Value		Fair Value		Carrying Value		Fair Value
	(in thousands)
Financial Assets:
Cash and cash equivalents	$	53,012	$	53,012	$	83,561	$	83,561
Investments		1,094,594		1,094,594		892,371		892,371
Loans, net of allowance		3,104,713		3,113,565		2,478,652		2,501,298
Investment in FHLB and Federal Reserve Bank stock		29,630		29,630		15,310		15,310
Accrued interest receivable		17,659		17,659		18,240		18,240
Derivative financial instruments		18,578		18,578		1,603		1,603
Other assets		4,162		4,162		6,574		6,574
Total financial assets	$	4,322,348	$	4,331,200	$	3,496,311	$	3,518,957
Financial Liabilities:
Deposits without stated maturities	$	1,125,759	$	1,125,759	$	1,361,064	$	1,361,064
Deposits with stated maturities		2,005,287		2,053,784		1,219,128		1,225,633
Other borrowings		275,560		296,744		389,054		421,207
Notes payable and FHLB advances		462,000		464,844		205,000		206,111
Accrued interest payable		19,631		19,631		13,973		13,973
Derivative financial instruments		11,940		11,940		168		168
Junior subordinated debentures		86,607		70,274		86,607		86,680
Subordinated notes		55,303		58,956		—		—
Total financial liabilities	$	4,042,087	$	4,101,932	$	3,274,994	$	3,314,836
Off-Balance-Sheet Financial Instruments:
Unfunded commitments to extend credit	$	2,917	$	2,917	$	—	$	—
Standby letters of credit		269		269		125		125
Total off-balance-sheet financial instruments	$	3,186	$	3,186	$	125	$	125

The remaining balance sheet assets and liabilities of the Company are not considered financial instruments and have not been valued differently than is required under historical cost accounting. Since assets and liabilities that are not financial instruments are excluded above, the difference between total financial assets and financial liabilities does not, nor is it intended to, represent the market value of the Company. Furthermore, the estimated fair value information may not be comparable between financial institutions due to the wide range of valuation techniques permitted, and assumptions necessitated, in the absence of an available trading market.

20. Litigation:

The Company is, from time to time, a party to litigation arising in the normal course of business. Management knows of no threatened or pending legal actions against the Company that are likely to have a material adverse impact on its business, financial condition, liquidity or operating results.

118

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

21. Parent Company Only Financial Statements

Summarized financial information of Taylor Capital Group, Inc. is as follows:

BALANCE SHEETS

(in thousands)

	December 31,
	2008		2007
ASSETS
Noninterest-bearing deposits with bank subsidiary	$	76,482	$	21,974
Investment in bank subsidiary		321,378		312,752
Investment in non-bank subsidiaries		2,614		2,616
Other assets		7,809		6,144
Total assets	$	408,283	$	343,486
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Accrued interest, taxes and other liabilities	$	2,589	$	2,623
Notes payable		12,000		—
Junior subordinated debentures		86,607		86,607
Stockholders’ equity		307,087		254,256
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity	$	408,283	$	343,486

STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

(in thousands)

	For the Years Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006
Income:
Dividends from subsidiary Bank	$	—		$	15,000		$	10,000
Dividends from non-bank subsidiary		209			235			232
Total income		209			15,235			10,232
Expenses:
Interest		7,270			7,931			7,815
Salaries and employee benefits		1,457			581			2,203
Legal fees, net		920			310			705
Other		1,193			1,962			2,130
Total expenses		10,840			10,784			12,853
Income (loss) before income taxes, equity in undistributed net income of subsidiaries		(10,631	)		4,451			(2,621	)
Income tax benefit		3,301			3,950			18,538
Equity in undistributed (distributions in excess of) earnings of subsidiaries		(117,198	)		(17,971	)		30,246
Net income (loss)	$	(124,528	)	$	(9,570	)	$	46,163

119

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

(in thousands)

	For the Years Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006
Cash flows from operating activities:
Net income (loss)	$	(124,528	)	$	(9,570	)	$	46,163
Adjustments to reconcile net income (loss) to net cash provided (used) by operating activities:
Amortization of stock-based compensation		440			198			806
Distributions in excess of (equity in undistributed) earnings of subsidiaries		117,198			17,971			(30,246	)
Other, net		(16	)		7			(659	)
Changes in assets and liabilities:
Other assets		(1,399	)		(410	)		(805	)
Other liabilities		(392	)		468			(13,862	)
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities		(8,697	)		8,664			1,397
Cash flows from investing activities:
Redemption of shares of TAYC Capital Trust I		—			—			31
Capital contributed to subsidiary bank		(107,491	)		—			—
Other, net		(266	)		(374	)		(8	)
Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities		(107,757	)		(374	)		23
Cash flows from financing activities:
Proceeds from notes payable		12,000			—			—
Repurchase of junior subordinated debentures		—			—			(1,031	)
Purchase of treasury stock		—			(17,579	)		—
Dividends paid		(2,136	)		(4,388	)		(2,651	)
Proceeds from the issuance of preferred stock, net		161,068			—			—
Proceeds from the exercise of employee stock options		30			717			2,675
Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities		170,962			(21,250	)		(1,007	)
Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents		54,508			(12,960	)		413
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year		21,974			34,934			34,521
Cash and cash equivalents, end of year	$	76,482		$	21,974		$	34,934

120

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

22. Other Comprehensive Income

The following table presents other comprehensive income for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006:

	Before Tax Amount			Tax Effect			Net of Tax
	(in thousands)
Year ended December 31, 2006:
Change in unrealized gains and losses on available-for-sale securities	$	3,439		$	(827	)	$	2,612
Change in net unrealized gains and losses from cash flow hedging instruments		3,132			(1,127	)		2,005
Change in deferred gains and losses from termination of cash flow hedging instruments		(1,530	)		535			(995	)
Other comprehensive income	$	5,041		$	(1,419	)	$	3,622
Year ended December 31, 2007:
Change in unrealized gains and losses on available-for-sale securities	$	12,545		$	(4,919	)	$	7,626
Change in net unrealized gains and losses from cash flow hedging instruments		6,764			(2,660	)		4,104
Change in deferred gains and losses from termination of cash flow hedging instruments		437			(151	)		286
Other comprehensive income	$	19,746		$	(7,730	)	$	12,016
Year ended December 31, 2008:
Unrealized gains from securities:
Change in unrealized gains and losses on available-for-sale securities	$	14,405		$	(5,712	)	$	8,693
Add: reclassification adjustment for losses included in net income (loss)		2,399			(950	)		1,449
Change in unrealized gains and losses on available for sale securities, net of reclassification adjustment		16,804			(6,662	)		10,142
Change in net unrealized gains from cash flow hedging instruments		6,408			(2,540	)		3,868
Change in deferred gains and losses from termination of cash flow hedging instruments		(2,815	)		1,097			(1,718	)
Other comprehensive income	$	20,397		$	(8,105	)	$	12,292

121

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

23. Earnings (Loss) Per Share

The following table sets forth the computation of basic and diluted earnings (loss) per common share. Due to the net loss for the year ended December 31, 2008, all common stock equivalents were considered antidilutive and were not included in the computation of diluted earnings per share. At December 31, 2008, the common stock equivalents consisted of 716,642 stock options to purchase shares of common stock, 2,862,647 warrants to purchase shares of common stock, and the convertible Series A preferred stock which could be converted into 6,000,000 shares of common stock. Due to the net loss for the year ended December 31, 2007, 744,986 stock options outstanding were considered antidilutive and were not included in the computation of diluted earnings per share. For the year ended December 31, 2006, stock options outstanding to purchase 207,921 common shares were not included in the computation of diluted earnings per share because the effect also would have been antidilutive.

	For the Years Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006
	(dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
Basic:
Net income (loss) applicable to common shareholders	$	(143,358	)	$	(9,570	)	$	46,163
Weighted average common shares outstanding		10,450,177			10,782,316			10,940,162
Basic earnings (loss) per share	$	(13.72	)	$	(0.89	)	$	4.22
Diluted:
Net income (loss) applicable to common shareholders	$	(143,358	)	$	(9,570	)	$	46,163
Add back dividends on convertible preferred stock, Series A		—			—			—
Adjusted net income applicable to common shareholders	$	(143,358	)	$	(9,570	)	$	46,163
Weighted average common shares outstanding		10,450,177			10,782,316			10,940,162
Dilutive effect of stock options		—			—			178,656
Dilutive effect of warrants to purchase common stock		—			—			—
Dilutive effect of assumed conversions of preferred stock, Series A, into common shares		—			—			—
Diluted weighted average common shares outstanding		10,450,177			10,782,316			11,118,818
Diluted earnings (loss) per share	$	(13.72	)	$	(0.89	)	$	4.15

122

Item 9. Changes in and Disagreements With Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure

None.

Item 9A. Controls and Procedures

Conclusion Regarding the Effectiveness of Disclosure Controls and Procedures

Under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Accounting Officer, we conducted an evaluation of our disclosure controls and procedures, as such term is defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. Based on this evaluation, our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Accounting Officer concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures were effective as of December 31, 2008.

Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

Our management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting, as such term is defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f). Under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Accounting Officer, we conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2008, based on the criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). Based on our evaluation under the criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework, our management concluded that our internal control over financial reporting was effective as of December 31, 2008.

Our management’s assessment of the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2008 has been audited by KPMG LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm. KPMG’s attestation report, which expresses an unqualified opinion on the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting, follows.

Changes in Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

There were no changes in our internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the quarter-ended December 31, 2008 that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal controls over financial reporting.

123

Report Of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Stockholders and Board of Directors of Taylor Capital Group, Inc.:

We have audited Taylor Capital Group, Inc.’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2008, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). Taylor Capital management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Controls over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on Taylor Capital’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.

We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control, based on the assessed risk. Our audit also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

In our opinion, Taylor Capital maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2008, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO).

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated balance sheets of Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2008 and 2007, and the related consolidated statements of operations, changes in stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2008, and our report dated March 11, 2009 expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements.

Chicago, Illinois

March 11, 2009

Item 9B. Other Information

None.

124

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

PART III

Item 10. Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance

Information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be held on June 11, 2009.

Item 11. Executive Compensation

Information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be held on June 11, 2009.

Item 12. Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters

Information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be held on June 11, 2009.

Item 13. Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence

Information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be held on June 11, 2009.

Item 14. Principal Accountant Fees and Services

Information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement for the Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be held on June 11, 2009.

125

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

PART IV

Item 15. Exhibits, Financial Statement Schedules

(a)(1) Financial Statements

See Part II – Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data

(a)(2) Financial Statement Schedules

Schedules have been omitted because the information required to be shown in the schedules is not applicable or is included elsewhere in our financial statements or accompanying notes.

(a)(3) Exhibits:

EXHIBIT INDEX

Exhibit Number	Description of Exhibits
3.1	Form of Third Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Appendix A of the Company’s Definitive Proxy Statement filed September 15, 2008).
3.2	Form of Third Amended and Restated Bylaws of Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Appendix B of the Company’s Definitive Proxy Statement filed September 15, 2008).
3.3	Certificate of Designations of Fixed Rate Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series B, dated November 19, 2008 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed November 24, 2008).
4	Certain instruments defining the rights of the holders of long-term debt of the Company and certain of its subsidiaries, none of which authorize a total amount of indebtedness in excess of 10% of the total assets of the Company and its subsidiaries on a consolidated basis, have not been filed as exhibits. The Company hereby agrees to furnish a copy of any of these agreements to the SEC upon request.
4.1	Form of certificate representing Taylor Capital Group, Inc. common stock (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.3 of the Company’s Amended Registration Statement on Form S-1/A filed October 1, 2002 (Registration No. 333-89158)).
4.2	Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement, dated November 27, 2002, by and between LaSalle Bank National Association and Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed November 26, 2002).
4.3	First Amendment to Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement, dated as of November 27, 2003, by and between LaSalle Bank National Association and Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.74 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed March 11, 2004).
4.4	Second Amendment to Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement, dated June 8, 2004, by and between LaSalle Bank National Association and Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.78 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q filed August 6, 2004).
4.5	Third Amendment to Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement, dated December 9, 2004, by and between LaSalle Bank National Association and Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed December 10, 2004).

126

Exhibit Number	Description of Exhibits
4.6	Fourth Amendment to Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement, dated January 12, 2006, by and between LaSalle Bank National Association and Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed January 18, 2006).
4.7	Fifth Amendment to Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement, dated December 28, 2006, by and between LaSalle Bank National Association and Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.46 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed March 15, 2007).
4.8	Sixth Amendment to Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement, dated January 24, 2008, by and between LaSalle Bank National Association and Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.50 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed March 31, 2008).
4.9	Seventh Amendment to Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement, dated September 24, 2008, by and between Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and LaSalle Bank National Association (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.2 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed September 30, 2008).
4.10	Eighth Amendment to Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement, dated March 2, 2009, by and between Bank of America, N.A. and Taylor Capital Group, Inc.*
4.11	Ninth Amendment to Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement, dated March 10, 2009, by and between Bank of America, N.A. and Taylor Capital Group, Inc.*
4.12	Form of Warrant issued by Taylor Capital Group, Inc. to Financial Investments Corporation (incorporated by reference to an exhibit to Exhibit 10.2 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed September 5, 2008).
4.13	Form of Registration Rights Agreement by and among Taylor Capital Group, Inc., the parties listed on Exhibit A and Exhibit B attached thereto and Financial Investments Corporation (incorporated by reference to an exhibit to Exhibit 10.2 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed September 5, 2008).
4.14	Form of Stock Purchase Warrant issued by Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Appendix F of the Company’s Definitive Proxy Statement filed September 15, 2008).
4.15	Warrant, dated November 21, 2008, issued by Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed November 24, 2008).
9.1	Voting Trust Agreement, dated November 30, 1998, by and between the Depositors and Trustees as set forth therein (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 9.1 of the Company’s Registration Statement on Form S-1 filed May 24, 2002 (Registration No. 333-89158)).
9.2	Amendment Number One of Voting Trust Agreement, dated December 1, 1999, by and between the Depositors and Trustees as set forth therein (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 9.2 of the Company’s Amended Registration Statement on Form S-1/A filed September 16, 2002 (Registration No. 333-89158)).
9.3	Amendment Number Two of Voting Trust Agreement, dated June 1, 2002, by and between the Depositors and Trustees as set forth therein (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 9.3 of the Company’s Amended Registration Statement on Form S-1/A filed September 16, 2002 (Registration No. 333-89158)).

127

Exhibit Number	Description of Exhibits
9.4	Share Restriction Agreement, dated November 30, 1998, by and among the Principal Stockholders (as defined therein) and Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.54 of the Company’s Amended Registration Statement on Form S-1/A filed September 16, 2002 (Registration No. 333-89158)).
9.5	Amendment Number One of Share Restriction Agreement, dated December 1, 1999, by and among the Principal Stockholders (as defined therein) and Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.55 of the Company’s Amended Registration Statement on Form S-1/A filed September 16, 2002 (Registration No. 333-89158)).
10.1	Taylor Capital Group, Inc. Deferred Compensation Plan effective December 30, 2008.*+
10.2	Trust Under Taylor Capital Group, Inc. Deferred Compensation Plan, dated April 1, 2001. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.17 of the Company’s Registration Statement on Form S-1 filed May 24, 2002 (Registration No. 333-89158)).+
10.3	Taylor Capital Group, Inc. 1997 Incentive Compensation Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.25 of the Company’s Amended Registration Statement on Form S-1 filed October 10, 2002 (Registration No. 333-89158)).+
10.4	Taylor Capital Group, Inc. 1997 Long-Term Incentive Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.30 of the Company’s Amended Registration Statement on Form S-1 filed October 10, 2002 (Registration No. 333-89158)).+
10.5	Taylor Capital Group, Inc. 2002 Incentive Compensation Plan, as amended and restated (incorporated by reference to Appendix A of the Company’s Definitive Proxy Statement filed April 29, 2008).+
10.6	Pointe O’Hare Office Lease, between Orix O’Hare II Inc. and Cole Taylor Bank, dated March 5, 2003 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.66 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed March 21, 2003).
10.7	Taylor Capital Group, Inc. Incentive Bonus Plan – Long Term Incentive Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.68 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q filed May 14, 2003).+
10.8	Form of Amended and Restated Change in Control Severance Agreement (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.69 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q filed May 14, 2003).+
10.9	Form of Non-Employee Director Restricted Stock Award (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.38 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed March 10, 2005).+
10.10	Form of Officer and Employee Restricted Stock Award (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.39 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed March 10, 2005).+
10.11	Form of Non-Employee Director Non-Qualified Stock Option Agreement (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.40 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed March 10, 2005).+
10.12	Form of Officer and Employee Non-Qualified Stock Option Agreement (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.41 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed March 10, 2005).+
10.13	Salary Continuation Following Death Benefit Letter to Jeffrey W. Taylor, dated June 15, 2005 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.44 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q filed August 3, 2005).+
10.14	Salary Continuation Following Death Benefit Letter to Bruce W. Taylor, dated June 15, 2005 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.45 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q filed August 3, 2005).+

128

Exhibit Number	Description of Exhibits
10.15	Office Lease by and between GQ 225 Washington, LLP, a Delaware limited liability partnership as Landlord and Cole Taylor Bank, an Illinois banking corporation as Tenant (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed January 25, 2007).
10.16	Taylor Capital Group, Inc. 2007 Incentive Bonus Plan (incorporated by reference to Appendix A to the Company’s Definitive Proxy Statement filed April 30, 2007).+
10.17	Executive Employment Agreement, dated January 30, 2008, by and among Taylor Capital Group, Inc., Cole Taylor Bank and Mark A. Hoppe (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed February 5, 2008).+
10.18	Change In Control Severance Agreement between Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and Robin VanCastle (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.49 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed March 13, 2008).+
10.19	Officer and Employee 2008 Non-Qualified Stock Option Agreement between Mark A. Hoppe and Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.52 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed March 31, 2008).+
10.20	Officer and Employee Restricted Stock Award between Mark A. Hoppe and Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.53 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed March 31, 2008).+
10.21	Agreement and Release among Taylor Capital Group, Inc., Cole Taylor Bank, and Mark Garrigus (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.54 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q filed May 9, 2008).+
10.22	Form of Management Services Agreement by and between Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and Financial Investments Corporation (incorporated by reference to an exhibit to Exhibit 10.2 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed September 5, 2008).+
10.23	Executive Employment Agreement, dated September 4, 2008, by and among Taylor Capital Group, Inc., Cole Taylor Bank and Bruce W. Taylor (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed September 5, 2008).+
10.24	Consulting Agreement, dated September 4, 2008, by and among Taylor Capital Group, Inc., Cole Taylor Bank and Jeffrey W. Taylor (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.5 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed September 5, 2008).+
10.25	Letter Agreement, dated November 21, 2008, by and between Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and United States Department of the Treasury, which includes the Securities Purchase Agreement attached thereto, with respect to the issuance and sale of the Company’s Series B Preferred Stock and a Warrant to purchase shares of the Company’s common stock (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed November 24, 2008).
10.26	Form of Waiver executed by each of the Company’s senior executive officers as required pursuant to the Securities Purchase Agreement, dated November 21, 2008, by and between Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and the United States Department of the Treasury (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed November 24, 2008).+
10.27	Form of TARP Capital Purchase Program Compliance, Amendment and Consent Agreement executed by each of the Company’s senior executive officers as required pursuant to the Securities Purchase Agreement, dated November 21, 2008, by and between Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and the United States Department of the Treasury (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed November 24, 2008).+

129

Exhibit Number	Description of Exhibits
10.28	Agreement and Release entered into by and between Cole Taylor Bank and Robin VanCastle, dated January 6, 2009 (incorporated by reference to the Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed January 12, 2009).+
10.29	Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and Cole Taylor Bank Executive Severance Plan, as amended and restated.*+
10.30	Taylor Capital Group, Inc. Senior Officer Change in Control Severance Plan.*+
12.1	Computation of Ratios of Earnings to Fixed Charges.*
21.1	List of Subsidiaries of Taylor Capital Group, Inc.
23.1	Consent of KPMG LLP.*
31.1	Certification of Chief Executive Officer Pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a) under the Security Exchange Act of 1934.*
31.2	Certification of Chief Financial Officer Pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a) under the Security Exchange Act of 1934.*
32.1	Certification of the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.*

* Filed herewith

+ Management contract or compensatory plan or arrangement required to be filed as an Exhibit to this Form 10-K.

(b) Exhibits

See Item 15(a)(3) above.

(c) Financial Statement Schedules

See Item 15(a)(2) above.

130

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized on the 11th day of March 2009.

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

/S/    BRUCE W. TAYLOR

Bruce W. Taylor

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

(Principal Executive Officer)

/S/    RANDALL T. CONTE

Randal T. Conte

Chief Operating and Chief Financial Officer

(Principal Financial Officer)

(Principal Accounting Officer)

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and the dates indicated.

Signature	Title	Date
/S/    BRUCE W. TAYLOR         Bruce W. Taylor	Chief Executive Officer and Chairman of the Board	March 11, 2009
/S/    MARK A. HOPPE         Mark A. Hoppe	President and Director	March 11, 2009
/S/    RONALD L. BLIWAS         Ronald L. Bliwas	Director	March 11, 2009
/S/    RONALD EMANUEL         Ronald Emanuel	Director	March 11, 2009
/S/    M. HILL HAMMOCK         M. Hill Hammock	Director	March 11, 2009
/S/    MICHAEL H. MOSKOW         Michael H. Moskow	Director	March 11, 2009
/S/    LOUISE O’SULLIVAN         Louise O’Sullivan	Director	March 11, 2009
/S/    MELVIN E. PEARL         Melvin E. Pearl	Director	March 11, 2009
/S/    SHEPHERD G. PRYOR IV         Shepherd G. Pryor IV	Director	March 11, 2009
/S/    HARRISON I. STEANS         Harrison I. Steans	Director	March 11, 2009

131

Signature	Title	Date
/S/    JENNIFER W. STEANS         Jennifer W. Steans	Director	March 11, 2009
/S/    JEFFREY W. TAYLOR         Jeffrey W. Taylor	Director	March 11, 2009
/S/    RICHARD W. TINBERG         Richard W. Tinberg	Director	March 11, 2009

132

EX-4.10

EXHIBIT 4.10

EIGHTH AMENDMENT

TO

LOAN AND SUBORDINATED DEBENTURE PURCHASE AGREEMENT

BETWEEN

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A.

AND

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

Eighth Amendment dated as of March 2, 2009

Seventh Amendment dated as of September 24, 2008

Sixth Amendment dated as of January 24, 2008

Fifth Amendment dated as of December 28, 2006

Fourth Amendment dated as of January 12, 2006

Third Amendment dated as of December 9, 2004

Second Amendment dated as of June 8, 2004

First Amendment dated as of November 27, 2003

Original Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement dated as of November 27, 2002

AMENDMENT PROVISIONS:		PAGE
A.	Amendment to Subsection 4.1.2 of the 2002 Loan Agreement	1
B.	Amendment to Disclosure Schedule	1
C.	Representations and Warranties	1
D.	Conditions	2
E.	Additional Terms	2

EIGHTH AMENDMENT TO

LOAN AND SUBORDINATED DEBENTURE PURCHASE AGREEMENT

This EIGHTH AMENDMENT TO LOAN AND SUBORDINATED DEBENTURE PURCHASE AGREEMENT (“Eighth Amendment”), dated as of March 2, 2009, is entered into by and between TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC., a Delaware corporation (“Borrower”), and BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., as successor to LASALLE BANK NATIONAL ASSOCIATION (“Lender”).

R E C I T A L S :

A. The parties hereto have entered into that certain Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement, dated as of November 27, 2002, as previously amended, restated, supplemented or modified from time to time (as so amended, restated, supplemented or modified, the “2002 Loan Agreement”).

B. The parties hereto desire to amend and modify the 2002 Loan Agreement in accordance with the terms and subject to the conditions set forth in this Eighth Amendment. As amended and modified by this Eighth Amendment, the 2002 Loan Agreement may be referred to as the “Agreement.”

C. The parties desire to amend the terms of the 2002 Loan Agreement to amend certain representation and warranties of the 2002 Agreement. The parties agree to undertake such modification in accordance with the terms, subject to the conditions, and in reliance upon the recitals, representations, warranties, and covenants set forth herein, in the Agreement, and in the other Loan Documents, irrespective of whether entered into or delivered on or after November 27, 2002.

D. Capitalized terms used but not otherwise defined in this Eighth Amendment shall have the meanings respectively ascribed to them in the 2002 Loan Agreement.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual representations, warranties, covenants and agreements hereinafter set forth, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto hereby agree as follows:

A G R E E M E N T :

A. Amendment to Subsection 4.1.2 of the 2002 Loan Agreement. Subsection 4.1.2 of the 2002 Loan Agreement is hereby deleted and replaced in its entirety with the following:

“4.1.2 Capital Stock of Borrower. Section 4.1.2 of the Disclosure Schedule correctly sets forth (a) the state or states in which Borrower conducts its businesses, (b) a list of all subsidiaries of Borrower, all of which are directly or indirectly wholly owned by Borrower, and (c) a list of each class of stock of Borrower, the number of authorized and issued and outstanding shares of each class of stock of Borrower. All of the outstanding capital stock of Borrower has been duly authorized, legally and validly issued, fully paid and nonassessable.”

B. Amendment to Disclosure Schedule. Section 4.1.2 of the Disclosure Schedule to the 2002 Loan Agreement is hereby deleted and replaced in its entirety with Exhibit A attached hereto.

C. Representations and Warranties. Borrower hereby represents and warrants to the Lender as follows:

(i) No Event of Default or Potential Event of Default has occurred and is continuing (except as waived hereby).

(ii) The execution, delivery and performance by the Borrower of this Eighth Amendment have been duly authorized by all necessary corporate and other action and do not and will not require any registration with, consent or approval of, or notice to or action by any Person (including any Governmental Agency) in order to be effective and enforceable.

(iii) This Eighth Amendment, and the other Loan Documents (as amended by this Eighth Amendment) constitute the legal, valid and binding obligations of the Borrower, enforceable against the Borrower in accordance with their respective terms.

(iv) All representations and warranties of the Borrower in the 2002 Loan Agreement are true and correct, and except for the purposes of this Eighth Amendment only, all references in Section 4 of the 2002 Loan Agreement to (x) the term “Borrower 2001 Audited Financial Statements Date” shall be deemed to refer to “December 31, 2007 (as restated)”; (y) the term “Borrower 2001 Audited Financial Statements” shall be deemed to refer to “the consolidated and consolidating audited financial statements of the Borrower as of the year ending December 31, 2007 (as restated)”; and (z) the term “Interim Financial Statements Date” shall be deemed to refer to call reports and regulatory filings (including Form FRY-9C filings) by the Subsidiary Bank for the period ending “September 30, 2008.”

(v) The Borrower’s obligations under the Agreement and under the other Loan Documents are not subject to any defense, counterclaim, set-off, right to recoupment, abatement or other claim.

D. Conditions. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained elsewhere in the Agreement, the obligation of Lender to amend Subsection 4.1.2 and otherwise modify the 2002 Loan Agreement as contemplated by this Eighth Amendment shall be subject to the performance by the Borrower prior to the date on which this Eighth Amendment is executed (the “Amendment Closing Date”) of all of its agreements theretofore to be performed under the Agreement and to the satisfaction of the following conditions precedent. The obligations to continue to make disbursements of proceeds under the Loans are, and shall remain, subject to the conditions precedent in the 2002 Loan Agreement and to the receipt by the Lender of all the following in form and substance satisfactory to the Lender and its counsel, and, where appropriate, duly executed and dated the Amendment Closing Date:

(i) a certificate of good standing of the Borrower, certified by the appropriate governmental official in its jurisdiction of incorporation and dated within the five business days preceding the date hereof;

(ii) copies, certified by the Secretary or Assistant Secretary of the Borrower, of the (a) resolutions duly adopted by the board of directors of the Borrower authorizing the execution, delivery and performance of this Eighth Amendment and the other documents to be delivered by the Borrower pursuant to this Eighth Amendment (the “Amendment-Related Documents”), and (b) the Bylaws of the Borrower as currently in effect; and

(iii) such other documents, agreements or instruments as Lender may reasonably request.

E. Additional Terms.

(i) Acknowledgment of Indebtedness under Agreement. The Borrower acknowledges and confirms that, as of the date hereof, the Borrower is indebted to the Lender, without defense, setoff, or counterclaim, in the aggregate principal amount of Twelve Million Dollars ($12,000,000) under the Revolving Loan.

(ii) Effectiveness. This Eighth Amendment is hereby deemed to be effective as of January 20, 2009.

(iii) The Agreement. All references in the 2002 Loan Agreement to the term “Agreement” shall be deemed to refer to the Agreement referenced in this Eighth Amendment.

2

(iv) Eighth Amendment and 2002 Loan Agreement to be Read Together. This Eighth Amendment supplements and is hereby made a part of the 2002 Loan Agreement, and the 2002 Loan Agreement and this Eighth Amendment shall from and after the date hereof be read together and shall constitute the Agreement. Except as otherwise set forth herein, the 2002 Loan Agreement shall remain in full force and effect.

(v) Lender Expenses. Borrower shall reimburse Lender’s fees and expenses, including attorneys’ fees and expenses, in connection with the preparation, negotiation and execution of the Amendment Related Documents and that certain Lender Consent, dated as of November 21, 2008, between Lender and Borrower, at the Amendment Closing Date.

(vi) Loan Documents. The term “Loan Documents,” as used in the Agreement, shall from and after the date hereof include the Amendment-Related Documents.

(vii) Counterparts. This Eighth Amendment may be executed by facsimile in one or more counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original and all of which taken together shall constitute one and the same document.”

[Remainder of Page Intentionally Left Blank]

3

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Borrower and the Lender have executed this Eighth Amendment as of the date first written above.

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.
By:	/s/ MARK A. HOPPE
	Name: Mark A. Hoppe
	Title: President

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A.
By:	/s/ NELSON D. ALBRECHT
	Name: Nelson D. Albrecht
	Title: Senior Vice President

EX-4.11

EXHIBIT 4.11

NINTH AMENDMENT

TO

LOAN AND SUBORDINATED DEBENTURE PURCHASE AGREEMENT

BETWEEN

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A.

AND

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

Ninth Amendment dated as of March 10, 2009

Eighth Amendment dated as of March 2, 2009

Seventh Amendment dated as of September 24, 2008

Sixth Amendment dated as of January 24, 2008

Fifth Amendment dated as of December 28, 2006

Fourth Amendment dated as of January 12, 2006

Third Amendment dated as of December 9, 2004

Second Amendment dated as of June 8, 2004

First Amendment dated as of November 27, 2003

Original Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement dated as of November 27, 2002

AMENDMENT PROVISIONS:		PAGE
A.	Amendment to Definition of “Revolving Loan Maturity Date”	1
B.	Amendment to Section 2.1 of the 2002 Loan Agreement	1
C.	Representations and Warranties	2
D.	Conditions	2
E.	Additional Terms	3

NINTH AMENDMENT TO

LOAN AND SUBORDINATED DEBENTURE PURCHASE AGREEMENT

This NINTH AMENDMENT TO LOAN AND SUBORDINATED DEBENTURE PURCHASE AGREEMENT (“Ninth Amendment”), dated as of March 10, 2009, is entered into by and between TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC., a Delaware corporation (“Borrower”), and BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., as successor to LASALLE BANK NATIONAL ASSOCIATION (“Lender”).

R E C I T A L S :

A. The parties hereto have entered into that certain Loan and Subordinated Debenture Purchase Agreement, dated as of November 27, 2002, as previously amended, restated, supplemented or modified from time to time (as so amended, restated, supplemented or modified, the “2002 Loan Agreement”).

B. The parties hereto desire to amend and modify the 2002 Loan Agreement in accordance with the terms and subject to the conditions set forth in this Ninth Amendment. As amended and modified by this Ninth Amendment, the 2002 Loan Agreement may be referred to as the “Agreement.”

C. The parties desire to amend the terms of the 2002 Loan Agreement to (i) extend the Revolving Loan Maturity Date; (ii) amend the interest rates applicable to the Revolving Loan; and (iii) provide for a non-use fee. The parties agree to undertake such modification in accordance with the terms, subject to the conditions, and in reliance upon the recitals, representations, warranties, and covenants set forth herein, in the Agreement, and in the other Loan Documents, irrespective of whether entered into or delivered on or after November 27, 2002.

D. Capitalized terms used but not otherwise defined in this Ninth Amendment shall have the meanings respectively ascribed to them in the 2002 Loan Agreement.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual representations, warranties, covenants and agreements hereinafter set forth, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto hereby agree as follows:

A G R E E M E N T :

A. Amendment to Definition of “Revolving Loan Maturity Date”. The term “Revolving Loan Maturity Date” is hereby deleted from subsection 1.1 of the 2002 Loan Agreement and replaced in its entirety with the following:

“Revolving Loan Maturity Date” means March 31, 2010.

B. Amendment to Section 2.1 of the 2002 Loan Agreement. Section 2.1 of the 2002 Loan Agreement is hereby deleted and replaced in its entirety with the following:

“2.1. The Revolving Loan; Non-Use Fee. Lender agrees to extend to Borrower the credit facility described in this Section 2.1 in the aggregate principal amount of the Revolving Loan Amount. Lender agrees to extend the Revolving Loan to Borrower in accordance with the terms of, and subject to the conditions set forth in, this Agreement, the Revolving Note and the other Loan Documents. An initial Borrowing Tranche under the Revolving Loan shall be borrowed on the Closing Date and, thereafter, any such Borrowing Tranche may be converted or renewed from time to time in accordance with the terms and subject to the conditions set forth in this Agreement. Subject to Section 2.6 and any other conditions and limitations set forth in this Agreement, any Borrowing Tranche under the Revolving Loan shall be treated as, at Borrower’s election subject to and in accordance with the terms set forth in this Agreement: (a) subject to the minimum interest rate contemplated below, a LIBO Rate Tranche and shall bear interest per annum at a rate equal to 4.00% (400 basis points) plus the LIBO Rate; or (b) subject to the minimum interest rate contemplated below, a Base Rate Tranche and shall bear interest at a rate equal to the Base Rate plus 4.00% (400 basis points); provided, however, in no event shall any LIBO Rate Tranche or Base Rate Tranche bear interest at a

rate per annum lower than 5.00% (500 basis points) per annum. The unpaid principal balance plus all accrued but unpaid interest on the Revolving Loan shall be due and payable on the Revolving Loan Maturity Date, or such earlier date on which such amount shall become due and payable on account of acceleration by Lender in accordance with the terms of the Revolving Note and this Agreement. In addition, Borrower agrees to pay to Lender, with respect to the Revolving Loan, for the period commencing on the date hereof and continuing through the Revolving Loan Maturity Date, an amount equal to the product of (i) the average daily unused portion of the Revolving Loan Amount and (ii) 0.25% (25 basis points). Such non-use fee shall be payable quarterly by Borrower in arrears on the last Business Day of each calendar quarter and on the Revolving Loan Maturity Date. The non-use fee shall be computed on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed in a year of 360 days.”

C. Representations and Warranties. Borrower hereby represents and warrants to the Lender as follows:

(i) No Event of Default or Potential Event of Default has occurred and is continuing (except as waived hereby).

(ii) The execution, delivery and performance by the Borrower of this Ninth Amendment have been duly authorized by all necessary corporate and other action and do not and will not require any registration with, consent or approval of, or notice to or action by any Person (including any Governmental Agency) in order to be effective and enforceable.

(iii) This Ninth Amendment and the other Loan Documents (as amended by this Ninth Amendment) constitute the legal, valid and binding obligations of the Borrower, enforceable against the Borrower in accordance with their respective terms.

(iv) All representations and warranties of the Borrower in the 2002 Loan Agreement are true and correct, and except for the purposes of this Ninth Amendment only, all references in Section 4 of the 2002 Loan Agreement to (y) the term “Borrower 2001 Audited Financial Statements Date” shall be deemed to refer to “December 31, 2008 (as restated)”; and (z) the term “Borrower 2001 Audited Financial Statements” shall be deemed to refer to “the consolidated and consolidating audited financial statements of the Borrower as of the year ending December 31, 2008 (as restated)”.

(v) The Borrower’s obligations under the Agreement and under the other Loan Documents are not subject to any defense, counterclaim, set-off, right to recoupment, abatement or other claim.

D. Conditions. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained elsewhere in the Agreement, the obligation of Lender to amend and otherwise modify the 2002 Loan Agreement as contemplated by this Ninth Amendment shall be subject to the performance by the Borrower prior to the date on which this Ninth Amendment is executed (the “Amendment Closing Date”) of all of its agreements theretofore to be performed under the Agreement and to the satisfaction of the following conditions precedent. The obligations to continue to make disbursements of proceeds under the Revolving Loan are, and shall remain, subject to the conditions precedent in the 2002 Loan Agreement and to the receipt by the Lender of all the following in form and substance satisfactory to the Lender and its counsel, and, where appropriate, duly executed and dated the Amendment Closing Date:

(i) a certificate of good standing of the Borrower, certified by the appropriate governmental official in its jurisdiction of incorporation and dated within the five business days preceding the date hereof;

(ii) copies, certified by the Secretary or Assistant Secretary of the Borrower, of the (a) resolutions duly adopted by the board of directors of the Borrower authorizing the execution, delivery and performance of this Ninth Amendment and the other documents to be delivered by the Borrower pursuant to this Ninth Amendment (the “Amendment-Related Documents”), and (b) the Bylaws of the Borrower as currently in effect; and

2

(iii) such other documents, agreements or instruments as Lender may reasonably request.

E. Additional Terms.

(i) Acknowledgment of Indebtedness under Agreement. The Borrower acknowledges and confirms that, as of the date hereof, the Borrower is indebted to the Lender, without defense, setoff, or counterclaim, in the aggregate principal amount of Twelve Million Dollars ($12,000,000) under the Revolving Loan.

(ii) The Agreement. All references in the 2002 Loan Agreement to the term “Agreement” shall be deemed to refer to the Agreement referenced in this Ninth Amendment.

(iii) Ninth Amendment and 2002 Loan Agreement to be Read Together. This Ninth Amendment supplements and is hereby made a part of the 2002 Loan Agreement, and the 2002 Loan Agreement and this Ninth Amendment shall from and after the date hereof be read together and shall constitute the Agreement. Except as otherwise set forth herein, the 2002 Loan Agreement shall remain in full force and effect.

(iv) Loan Documents. The term “Loan Documents,” as used in the Agreement, shall from and after the date hereof include the Amendment-Related Documents.

(v) Lender Expenses. Borrower shall reimburse Lender’s fees and expenses, including attorneys’ fees and expenses, in connection with the preparation, negotiation and execution of the Amendment Related Documents, at the Amendment Closing Date.

(vi) Counterparts. This Ninth Amendment may be executed by facsimile in one or more counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original and all of which taken together shall constitute one and the same document.”

[Remainder of Page Intentionally Left Blank]

3

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Borrower and the Lender have executed this Ninth Amendment as of the date first written above.

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.
By:	/S/    RANDALL T. CONTE
	Name: Randall T. Conte Title: Executive Vice President, CFO

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A.
By:	/S/    NELSON D. ALBRECHT
	Name: Nelson D. Albrecht Title: Senior Vice President

EX-10.1

Exhibit 10.1

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC. DEFERRED COMPENSATION PLAN

WHEREAS, Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (the “Company”) heretofore adopted the “Taylor Capital Group. Inc. Deferred Compensation Plan” (the “Plan”), an unfunded plan maintained for the purpose of providing deferred compensation for a select group of management or highly compensated employees within the meaning of the United States Code of Federal Regulations Section 2520.104-23 and Sections 201(2), 301(a)(3) and 401(a)(1) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”); and

WHEREAS, the Company desires to amend the Plan to satisfy the requirements of Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”);

NOW, THEREFORE, effective December 30, 2008, the Plan is amended and restated to comply with the final regulations under Section 409A of the Code, with the Plan being operated in good faith compliance with Code Section 409A for the period January 1, 2005 to December 31, 2008.

SECTION 1. PURPOSE OF PLAN

The Plan is unfunded and is maintained for the purpose of providing deferred compensation to a select group of management and highly compensated employees of the Company within the meaning of the United States Code of Federal Regulations Section 2520.104-23 and Sections 201(2), 301(a)(3) and 401(a)(1) of the ERISA. The Plan will be administered in accordance with such purpose and in accordance with the provisions of Section 409A of the Code.

SECTION 2. DEFINITIONS

2.1 “Administrator” means the Board or the committee or subcommittee appointed pursuant to Section 16.1.

2.2 “Beneficiary” means the person or entity determined to be a Participant’s beneficiary pursuant to Section 14.

2.3 “Board” means the board of directors of the Company.

2.4 “Change in Control” means a “change in control” as defined in the Taylor Capital, Inc. Senior Officer Change in Control Severance Plan.

2.5 “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time.

2.6 “Company” means Taylor Capital Group, Inc.

1

2.7 “Compensation” means the base salary, commissions, and bonus under the Taylor Capital Group, Inc. Incentive Bonus Plan paid to a Participant for the Plan Year.

2.8 “Disability” means a condition in which the Participant is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment which, in the opinion of the Administrator, can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months.

2.9 “Early Retirement Age” means sixty-two (62) and ten (10) years of service.

2.10 “ERISA” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended from time to time.

2.11 “401(k) Plan” means the Taylor Capital Group, Inc. 401(k) and Profit Sharing Plan, as amended from time to time.

2.12 “Normal Retirement Age” means sixty-five (65).

2.13 “Participant” means an employee of the Company who is eligible to participate in the Plan pursuant to Section 3.

2.14 “Plan” means the Taylor Capital Group, Inc. Deferred Compensation Plan, as set forth herein and as amended from time to time.

2.15 “Plan Year” means the calendar year.

SECTION 3. ELIGIBLE EMPLOYEES

The Administrator shall determine which management employees and highly compensated employees of the Company shall be eligible to participate in the Plan from time to time, the eligibility waiting period and such other conditions as may be applicable from time to time.

SECTION 4. ELECTION TO DEFER COMPENSATION

A Participant may elect to defer a specified percentage of his or her base salary and commissions (from one percent (1%) to seventy-five percent (75%) for a Plan Year by filing an election with the Administrator (pursuant to Section 5) on or prior to November 30 (or such other date not later than December 31 that the Administrator may specify) of the preceding Plan Year. A Participant may elect to make a separate deferral election with respect to any annual bonus paid under the Taylor Capital Group, Inc. Incentive Bonus Plan (“success bonus”) to be earned for a Plan Year. Any election so made shall not be binding for any following Plan Year, and thus a new election must be filed for any following Plan Year on or before November 30 (or such other date not later than December 31 that the Administrator may specify) of the immediately preceding Plan Year. Provided, however, that, subject to the provisions of Section 409A of the Code, a Participant who first becomes eligible to participate in the Plan after the beginning of a Plan Year shall be entitled to make a deferral election (with respect to Compensation and any success bonus to be earned after the date of the election) within thirty (30) days of becoming eligible.

2

In connection with a Participant’s deferral election, each Participant may elect to establish up to ten (10) separate “college education” and/or “personal goals” sub-accounts, to which shall be credited such portion of his or her deferrals as the Participant may designate. Any amounts not credited to a subaccount shall be credited to a Participant’s retirement account. Any Company matching contributions made on behalf of a Participant under Section 7 shall be evenly allocated among the accounts established for the Participant under the Plan. Any discretionary Company contributions made under Section 7 shall be allocated in accordance with the percentage by which a Participant’s deferrals are to be allocated among such accounts. Subject to the provisions of Section 11, any college education and/or personal goal sub-accounts established for a Participant shall be distributed as of July 1 of the year selected by the Participant on the election form used to make his or her deferral election.

SECTION 5. MANNER OF ELECTION

Any election(s) made by a Participant pursuant to this Plan shall be made by executing such form(s) as the Administrator shall from time to time prescribe.

SECTION 6. ACCOUNTS

If a Participant elects to establish one or more “college education” or “personal goals” sub-account under Section 4, such account(s) shall be established and maintained on the Company’s books and shall record (a) any Compensation deferred by the Participant under the Plan which the Participant has elected to be credited to the applicable account, and any Company contributions made on his behalf which have been allocated to the applicable sub-account(s) pursuant to Section 4, and (b) the allocation of any hypothetical investment experience. There shall also be established for each Participant a separate “retirement account” which shall record (a) any Compensation deferred by the Participant, and any Company contributions made on his behalf, which have not been specifically allocated to any such sub-account(s) and (b) the allocation of any hypothetical investment experience.

SECTION 7. COMPANY CONTRIBUTIONS

For any Plan Year, the Company may elect to credit to the account of each Participant, or any Participant designated by the Board, an additional discretionary amount equal to a specified percentage of such Participant’s Compensation, a flat dollar amount and/or an amount equal to a specified percentage of any Compensation deferred under Section 4. Any such credit shall be made entirely at the discretion of the Board.

3

SECTION 8. ADJUSTMENTS TO ACCOUNTS

Each Participant’s account(s) shall be reduced by the amount of any distributions to the Participant from the applicable account, and by any federal, state and/or local tax withholding and any social security withholding tax as may be required by law. Pursuant to procedures established by the Administrator, each Participant’s account(s) shall be adjusted as of each business day the New York Stock Exchange is open to reflect the earnings or losses of any hypothetical investment media as may be designated by the Administrator.

SECTION 9. INVESTMENT OF ACCOUNTS

For purposes of determining the amount of earnings and appreciation and losses and depreciation to be credited to a Participant’s account(s), each Participant’s account(s) shall be deemed invested in the investment options (designated by the Administrator as available under the Plan) as the Participant may elect, from time to time, in accordance with such rules and procedures as the Administrator may establish. However, no provision of the Plan shall require the Company to actually invest any amounts in any fund or in any other investment vehicle.

SECTION 10. VESTED STATUS

Subject to the following provisions of the Plan, if a Participant “separates from service” with the Company (within the meaning of Code Section 409A) for any reason on or after his Normal Retirement Age or Early Retirement Age, or prior to those dates as a result of the Participant’s Disability or death, such Participant shall have a nonforfeitable (vested) right to the fair market value of the Participant’s account(s). If a Participant separates from service prior to his Normal Retirement Age or Early Retirement Age for any other reason other than his death or Disability, such Participant shall be entitled to receive the vested value of his or her account(s). For this purpose, each Participant shall at all times have a nonforfeitable (vested) right to his or her account(s) derived from any Compensation deferred pursuant to Section 4. However, with respect to any Company contributions made on the Participant’s behalf pursuant to Section 7, the Participant shall have a nonforfeitable (vested) right to a percentage of the fair market value of such portion of his or her applicable account as follows:

Years of Service	Vested Percentage
Less than 1 year	0	%
1 year but less than 2	20	%
2 years but less than 3	40	%
3 years but less than 4	60	%
4 years but less than 5	80	%
5 years or more	100	%

For this purpose, a Participant shall be credited with a Year of Service for each year of “vesting service” earned under the 401(k) Plan.

The nonvested portion of a Participant’s account, as determined above, shall be forfeited as of the Participant’s separation from service (or payment date in the case of a personal goals sub-account), and shall be used to reduce Company contributions under Section 7 and/or used to pay Plan administrative expenses.

4

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Participant’s account(s) shall become one hundred percent (100%) vested upon a Change in Control.

SECTION 11. TIME AND MANNER OF DISTRIBUTION

Distribution of a Participant’s vested “retirement account” (within the meaning of Section 4) shall be made or commence six (6) months following the date the Participant “separates from service” with the Company (within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code). Provided, however, that payment may be delayed under any of the circumstances permitted under said Section 409A. Provided, further, that, if any amounts credited to a Participant’s vested account(s) become subject to tax under Section 409A of the Code, such amount(s) shall be immediately distributed to the Participant.

Each Participant shall elect, on the election form used to make his or her deferral election, either of the following modes of distribution for his vested retirement account:

(a) a single lump sum payment; or

(b) annual installments over a period of up to ten (10) years, the amount of each installment to equal the balance of the Participant’s vested retirement account immediately prior to the installment divided by the number of installments remaining to be paid. The first installment shall be made (6) months following the date the Participant separates from service with the Company, with each subsequent installment being made on the first day of the calendar month following the one (1) year anniversary of the prior payment. Provided, however, that, if as the date such installments are to commence, the vested balance of the Participant’s account(s) to be distributed does not exceed $10,000, distribution shall be made in the form a single sum payment, notwithstanding the Participant’s election.

Any vested college education sub-account established for a Participant under Section 4 shall normally be distributed in the form of four (4) annual installments commencing on the date elected by the Participant. Each subsequent installment shall be made on the one (1) year anniversary of the prior payment. However, if as of the date such installments are to commence, the vested balance of the college education sub-account does not exceed $4,000, such sub-account shall be distributed in the form of a single-sum payment.

Any vested personal goals sub-account established for a Participant under Section 4 shall be distributed in the form of a single-sum payment on the date selected by the Participant.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, if as of the date a Participant’s vested retirement account is to be distributed, the Participant has any undistributed vested college education and/or personal goals sub-accounts, such remaining sub-accounts shall be distributed at the same time and in the same manner as the vested retirement account.

5

SECTION 12. DISTRIBUTION IN THE EVENT OF UNFORESEEABLE EMERGENCY

In the event of an “unforeseeable emergency” (within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code), a Participant may, by filing an election with the Administrator (in such form and manner as may be prescribed by the Administrator), elect to receive a distribution from the Plan in an amount not to exceed the lesser of (i) the fair market value of the Participant’s vested account(s) attributable to his deferrals or (ii) the amount necessary to satisfy the unforeseeable emergency.

SECTION 13. DEATH BENEFIT

In the event of the death of a Participant while in the employ of the Company, vesting in the Participant’s account(s) shall be one hundred percent (100%), if not otherwise one hundred percent (100%) vested under Section 10, with the fair market value of the Participant’s account(s) being distributed to the Participant’s Beneficiary, in a single lump sum payment, six (6) months following the Participant’s death.

In the event a Participant dies after distribution has commenced under the Plan, the vested balance of the Participant’s account(s), if any, shall be distributed to the Participant’s Beneficiary, in a single lump sum payment, six (6) months following the Participant’s death.

SECTION 14. BENEFICIARY DESIGNATION

A Participant may designate the person or persons to whom the Participant’s account(s) under the Plan shall be paid in the event of the Participant’s death, by filing a designation of beneficiary form with the Administrator. If no Beneficiary is designated, or no Beneficiary survives the Participant, payment shall be made to the Participant’s surviving spouse, or if none, to the Participant’s estate. If a Beneficiary survives the Participant but dies before the balance payable to the Beneficiary has been distributed, any remaining balance shall be paid to the Beneficiary’s estate.

SECTION 15. DOMESTIC RELATIONS ORDERS

If a domestic relations order issued by any court of proper authority directs assignment of all or any portion of a Participant’s vested account(s) to the Participant’s spouse or former spouse as part of a divorce settlement, the portion so assigned shall be distributed, in a lump-sum, to the spouse or former spouse within ninety (90) days following the date on which the order was received by the Administrator or, if later, within ninety (90) days following the date on which the order clearly specifies the amount to be assigned and any other terms necessary to comply with such order and with the provisions of Code Section 409A.

6

SECTION 16. PLAN ADMINISTRATION

16.1 Administration. The Plan shall be administered by the Board or, in the discretion of the Board, a committee or subcommittee of the Board (the “Committee”), appointed by the Board and composed of at least two members of the Board. All references in the Plan to the Administrator shall be understood to refer to the Committee or the Board, whoever shall administer the Plan.

Where the Committee serves as Administrator, in the event that a vacancy on the Committee occurs on account of the resignation of a member or the removal of a member by vote of the Board, a successor member shall be appointed by vote of the Board. The Administrator shall select one of its members as Chairman and shall hold meetings at such times and places as it may determine. A majority shall constitute a quorum, and acts of the Administrator at which a quorum is present, or acts reduced to or approved in writing by all its members, shall be the valid acts of the Administrator.

The Administrator is authorized to interpret and construe any provision of the Plan, to determine eligibility and benefits under the Plan, to prescribe, amend and rescind rules and regulations relating to the Plan, to adopt such forms as it may deem appropriate for the administration of the Plan, to provide for conditions and assurances deemed necessary or advisable to protect the interests of the Company and to make all other determinations necessary or advisable for the administration of the Plan, but only to the extent not contrary to the express provisions of the Plan or the provisions of Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and rulings promulgated thereunder. The Administrator shall be responsible for the day-to-day administration of the Plan. Determinations, interpretations or other actions made or taken by the Administrator under the Plan shall be final and binding for all purposes and upon all persons.

16.2 Review Procedure.

(a) Pursuant to procedures established by the Administrator, claims for benefits under the Plan made by a Participant or Beneficiary (the “claimant”) must be submitted in writing to the Administrator.

If a claim is denied in whole or in part, the Administrator shall notify the claimant within ninety (90) days (or forty-five (45) days if the claim relates to a determination of Disability) after receipt of the claim (or within one hundred eighty (180) days (or seventy-five (75) days for a Disability claim), if special circumstances require an extension of time for processing the claim, and provided written notice indicating the special circumstances and the date by which a final decision is expected to be rendered is given to the claimant within the initial ninety (90) day period, or forty-five (45) day period, as the case may be). If notification is not given in such period, the claim shall be considered denied as of the last day of such period and the claimant may request a review of the claim.

The notice of the denial of the claim shall be written in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant and shall set forth the following:

(i) the specific reason or reasons for the denial of the claim;

(ii) the specific references to the pertinent Plan provisions on which the denial is based;

7

(iii) a description of any additional material or information necessary to perfect the claim, and an explanation of why such material or information is necessary; and

(iv) a statement that any appeal of the denial must be made by giving to the Administrator, within sixty (60) days (or one hundred eighty (180) days in the case of a Disability claim) after receipt of the denial of the claim, written notice of such appeal, such notice to include a full description of the pertinent issues and basis of the claim.

(b) Upon denial of a claim in whole or part, the claimant (or his duly authorized representative) shall have the right to submit a written request to the Administrator for a full and fair review of the denied claim, to be permitted to review documents pertinent to the denial, and to submit issues and comments in writing. Any appeal of the denial must be given to the Administrator within the period of time prescribed under (a)(iv) above. If the claimant (or his duly authorized representative) fails to appeal the denial to the Administrator within the prescribed time, the Administrator’s adverse determination shall be final, binding and conclusive.

The Administrator may hold a hearing or otherwise ascertain such facts as it deems necessary and shall render a decision which shall be binding upon both parties. The Administrator shall advise the claimant of the results of the review within sixty (60) days (or forty-five (45) days in the case of a Disability claim) after receipt of the written request for the review, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, in which case a decision shall be rendered as soon as possible but not later than one hundred twenty (120) days (or ninety (90) days in the case of a Disability claim) after receipt of the request for review. If such extension of time is required, written notice of the extension shall be furnished to the claimant prior to the commencement of the extension. The decision of the review shall be written in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant and shall include specific reasons for the decision and specific references to the pertinent Plan provisions on which the decision is based. The decision of the Administrator shall be final, binding and conclusive.

SECTION 17. FUNDING

17.1 Plan Unfunded. The Plan is unfunded for tax purposes and for purposes of Title I of ERISA. Accordingly, the obligation of the Company to make payments under the Plan constitutes solely an unsecured (but legally enforceable) promise of the Company to make such payments, and no person, including any Participant or Beneficiary shall have any lien, prior claim or other security interest in any property of the Company as a result of this Plan. Any amounts payable under the Plan shall be paid out of the general assets of the Company and each Participant and Beneficiary shall be deemed to be a general unsecured creditor of the Company.

17.2 Rabbi Trust. The Company may create a grantor trust to pay its obligations hereunder (a so-called rabbi trust), the assets of which shall be, for all purposes, the assets of the Company. In the event the trustee of such trust is unable or unwilling to make payments directly to Participants and Beneficiaries and such trustee remits payments to the Company for delivery to Participants and Beneficiaries, the Company shall promptly remit such amount, less applicable income and other taxes required to be withheld, to the Participant or Beneficiary.

8

SECTION 18. AMENDMENT

The Company, by resolution of the Board, shall have the right to amend the Plan at any time subject to the provisions of Section 409A of the Code; provided, however, that no such action shall, without the Participant’s consent, impair the Participant’s right with respect to any existing account under the Plan.

SECTION 19. TERMINATION OF THE PLAN

The Company, by resolution of the Board, and subject to the provisions of Section 409A of the Code, may elect to terminate and liquidate the Plan, provided that: (i) the termination and liquidation does not occur proximate to a downturn in the financial health of the Company; (ii) the Company terminates and liquidates all agreements, methods, programs, and other arrangements sponsored by the Company that would be aggregated with any terminated and liquidated agreements, methods, programs, and other arrangements under Section 409A of the Code, if the same employee had deferrals of compensation under all of the agreements, methods, programs and other arrangements that are terminated and liquidated; (iii) no payments in liquidation of the Plan are made within twelve (12) months of the date the Company takes all necessary action to irrevocably terminate and liquidate the Plan other than payments that would be payable under the terms of the Plan if the action to terminate and liquidate the Plan had not occurred; (iv) all payments are made within twenty-four (24) months of the date the Company takes all necessary action to irrevocably terminate and liquidate the Plan; and (v) the Company does not adopt a new plan that would be aggregated with the terminated Plan under Section 409A of the Code if the same employee participated in both plans, at any time within three (3) years following the date the Company takes all necessary action to irrevocably terminate and liquidate the Plan.

SECTION 20. NO ASSIGNMENT

A Participant’s right to the amount credited to his or her account under the Plan shall not be subject in any manner to anticipation, alienation, sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance, attachment or garnishment by creditors of the Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary.

SECTION 21. SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS

The provisions of this Plan shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the Company, its successors and assigns, and the Participant, his or her Beneficiaries, heirs, legal representatives and assigns.

SECTION 22. NO CONTRACT OF EMPLOYMENT

Nothing contained herein shall be construed as a contract of employment between a Participant and the Company, or as a right of the Participant to continue in employment with the Company, or as a limitation of the right of the Company to discharge the Participant at any time, with or without cause.

9

SECTION 23. GOVERNING LAW

This Plan shall be interpreted in a manner consistent with Code Section 409A and the guidance issued thereunder by the Department of the Treasury and the Internal Revenue Service and shall also be subject to and construed in accordance with the provisions of ERISA, where applicable, and otherwise by the laws of the State of Illinois, without regard to the conflict of law provisions of any jurisdiction.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Company, by its duly authorized officer, has caused this Plan to be executed as of the 22nd day of December, 2008.

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.
By:	/s/ BRUCE W. TAYLOR
	Authorized Officer

10

EX-10.29

EXHIBIT 10.29

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

AND

COLE TAYLOR BANK

EXECUTIVE SEVERANCE PLAN

(As Amended and Restated Effective December 31, 2008)

McDermott Will & Emery LLP

Chicago

TABLE OF CONTENTS

		PAGES
SECTION 1		1
Introduction and Purpose		1
SECTION 2		2
Definitions		2
2.1	Bank	2
2.2	Base Pay	2
2.3	Board	2
2.4	Cause	2
2.5	COBRA	2
2.6	Code	2
2.7	Company	2
2.8	Controlled Group Member	2
2.9	Effective Date	3
2.10	Eligible Termination	3
2.11	Employee	3
2.12	Employer	3
2.13	Employment Termination Date	3
2.14	ERISA	3
2.15	Notification Period	3
2.16	Participant	4
2.17	Plan	4
2.18	Plan Year	4
2.19	Release	4
2.20	Severance Pay Benefits	5
2.21	Temporary Employee	5
2.22	Years of Service	5
SECTION 3		6
Eligibility for Participation		6
SECTION 4		7
Plan Benefits		7
4.1	Eligibility for Benefits	7
4.2	Amount of Severance Pay Benefit	8
4.3	Certain Repayments and Forfeitures	8
4.4	Offset for Amounts Due	8
4.5	COBRA Continuation Coverage Benefits	8
4.6	Outplacement Benefits	9
4.7	Incentive Compensation Plan	9
4.8	Financial Planning Assistance	9

-i-

TABLE OF CONTENTS

(continued)

		PAGE
SECTION 5		10
Payment of Benefits		10
5.1	Release	10
5.2	Form of Payment of Severance Pay Benefits	10
SECTION 6		11
Financing Plan Benefits		11
SECTION 7		12
Reemployment		12
SECTION 8		13
Miscellaneous		13
8.1	Information to be Furnished by Participants	13
8.2	Employment Rights	13
8.3	Company’s Decision Final	13
8.4	Evidence	13
8.5	Uniform Rules	13
8.6	Gender and Number	13
8.7	Action by Company	14
8.8	Controlling Laws	14
8.9	Interests Not Transferable	14
8.10	Mistake of Fact	14
8.11	Severability	14
8.12	Withholding	14
8.13	Effect on Other Plans or Agreements	14
8.14	Claims Procedure	15
8.15	Administration	15
8.16	Plan Supplements	15
SECTION 9		16
Amendment and Termination		16
9.1	Amendment and Termination	16
9.2	Notice of Amendment or Termination	16

-ii-

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC.

AND

COLE TAYLOR BANK

EXECUTIVE SEVERANCE PLAN

(As Amended and Restated Effective as of December 31, 2008)

SECTION 1

Introduction and Purpose

Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (the “Company”) has established the Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and Cole Taylor Executive Severance Plan (the “Plan”) to enable the Company to provide severance benefits to eligible Employees of the Company and of its subsidiaries that adopt the Plan in accordance with subsection 2.12 below, whose employment with the Company and such subsidiaries is involuntarily terminated under described circumstances. The Plan asset forth herein is an amendment and complete restatement of the Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and Cole Taylor Bank Severance Plan as in effect immediately prior to the Effective Date, with respect to the groups of eligible Employees described in Section 3 below. Severance benefits for eligible Employees shall be determined exclusively under the Plan.

It is the intent of the Company that the Plan, as set forth herein, constitutes an “employee welfare benefit plan” within the meaning of Section 3(1) of ERISA and complies with the applicable requirements of ERISA. Notwithstanding anything in this plan to the contrary, the Company further intends that to the extent the Plan is subject to Section 409A of the Code, each provision in this Plan shall be interpreted to permit the deferral of compensation in accordance with Section 409A of the Code and any provision that would conflict with such requirements shall not be valid or enforceable.

It is also the intent of the Company that the Plan, as set forth herein, shall comply with Section 111(b) of the Economic Emergency Stabilization Act of 2008 and the related regulatory guidance (“EESA”) as long as said Section applies to the Company and this Plan. For that purpose, if any participant in this Plan is or becomes a “senior executive officer” as defined in said Section, then to the extent that any payment to such Participant under this Plan would constitute part of a “golden parachute payment” that is prohibited under EESA, the benefit payable to the Participant under this Plan shall be reduced to the extent necessary (before any other benefit or payment under any other employee benefit plan or individual agreement) to comply with EESA and preclude any benefit payment prohibited thereunder.

Further, if the Compensation Committee of the Board determines, in its sole and absolute discretion, that a Participant who has received a Severance Pay Benefit or is entitled to any other benefit under the Plan, either committed any action during the Participant’s period of employment with the Employers which would have constituted Cause, or violates any condition or covenant in the Release (as defined below) executed by the Participant in connection with the receipt of benefits under the Plan, then the Company may take whatever actions it deems necessary or desirable in order to rescind any benefits not yet provided and/or to recover the amount paid from the Plan to the Participant, with interest.

1

SECTION 2

Definitions

2.1 Bank

The term “Bank” means Cole Taylor Bank, which is a subsidiary of the Company, a Controlled Group Member, and an Employer under the Plan.

2.2 Base Pay

The term “Base Pay” shall mean a Participant’s base rate of pay on the date of the termination of such Participant’s employment. Overtime pay, shift differential, commissions, bonuses, and other premium pay, and all other allowances and reimbursements, shall not be considered when determining a Participant’s benefits under the Plan.

2.3 Board

The term “Board” means the Board of Directors of the Company

2.4 Cause

The term “Cause” means an Employee’s (i) misconduct as defined in the Human Resources Policy and Procedure Manual, or (ii) failure to comply with established Company policies or the Company’s Code of Conduct.

2.5 COBRA

The term “COBRA” means the federal consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985, as amended.

2.6 Code

The term “Code” means the federal Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

2.7 Company

The term “Company” means Taylor Capital Group, Inc.

2.8 Controlled Group Member

The term “Controlled Group Member” means:

2

(a) any corporation which is a member of a controlled group of corporations (within the meaning of Section 1563(a) of the Code, determined without regard to Sections 1563(a)(y) and 1563(e)(3)(C) thereof) which contains the Company; or

(b) any trade or business (whether or not incorporated) which is under common control with the Company (within the meaning of Section 414(c) of the Code).

2.9 Effective Date

The term “Effective Date means December 31, 2008, the effective date of this amendment and complete restatement of the Plan.

2.10 Eligible Termination

The term “Eligible Termination” has the meaning defined within the first sentence of subsection 4.1 of the Plan as described in Section 1.

2.11 Employee

The term “Employee” means an individual treated by an Employer as its employee for purposes of employment taxes and wage withholding for federal income taxes, regardless of any subsequent reclarification by the Employer or by any governmental agency or court.

2.12 Employer

The term “Employer” means the Company and any other Controlled Group Member which has adopted the Plan for the benefit of its eligible employees with the Company’s consent, all in accordance with the procedures described in subsection 8.7.

2.13 Employment Termination Date

The term “Employment Termination Date” means the day following completion of a Participant’s Notification Period (if any), on which the Participant’s employment with the Employers is terminated as an Eligible Termination.

2.14 ERISA

The term “ERISA” means the federal Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended.

2.15 Notification Period

The term “Notification Period” with respect to any Participant means the period beginning on the day after the Participant is notified by the Company or his Employer that his or her position has been eliminated, or that his or her employment has been terminated in connection with a reduction in force, facility closing, or an event as designated by the Company as a

3

reorganization. There shall be no Notification Period with respect to a Participant’s termination of employment by an Employer due to unsatisfactory job performance (as determined by the appropriate Human Resources manager), unless a Notification Period is authorized with respect to that Participant by a Senior Human Resources Officer.

The minimum Notification Period is four weeks. During the Notification Period, the Company (acting through a Senior Human Resources Officer) has the right to expand the Notification Period (and thus delay the Participant’s Employment Termination Date), with respect to any Participant, in the Company’s discretion, in a manner not inconsistent with applicable law. During the Notification Period, the Participant remains employed with the Employers and continues to be paid his or her current Base Pay (subject to normal withholding for taxes and other deductions) as in effect immediately prior to the Notification Period, but will not receive any merit increases or Success bonuses.

During the Notification Period, the Employer will notify the Participant if he or she is required to report to work. If a Participant resigns during the Notification Period, the Company may, in its discretion, consider the resignation as a voluntary termination rather than an Eligible Termination, and the Participant will not be eligible for benefits under the Plan, unless provision of said benefits is approved in writing by a Senior Human Resources Officer.

During the Notification Period, the Participant must continue to behave in accordance with his or her Employer’s Code of Conduct and comply with other Employer policies.

2.16 Participant

The term “Participant” means an Employee who has satisfied all of the requirements of Section 3 of the Plan.

2.17 Plan

The term “Plan” means this Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and Cole Taylor Bank Severance Plan, as amended and restated effective as of December 31, 2008, as described in Section 1, and as it may thereafter be further amended.

2.18 Plan Year

The term “Plan Year” means the calendar year. The Plan is administered on the basis of the Plan Year.

2.19 Release

The term “Release,” with respect to any Employee, means a form of release provided to the Employee by, and satisfactory to, the Company or his or her Employer in connection with the Employee’s involuntary termination of employment and eligibility for benefits under the Plan.

4

2.20 Severance Pay Benefits

The term “Severance Pay Benefits” means the benefits payable to the Participant pursuant to subsection 4.2 of the Plan.

2.21 Temporary Employee

The term “Temporary Employee” means an Employee designated as such under the Human Resources Policy and Procedures Manual.

2.22 Years of Service

The term “Years of Service” means a Participant’s number of whole years of employment with the Employers while a Participant, during the period beginning on the first date on which becomes a Participant in accordance with Section 3 of the Plan (as modified by Section 7 in the case of reemployment) and ending on his Employment Termination Date (excluding periods between those two dates during which he did not satisfy the requirements of said Section 3); provided, that for purposes of this subsection 2.22 any employment with the Employers while a Participant during the aforementioned period, that is in excess of the Participant’s number of consecutive completed years of such employment, shall be counted as an additional whole year thereof.

5

SECTION 3

Eligibility for Participation

Subject to the conditions and limitations of the Plan and any applicable Supplement to the Plan, each exempt and non-exempt Employee shall become a Participant in the Plan on his date of hire. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the following individuals shall not be eligible to participate in the plan:

(a) An Employee who is not scheduled to work at least twenty (20) hours per week.

(b) An Employee who is covered under an employment or retirement contract or agreement that provides for severance benefits and expressly supersedes the Employers’ severance plans.

(c) An Employee who is a member of a group of Employees subject to a collective bargaining agreement between one or more of the Employers and an employee representative (provided that severance benefits were the subject of good faith bargaining between the Employer(s) and such representative and the agreement does not provide for participation in this Plan by said group of Employees).

(d) A Temporary Employee

(e) An Employee who is not a Group Senior Vice President, Executive Vice President, President or Chief Executive Officer of the Company or the Bank.

6

SECTION 4

Plan Benefits

4.1 Eligibility for Benefits

Subject to the conditions and limitations of the Plan and any applicable Supplement to the Plan, a Participant whose employment with all of the Employers is involuntarily terminated following completion of any applicable Notification Period, for a reason other than for Cause, due to (1) elimination of his or her position, (2) a reduction in force, (3) a facility closing, (4) an event designated by the Company as a reorganization, or (5) unsatisfactory job performance (as determined by a Senior Human Resources Officer, and only after completing at least six months of continuous service as an Employee), and who timely executes a proper Release provided by his Employer, will be entitled to receive a benefit determined in accordance with the formula set forth in subsection 4.2 below or in any applicable Supplement to the Plan; provided, however:

(a) Any Participant who, at the time of his or her termination, is treated as an inactive Employee by an Employer (other than as required by the federal Family and Medical Leave Act, as amended), and is eligible to receive any form of disability or worker’s compensation insurance or salary continuation because of disability shall not be entitled to receive any benefit under the Plan.

(b) A Participant whose employment with the Employers is terminated in conjunction with the sale or transfer (whether of stock or assets) of all or any part of an Employer who is offered a comparable position with the acquirer of the part or all of the Employer sold or transferred, prior to the date on which the Participant executes a Release, shall not be eligible to receive benefits under the Plan.

(c) If, in connection with an agreement between an Employer and another entity to provide certain services previously performed by employees of the Employer (“outsourced services”), a Participant is offered a comparable position by such other entity prior to the date on which the Participant executes a Release, the Participant shall not be eligible to receive any benefits under the Plan.

(d) If the Participant is also a participant in the Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and Cole Taylor Bank Change In Control Plan who becomes entitled to severance benefits under that plan, then that Participant shall not be entitled to receive any benefits under this Plan.

For purposes of this subsection 4.1, the Company shall have the sole discretion to determine whether a new position is “comparable” to a prior position, and may take into consideration any factor or factors it deems desirable, including, but not limited to, the geographic locale in which the position is offered, the duration of the position, the scope and level of responsibility of the position, and the compensation offered to the person holding such position.

7

4.2 Amount of Severance Pay Benefit

Each Participant shall be eligible to receive a Severance Pay Benefit equal to the total amounts determined in accordance with subparagraph (a) or (b) below, as applicable to the Participant’s job classification as of his or her Employment Termination Date with respect to the Participant’s includable Years of Service in all such classifications:

(a) For Group Senior Vice Presidents, a benefit of twenty-six (26) weeks of Base Pay, plus two (2) weeks of Base Pay for each Year of Service up to thirty-six (36) weeks, with a maximum benefit of thirty-six (36) weeks of Base Pay; or

(b) For Executive Vice Presidents, a benefit of twelve (12) months of Base Pay.

In addition, in the event that a Participant has attained age 50 years prior to his or her Employment Termination Date, the Participant shall be eligible to receive an additional Severance Pay Benefit of four (4) weeks of Base Pay, subject to the other applicable conditions of this Section 4, and subject to the applicable maximum Severance Pay Benefits in subparagraph (a) or (b) above, whichever is applicable to the Participant.

4.3 Certain Repayments and Forfeitures

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, any Participant who accepts benefits under the Plan shall reimburse the Employers for the full amount of any benefits the Participant received under the Plan if the Participant subsequently discloses any of the Employers’ trade secrets, violates any written covenants between such Participant and the Employers (other than any covenant in the Release), or otherwise engages in conduct that may adversely affect the Employers’ reputation or business relations. In addition, any Participant described in the preceding sentence shall forfeit any right to benefits under the Plan which have not yet been paid.

4.4 Offset for Amounts Due

The Company reserves the right to reduce the amount of benefits payable to a Participant under the Plan by the amount, if any, that a participant owes the Employers.

4.5 COBRA Continuation Coverage Benefits

If a Participant elects to continue health insurance coverage under COBRA for the Participant and for the Participant’s “Qualified Beneficiaries” (as defined in COBRA), the Employers will fully subsidize the premium for such continuation coverage during the applicable subsidization period. The “applicable subsidization period” shall be eighteen (18) months for Executive Vice Presidents, and for all other Participants shall be a number of months equal to the number of whole months (not to exceed nine) of

8

their respective Severance Pay Benefits. After the end of the applicable subsidization period, the Participant will be required to pay the full premium for any remaining COBRA continuation coverage. A Participant’s applicable subsidization period shall count toward the period for which the Employers must offer COBRA coverage to the Participant. If a Participant who has incurred an Eligible Termination dies before all COBRA subsidy payments due under this subsection 4.5 with respect to the Participant have been made, such payments shall continue to be made to the Participant’s surviving Qualified Beneficiaries who have properly elected COBRA continuation coverage, through the end of the Participant’s applicable subsidization period.

4.6 Outplacement Benefits

The Employers will provide outplacement services to eligible terminated Participants described in subsection 4.1 above, for a period of up to twelve (12) months; provided, that the outplacement provider may in its discretion provide a choice of a pool of hours or a number of months of outplacement services.

4.7 Incentive Compensation Plan

Stock options and restricted stock awards which have been granted to a Participant shall vest in accordance with provisions of the applicable award notification documents.

4.8 Financial Planning Assistance

Participants who are Executive Vice Presidents at their Employment Termination Date shall be eligible to receive financial planning assistance paid by their respective Employers at a cost not to exceed a net after-tax amount of $2,500.

9

SECTION 5

Payment of Benefits

5.1 Release

No benefits under the Plan shall be payable to any Participant unless and until such Participant (i) within 21 or 45 days (as required by applicable law) after being presented with a Release by the Company, executes the Release and delivers the executed Release to the Group Senior Vice President of Human Capital of the Company and (ii) does not revoke the Release during the 7-day period beginning on the day after delivering the executed Release to the Company.

5.2 Form of Payment of Severance Pay Benefits

Subject to the conditions and limitations of any applicable Supplement to the Plan, Severance Pay Benefits shall be paid in a single lump sum payment, on the next regular pay date after the later to occur of (i) the Participant’s Employment Termination Date and (ii) the completion of the 7-day period referenced in subsection 5.1 above without the Participant having revoked the Release referenced in said subsection during that 7-day period. In the event of a Participant’s death before the Participant receives all of the Severance Pay Benefits to which the Participant otherwise would be entitled under the Plan, payment of the Participant’s Severance Pay Benefit shall be made in a lump sum to the Participant’s surviving spouse, if any, or if there is no surviving spouse, to the Participant’s estate (if any).

10

SECTION 6

Financing Plan Benefits

All benefits payable under this plan shall be paid directly by the Employers out of their general assets. The Employers shall not be required to segregate on their books or otherwise any amount to be used for the payment of benefits under this Plan.

11

SECTION 7

Reemployment

Except as provided in any applicable Supplement to the Plan, if a prior Employee who was a Participant is reemployed by an Employer and subsequently is terminated and becomes entitled to benefits under this Plan, any benefit payable to such participant as a result of the subsequent termination will be determined based on the Participant’s Years of Service calculated from (i) the Participant’s most recent date of employment if the Participant had been reemployed more than a year after his or her prior termination of employment or had received severance benefits under this Plan or under another severance plan of the Employers at his prior termination of employment, or (ii) in the case of any other Participant, his or her “adjusted reemployment date” (as applied under Company reemployment practice).

12

SECTION 8

Miscellaneous

8.1 Information to be Furnished by Participants

Each Participant must furnish to the Company such documents, evidence, data or other information as the Company considers necessary or desirable for the purpose of administering the Plan. Benefits under the Plan for each Participant are provided on the condition that he or she furnish full, true and complete data, evidence or other information, and that he or she will promptly sign any document reasonably related to the administration of the Plan requested by the Company.

8.2 Employment Rights

The Plan does not constitute a contract of employment and participation in the Plan will not give a Participant the right to be rehired or retained in the employ of the Employers on a full-time, part-time or any other basis or to be retrained by the Employers, nor will participation in the Plan give any Participant any right or claim to any benefit under the Plan, unless such right or claim has specifically accrued under the terms of the Plan.

8.3 Company’s Decision Final

The Company has the discretionary authority to construe and interpret the provisions of the Plan and make factual determinations thereunder, including the power to determine the rights or eligibility of Employees as Participants and the amounts of their benefits under the Plan, and to remedy ambiguities, inconsistencies, or omissions. Any interpretation of the Plan and any decision on any matter within the discretion of the Company made in good faith is binding on all persons. Benefits under the Plan will be paid only if the Company determines in its discretion that a Participant or beneficiary is entitled to them.

8.4 Evidence

Evidence required of anyone under the Plan may be by certificate, affidavit, document or other information which the person relying thereon considers pertinent and reliable, and must be signed, made, or presented by the proper party or parties.

8.5 Uniform Rules

In managing the Plan, the Company will apply uniform rules to all Employees and Participants similarly situated.

8.6 Gender and Number

Where the context admits, words in the masculine gender shall include the feminine and neuter genders, the plural shall include the singular and the singular shall include the plural.

13

8.7 Action by Company

Any action required of or permitted by the Company or an Employer under the Plan shall be by resolution of its Board, by resolution of a duly authorized committee of its Board, or by a person or persons authorized by resolutions of its Board or such committee.

8.8 Controlling Laws

Except to the extent superseded by ERISA, the laws of Illinois shall be controlling in all matters relating to the Plan.

8.9 Interests Not Transferable

Subject to subsection 4.4, the interests of persons entitled to benefits under the Plan are not subject to their debts or other obligations and, except as may be required by the tax withholding provisions of the Code or any state’s income tax act, or pursuant to an agreement between a Participant and the Company, may not be voluntarily sold, transferred, alienated, assigned or encumbered.

8.10 Mistake of Fact

Any mistake of fact or misstatement of fact shall be corrected when it becomes known and proper adjustment made by reason thereof.

8.11 Severability

In the event any provision of the Plan shall be held to be illegal or invalid for any reason, such illegality or invalidity shall not affect the remaining parts of the Plan, and the Plan shall be construed and enforced as if such illegal or invalid provisions had never been contained in the Plan.

8.12 Withholding

The Company reserves the right to withhold from any amounts payable under this plan all federal, state, city and local taxes as shall be legally required and any applicable insurance or health coverage premiums, as well as any other amounts authorized or required by Company policy including, but not limited to, withholding for garnishments and judgments or other court orders. Any such withholdings shall be in accordance with applicable administrative procedures established by the Company.

8.13 Effect on Other Plans or Agreements

Payments or benefits provided to a Participant under any company stock, deferred compensation, savings, retirement or other employee benefit plan are governed solely by the terms of such plan. Any obligations or duties of a participant pursuant to any non-competition or other agreement with the Company shall be governed solely by the terms of such agreement and shall not be affected by the terms of this Plan.

14

8.14 Claims Procedure

It is not necessary that a participant apply for benefits under the Plan (except for COBRA under subsection 4.5 above). However, if a Participant wishes to file a claim for benefits, such claim must be in writing and filed with the company within 90 days after the date such Participant should have received such benefits. If a claim is denied, the Company will furnish the claimant with written notice of its decision, setting forth the specific reasons for the denial, references to the Plan provisions on which the denial is based, additional information necessary to perfect the claim, if any, and a description of the procedure for review of the denial. A claimant may request a review of the denial of a claim for benefits by filing a written application with the Company within 60 days after he or she receives notice of the denial. Such a claimant is entitled to review pertinent Plan documents and submit written issues and comments to the Company. The Company, within a reasonable time after it receives a request for review, will furnish the claimant with written notice of its decision, setting forth the specific reasons for the decision and references to the pertinent Plan provisions on which the decision is based. If the claimant subsequently wishes to file a claim against the Plan, any legal action must be filed within 90 days after the Company’s final decision.

8.15 Administration

The Plan is administered by the Company. The Company, from time to time, may adopt such rules and regulations as may be necessary or desirable for the proper and efficient administration of the Plan and as are consistent with the terms of the Plan. The Company, from time to time, may also appoint such individuals to act as the Company’s representatives as the Company considers necessary or desirable for the effective administration of the Plan. In administering the Plan, the Company shall have the discretionary authority to construe and interpret the provisions of the Plan and make factual determinations thereunder, including the authority to determine the eligibility of Employees and the amount of benefits payable under the Plan. Any notice or document required to be given or filed with the Company will be properly given or filed if delivered or mailed, by registered mail, postage prepaid, to the Company headquarters at its then-current mailing address.

8.16 Plan Supplements

The provisions of the Plan may be modified by Supplements to the plan. The terms and provisions of each Supplement are a part of the Plan and supersede the provisions of the Plan to the extent necessary to eliminate inconsistencies between the Plan and the Supplement.

15

SECTION 9

Amendment and Termination

9.1 Amendment and Termination

The Company reserves the right, on a case-by-case basis or on a general basis, to amend the Plan at any time and to alter, reduce or eliminate any benefit under the Plan (in whole or in part) at any time, or to terminate the Plan at any time in its entirety or as to any class or classes of covered Employees (including former or retired Employees), without prior notice. Any amendment or termination of the Plan by the Company shall be made in accordance with the procedures set forth in subsection 8.7. Any changes or modifications to the benefits payable to a separating Participant from the benefits provided in this Plan, without amendment of the Plan as described above in this subsection 9.1, must be approved, in writing, by the Group Senior Vice President of Human Capital of the Company or the President of the Company.

9.2 Notice of Amendment or Termination

Participants will be notified of any material amendment or termination of the Plan within a reasonable time in accordance with applicable law.

*      *        *

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned duly authorized member of the Compensation Committee of the Board has caused the foregoing Plan to be executed on behalf of the Company this 29^th day of December, 2008.

/s/ MELVIN PEARL

On Behalf of the Compensation Committee as Aforesaid

16

EX-10.30

EXHIBIT 10.30

TAYLOR CAPITAL GROUP, INC. SENIOR OFFICER

CHANGE IN CONTROL SEVERANCE PLAN

INTRODUCTION

The Board of Directors of Taylor Capital Group, Inc. considers the maintenance of a sound management to be essential to protecting and enhancing the best interests of the Company (as hereinafter defined), the Bank (as hereinafter defined), and the Company’s stockholders. In this context, the Company recognizes that the possibility of a Change in Control (as hereinafter defined) may exist from time to time, and that this possibility, and the uncertainty and questions it may raise among management, may result in the departure or distraction of management personnel to the detriment of the Company and its stockholders and the Bank. Accordingly, the Board (as hereinafter defined) has determined that appropriate steps should be taken to encourage the continued attention and dedication of members of the Company’s and Bank’s senior management to their assigned duties without the distraction which may arise from the possibility of a Change in Control of the Company or the Bank.

This Plan does not alter the status of Participants (as hereinafter defined) as at-will employees of the Company or Bank. Just as Participants remain free to leave the employ of the Company or Bank at any time, so too do the Company and the Bank retain their right to terminate the employment of Participants without notice, at any time, for any reason. However, the Company believes that, both prior to and at the time a Change in Control is anticipated or occurring, it is necessary to have the continued attention and dedication of Participants to their assigned duties without distraction, and this Plan is intended as an inducement for Participants’ willingness to continue to serve as employees of the Company or Bank (subject, however, to either party’s right to terminate such employment at any time). Therefore, should a Participant still be an employee of the Company or Bank at such time, the Company agrees that such Participant shall receive the severance benefits hereinafter set forth in the event the Participant’s employment with the Company or Bank terminates subsequent to a Change in Control under the circumstances described below.

ARTICLE I

ESTABLISHMENT OF PLAN

Effective December 31, 2008, the Company hereby establishes Taylor Capital Group, Inc. Senior Officer Change in Control Severance Plan, as set forth in this document (the “Plan”).

ARTICLE II

DEFINITIONS

As used herein the following words and phrases shall have the following respective meanings unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.

(a) “Affiliate” means, with respect to any person, any individual, corporation, partnership, association, joint-stock company, trust, unincorporated association or other entity (other than such person) that directly or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, controls, or is controlled by, or is under common control with that person.

(b) “Annual Bonus” means the gross, annual amount payable to a Participant for the fiscal year of the Company ending immediately preceding the Effective Date, or, if higher, the annual amount payable to the Participant for the fiscal year of the Company ending immediately preceding the date when notice of termination of the Participant’s employment was given, under the Company’s annual incentive compensation (“Success”) program; provided, that in either case such annual Success bonus shall be annualized (based on the target bonus for the year) in the event the Participant was not employed for the entire fiscal year with respect to which such bonus was paid.

(c) “Bank” means Cole Taylor Bank, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company.

(d) “Board” means the Board of Directors of the Company.

(e) “Cause” means (1) the Participant has committed an act of dishonesty that results, or is intended to result, in material gain or personal enrichment of the Participant or has, or is intended to have, a material detrimental effect on the reputation or business of the Company or the Bank; (2) the Participant has committed an act or acts of fraud, moral turpitude or constituting a felony (other than relating to the operation of a motor vehicle); (3) any material breach by the Participant of any provision of this Plan that, if curable, has not been cured by the Participant within thirty (30) days of written notice of such breach from the Company or the Bank; (4) an intentional act or willful gross negligence on the part of the Participant that has, or is intended to have, a material, detrimental effect on the reputation or business of the Company or the Bank; (5) the Participant’s refusal, after thirty (30) days written notice thereof, to perform specific reasonable directives from the Board or the Board of Directors of the Bank that are reasonably consistent with the scope and nature of his duties and responsibilities; or (6) the Participant being barred or prohibited by any governmental authority or agency from holding his or her current position at either the Company or the Bank. The decision to terminate a Participant’s employment for Cause, to take other action or to take no action in response to any occurrence shall be in the sole and exclusive discretion of the Compensation Committee of the Board. No act or failure to act shall be considered “intentional” unless it is done, or omitted to be done, by the Participant in bad faith or without reasonable belief that the Participant’s action or omission was in the best interests of the Company or the Bank; and provided further, that no act or omission shall constitute Cause hereunder absent such a finding by the Compensation Committee of the Board.

(f) “Change in Control” means the occurrence of any of the following events:

(i) A change in the ownership of the Company or the Bank. A change in the ownership of the Company or the Bank shall occur on the day that any one person, or more than one person acting as a Group, except for the Taylor Family, acquires ownership of stock of the Company or the Bank that, together with all other stock held by such person or Group, constitutes more than fifty percent (50%) of the total fair market value or total voting power of the stock of the Company or the Bank.

-2-

(ii) A change in the effective control of the Company or the Bank. A change in the effective control of the Company or the Bank occurs on the earlier of the date that a majority of the members of the Board or the Bank’s Board of Directors is replaced during any twelve (12) month period by directors whose appointment or election is not endorsed by a majority of the members of the Board or the Bank’s Board of Directors prior to the date of the appointment or election; provided, however, that, if one person, or more than one person acting as a Group, is considered to effectively control the Company or the Bank, the acquisition of additional control of the Company or the Bank by the same person or persons is not considered a change in the effective control of the Company or the Bank.

(iii) A change in the ownership of a substantial portion of the Company’s or the Bank’s assets. A change in the ownership of a substantial portion of the Company’s or the Bank’s assets occurs on the date that any one person, or more than one person acting as a Group, acquires (or has acquire during the twelve (12) month period ending on the date of the most recent acquisition by such person) assets from the Company or the Bank or the Bank that have a total Gross Fair Market Value (as defined below) equal to or more than fifty percent (50%) of the total Gross Fair Market Value of all of the assets of the Company or the Bank or the Bank immediately prior to such acquisition or acquisitions; provided, however, that, a transfer of assets by the Company or the Bank or the Bank is not treated as a change in the ownership of such assets if the assets are transferred to:

(1) a stockholder of the Company or the Bank (immediately before the asset transfer) in exchange for or with respect to its stock; or

(2) an entity, 50% or more of the total value or voting power of which is owned, directly or indirectly, by the Company or the Bank.

(g) “Gross Fair Market Value” means the value of the assets of the Company or the Bank (as applicable), or the value of the assets being disposed or, determined without regard to any liabilities associated with such assets; and

(h) “Group” shall have the meaning ascribed to such term in Sections (i)(5)(v)(B), (vi)(D) or (vii)(C), as applicable, of Treasury Regulation Section 1.409A-3.

(i) “Change in Control Period” means the continuous period commencing on the Effective Date and ending on the first anniversary of the Effective Date.

(j) “COBRA Continuation Coverage” means the medical, dental and vision care benefits that the Participant and his Qualifying Family Members elect and are eligible to receive upon the Participant’s termination of employment with the Employers pursuant to Section 4980B of the Code, and Section 601 et.al. of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended. For this purpose, an Executive’s Qualifying Family Members are his spouse and his dependent children to

-3-

the extent they are eligible for, and elect to receive, continuation coverage under such Section 4980B and Section 601 et.al. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, COBRA Continuation Coverage under this Agreement shall terminate for any individual when it terminates under the terms of the applicable benefit plan of the Company in accordance with such Section 4980B and Section 601 et.al.

(k) “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and the regulations issued thereunder.

(l) “Compensation” means the sum of (i) the Participant’s gross, annual base salary at the greater of the rate in effect on the Effective Date of the Change in Control or the rate in effect immediately prior to the date when notice of termination of the Participant’s employment was given and (ii) the Annual Bonus. Compensation, for purposes of applying the multiplier in subparagraph 4.2(a)(1) of this Agreement, does not include any accrued balances in the 1997 Long Term Incentive Plan (or its successor) or any other compensation program in which the Participant participates.

(m) “Effective Date” means the date on which a Change in Control occurs.

(n) “ERISA” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended, and the regulations issued thereunder.

(o) “Good Reason” means the occurrence of any of the following events with respect to a Participant, unless, (i) such event occurs with the Participant’s express prior written consent, (ii) the event is an isolated, insubstantial or inadvertent action or failure to act which was not in bad faith is remedied by the Company promptly after receipt of notice thereof given by the Participant, (iii) the event occurs in connection with the termination of the Participant’s employment for Cause, disability or death or (iv) the event occurs in connection with the Participant’s voluntary termination of employment other than due to the occurrence of one of the following events:

(i) the assignment to the Participant by the Company or the Bank of any duties which are materially and adversely inconsistent with, or are a material diminution of, the Participant’s positions, duty, title, office, responsibility and status with the Company or the Bank, including without limitation, any diminution of the Participant’s position or responsibility in the decision or management processes of the Company or the Bank, or any removal of the Participant from, or any failure to reelect the Participant to, any of such positions;

(ii) a material reduction by the Company or the Bank in the Participant’s rate of base salary or bonus opportunity as in effect on the Effective Date or as the same may be increased from time to time during the term of the Agreement;

(iii) a change in the Participant’s principal office to a location outside of Cook County, Lake County, or Dupage County, Illinois (which is considered to be a material geographic change for purposes of Section 409A of the Code);

(iv) a material breach of the terms of this Plan by the Company or the Bank; or

-4-

(v) any failure by any successor or assignee of the Company to continue this Agreement in full force and effect.

Anything herein to the contrary notwithstanding, the Participant shall be required to give written notice to the Board that the Participant believes an event has occurred that constitutes a Good Reason event within ninety (90) days of the initial occurrence, which written notice shall specify the particular act or acts, on the basis of which the Participant intends to so terminate the Participant’s employment, and the Company shall then be given the opportunity, within thirty (30) days of its receipt of such notice, to cure said event. Participant’s termination shall not be considered to be a termination for Good Reason unless such termination occurs during the Change in Control Period.

(p) “Participant” means an individual who has met, and at the time of a Change in Control continues to meet, the requirements of Article III below.

(q) “Separation Benefits” means the benefits described in subparagraph 4.2(a) below.

(r) “Taylor Family” means (i) Iris Taylor and the Estate of Sidney J. Taylor, (ii) a descendant (or a spouse of a descendant) of Sidney J. Taylor and Iris Taylor, (iii) any estate, trust, guardianship or custodianship for the primary benefit of any individual described in (i) or (ii) above, or (iv) a proprietorship, partnership, limited liability company, or corporation controlled directly or indirectly by one or more individuals or entities described in (i), (ii), or (iii) above.

ARTICLE III

ELIGIBILITY

3.1 Participation. Participants in the Plan are Group Senior Vice Presidents or Executive Vice Presidents of the Company or of the Bank on or after December 31, 2008 who have been designated as Participants herein by the Compensation Committee of the Board in writing; and provided that such a Participant will not be entitled to Separation Benefits if he or she is not a Group Senior Vice President or Executive Vice President at the time of the Change in Control; provided, further that any reduction of a Participant’s position prior to, but in connection with, a Change in Control shall be of no effect for purposes of this Section 3.1. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Participant shall not be entitled to receive Separation Benefits (or any other benefits under the Plan), if the Participant has entered into an agreement with the Company providing severance benefits (whether or not in connection with a Change in Control) which has not been waived by the Participant or terminated by the Company.

3.2 Duration of Participation. A Participant shall only cease to be a Participant in the Plan as a result of an amendment or termination of the Plan complying with Article VI of the Plan, or when he or she ceases to be an employee or no longer qualifies as a Participant under Section 3.1, unless, at the time he or she ceases to be an employee or no longer qualifies as a Participant under Section 3.1, such Participant is entitled to payment of a Separation Benefit as provided in the Plan or there has been an event or occurrence constituting Good Reason that would enable the Participant to terminate his or her employment and receive a Separation

-5-

Benefit. A Participant entitled to payment of a Separation Benefit or any other amounts under the Plan shall remain a Participant in the Plan until the full amount of the Separation Benefit and any other amounts payable under the Plan have been paid to the Participant.

ARTICLE IV

SEPARATION BENEFITS

4.1 Terminations of Employment Which Give Rise to Separation Benefits Under This Plan. A Participant shall be entitled to Separation Benefits as set forth in Section 4.2 below if, at any time following a Change in Control and prior to the first anniversary of the Change in Control, the Participant’s employment is terminated (a) involuntarily for any reason other than Cause, death, Disability or retirement under a mandatory retirement policy of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or (b) by the Participant after the occurrence of an event giving rise to Good Reason. For purposes of this Plan, any purported termination by the Company or by the Participant shall be communicated by written Notice of Termination to the other in accordance with Section 7.5 hereof.

4.2 Separation Benefits.

(a) If a Participant’s employment is terminated under circumstances which entitle the Participant to Separation Benefits under this Section 4.2, then the Company or Bank:

(1) shall pay to the Participant in a single sum within thirty (30) days after the termination of employment (or, to the extent required to comply with the provisions of Section 409A of the Code restricting payments to a “specified employee,” six months after the termination of employment) an amount equal to: (i) two (2) times the Participant’s annual Compensation, in the case of an Executive Vice President, or (ii) one and one half (1.5) times the Participant’s annual Compensation, in the case of a Group Senior Vice President;

(2) for a period of not more than eighteen consecutive months beginning with the date of the Participant’s termination of employment, the Company or Bank shall provide, at no cost to the Participant and his Qualifying Family Members, COBRA Continuation Coverage; and

(3) the Company or Bank shall provide twelve months of executive level outplacement assistance benefits beginning with the date of the Participant’s termination of employment through a provider of the Company’s or Bank’s choosing.

(b) If the Participant’s employment is terminated by the Participant during the Change in Control Period for any reason other than a Good Reason, or if the Company or Bank shall terminate the Participant’s employment during the Change in Control Period due to Cause, or due to the Participant’s death or the Participant’s disability which renders him unable to perform the essential functions of the position, this Plan shall not impose any obligation on the Company or Bank to the Participant hereunder.

-6-

(c) For purposes of the Plan, the Participant’s employment shall not be considered to have been terminated by the Company or Bank if the Participant is offered employment by a successor to the Company or Bank or its business or assets or by an Affiliate or a successor to an Affiliate or its business or assets, on terms and conditions that in the aggregate are reasonably comparable in economic value (as determined by the Company in its sole and absolute discretion) to the Participant’s terms and conditions of employment with the Company or Bank (including this Plan).

(d) If any payment or benefit under the Plan, either alone or together with any other payment, benefit, transfer of property, or acceleration of vesting or payment, which a Participant receives or has a right to receive from any person or entity (“Total Payments”), would constitute a nondeductible “excess parachute payment” (as defined in Section 280G of the Code) or nondeductible “employee remuneration” under Section 162(m) of the Code, such payment or benefit under the Plan shall be reduced (but not below zero) to the largest amount as will result in no portion of the Total Payments being nondeductible under the Code. The Company agrees to undertake such reasonable efforts as it may determine in its sole discretion to prevent any payment or benefit under the Plan from constituting a nondeductible payment, provided that neither the Company nor the Bank is obligated to incur additional cost in order to make a payment nondeductible. The determination of any reduction under the preceding sentences shall be made by the Company in good faith, and such determination shall be binding on the Participant. The reduction provided by the first sentence of this subparagraph (d) shall apply only if, after reduction for any applicable federal excise tax imposed by Section 4999 of the Code and federal income tax imposed by the Code, the total payment accruing to the Participants would be less than the amount of the Total Payments as reduced under said sentence and after reduction for federal income taxes.

(e) The provisions of this Article IV shall be applicable with respect to an eligible termination of employment that occurs after a Change in Control has occurred, but not prior thereto.

4.3 Other Benefits. Nothing in this Plan shall prevent or limit a Participant’s continuing or future participation in any other non-severance plan, program, policy or practice of the Company, Bank or any Affiliate for which the Participant may qualify, nor shall anything in this Plan limit or otherwise affect the rights of the Company, Bank or the Participant under any other non-severance plan, program, policy, practice, contract or agreement to which the Company, Bank or any Affiliate may be a party. Any amounts payable or rights or benefits furnished to the Participant under any such non-severance plan, program, policy, practice, contract or agreement of, or with, the Company, Bank or any of its Affiliates at or subsequent to the date of the Participant’s termination of employment, shall be payable in accordance with the terms of such plan, program, policy, practice, contract or agreement and without regard to the Plan, except as explicitly modified by the Plan. Amounts payable in respect of the Plan shall not be taken into account with respect to any other non-severance employee benefit plan or arrangement. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, benefits payable to a Participant under Section 4.2 hereof shall be in lieu of benefits under any other severance plan, program, policy, or practice of the Company, Bank or any Affiliate.

-7-

4.4 Mitigation; Release. A Participant shall not be obligated to seek other employment or take any other action by way of mitigation of the amounts payable to the Participant under the Plan, and the amount payable under the Plan shall not be reduced whether or not the Participant obtains other employment. The Company’s obligation to make the payment provided for in the Plan and otherwise to perform its obligations hereunder shall not be affected by any set-off, counterclaim, recoupment, defense or other claim, right or action which the Company or the Bank or its Affiliates may have against the Participant or others. In consideration for the protection and benefits provided for under the Plan, each Participant agrees to execute a general release, in a form to be provided by the Company, of any claims the Participant may otherwise have against the Company, the Bank and any Affiliate that the Participant might otherwise assert (other than pursuant to any of the other plans, programs, etc., specifically described in Sections 4.2 or 4.3 hereof). The Company’s and Bank’s obligations under the Plan are conditioned on the Participant providing such release to the Company at the time and in the form requested by the Company. No benefits under the Plan shall be payable to any Participant unless and until such Participant (i) within 21 or 45 days (as required by applicable law) after being presented with such a release by the Company, executes the release and delivers the executed release to the Group Senior Vice President of Human Capital of the Company and (ii) does not revoke the Release during the 7-day period beginning on the day after delivering the executed release to the Company.

ARTICLE V

SUCCESSORS

5.1 Successor to Company or Bank. This Plan shall bind any successor of the Company or the Bank, its assets or its businesses (whether direct or indirect, by purchase, merger, consolidation or otherwise), in the same manner and to the same extent that the Company or the Bank would be obligated under this Plan if no succession had taken place. In the case of any transaction in which a successor would not by the foregoing provision or by operation of law be bound by this Plan, the Company shall require such successor expressly and unconditionally to assume and agree to perform the Company’s or Bank’s (as the case may be) obligations under this Plan, in the same manner and to the same extent that the Company or the Bank would be required to perform if no such succession had taken place. The terms “Company” and “Bank,” as used in this Plan, shall mean the Company and Bank, respectively, as hereinbefore defined and any successor or assignee to the business or assets thereof which by reason hereof becomes bound by this Plan.

5.2 Successor to Participant. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Plan, in the event of a Participant’s death following an eligible termination of his or her employment with the Company or Bank during the Change in Control Period under circumstances described in Section 4.1 hereof, (i) if the Participant’s death shall have occurred prior to the payment of the lump sum amount set forth in subparagraph 4.2(a)(1) above, such amount shall thereafter be paid to the Participant’s estate, and (ii) if the Participant’s death shall have occurred prior to the end of the 18 month period described in subparagraph 4.2(a)(2) above, the Company or Bank will continue to provide at no cost COBRA Continuation Coverage to the Participant’s Qualifying Family Members (but only to the extent a Qualifying Family Member is being provided such coverage at the time of the Participant’s death) for the remainder of such 18 month period, subject to the limitations set forth in Section 2(j) above.

-8-

ARTICLE VI

AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

6.1 Amendment or Termination. The Board (or any Committee of the Board to which the board has delegated this authority in writing) may amend or terminate this Plan at any time, including amending the eligibility to participate in the Plan of employees who are not existing Participants; provided, that this Plan may not be amended or terminated in a manner that reduces the amounts or types of benefits made available under the Plan, or otherwise materially adversely affects the rights of Participants under the Plan as of the date of the amendment or termination without two (2) years’ advance written notice of such amendment or termination (including modifying the eligibility of employees who are already Participants to participate in the Plan).

6.2 Procedure for Extension, Amendment or Termination. Any amendment or termination of this Plan by the Board (or by any duly authorized committee of the Board) in accordance with this Article VI shall be made by action of the Board (or such committee) in accordance with the Company’s charter and by-laws and applicable law.

ARTICLE VII

MISCELLANEOUS

7.1 Default in Payment. Any payment not made within ten (10) days after it is due in accordance with this Plan shall thereafter bear interest, compounded annually, at the prime rate from time to time in effect at the Bank or any successor thereto.

7.2 No Assignment. No interest of any Participant or spouse of any Participant or any other beneficiary under this Plan, or any right to receive payment hereunder, shall be subject in any manner to sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, attachment, garnishment, or other alienation or encumbrance of any kind, nor may such interest or right to receive a payment or distribution be taken, voluntarily or involuntarily, for the satisfaction of the obligations or debts of, or other claims against, a Participant or spouse of a Participant or other beneficiary, including for alimony.

7.3 Disputes. Any dispute related to the interpretation or enforcement of the Plan shall be enforceable only by arbitration in Cook County, Illinois (or such other metropolitan area to which the Company’s or Bank’s principal executive officers may be relocated if such relocation does not result in Good Reason for a Participant to terminate employment), in accordance with the commercial arbitration rules then in effect of the American Arbitration Association, before a panel of three arbitrators, one of whom shall be selected by the Company, the second of whom shall be selected by the Participant and the third of whom shall be selected by the other two arbitrators. In the absence of the American Arbitration Association, or if for any reason arbitration under the arbitration rules of the American Arbitration Association cannot be initiated, or if one of the parties fails or refuses to select an arbitrator, or if the arbitrators selected by the Company and the Executive cannot agree on the selection of the third arbitrator within seven days after

-9-

such time as the Company and the Executive have each been notified of the selection of the other’s arbitrator, the necessary arbitrator or arbitrators shall be selected by the presiding judge of the court of general jurisdiction in the metropolitan area where arbitration under this Section would otherwise have been conducted. The arbitrators shall award to the Participant his or her reasonable legal fees and expenses in connection with any arbitration proceeding hereunder if (i) the arbitration is commenced by the Company, and the Company has no reasonable basis for initiating such proceeding, or (ii) the arbitration is commenced by the Participant, and the Participant prevails on the Participant’s claim in the arbitration proceeding. The arbitrators shall award to the Company its legal fees and expenses incurred in connection with any arbitration proceeding hereunder if the arbitration proceeding is commenced by the Participant, and the Participant has no reasonable basis for initiating such proceeding. The parties agree that the arbitration panel shall construe this paragraph to determine whether either party is entitled to recover its cost and fees hereunder. Any award entered by the arbitrators shall be formal, binding and nonappealable and judgment may be entered thereon by any party in accordance with applicable law in any court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision shall be specifically enforceable .

7.4 Effect on Other Plans, Agreements and Benefits. Except to the extent expressly set forth herein, any benefit or compensation to which a Participant is entitled under any agreement between the Participant and the Company or any of its Affiliates or under any plan maintained by the Company or any of its Affiliates in which the Participant participates or participated shall not be modified or lessened in any way, but shall be payable according to the terms of the applicable plan or agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any benefits received by a Participant pursuant to this Plan shall be in lieu of any severance benefits to which the Participant would otherwise be entitled under any general severance policy or other severance plan maintained by the Company.

7.5 Notice. For the purpose of this Plan, notices and all other communications provided for in this Plan shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly given and effective when actually delivered or mailed by United States registered mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, addressed to the Company at its corporate headquarters address, and to the Participant (at the last address of the Participant on the Company’s or Bank’s books and records), provided, that all notices to the Company shall be directed to the attention of the Board with a copy to the Secretary.

7.6 Employment Status. This Plan does not constitute a contract of employment or impose on the Participant or the Company or any of its Affiliates any obligation for the Participant to remain an employee or change the status of the Participant’s employment or the policies of the Company and its Affiliates regarding termination of employment.

7.7 Governing Law. The Plan shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Illinois, except as follows:

It is the intent of the Company that the Plan, as set forth herein, constitutes an “employee benefit plan” (within the meaning of Section 3(1) of ERISA) that is described in Section 201(2) of ERISA, and so complies only with the requirements of ERISA applicable to such a plan. Notwithstanding anything in this plan to the contrary, the Company further intends that to the extent

-10-

the Plan is subject to Section 409A of the Code, each provision in this Plan shall be interpreted to permit the deferral of compensation in accordance with Section 409A of the Code and any provision that would conflict with such requirements shall not be valid or enforceable.

It is also the intent of the Company that the Plan, as set forth herein, shall comply with Section 111(b) of the Economic Emergency Stabilization Act of 2008 and the related regulatory guidance (“EESA”) as long as said Section applies to the Company and this Plan. For that purpose, if any participant in this Plan is or becomes a “senior executive officer” as defined in said Section, then to the extent that any payment to such Participant under this Plan would constitute part of a “golden parachute payment” that is prohibited under EESA, the benefit payable to the Participant under this Plan shall be reduced to the extent necessary (before any other benefit or payment under any other employee benefit plan or individual agreement) to comply with EESA and preclude any benefit payment prohibited thereunder.

7.8 Captions. The captions of the Plan are not part of the provisions hereof and shall have no force or effect.

7.9 Enforceability. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provisions of the Plan shall not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision of the Plan.

7.10 Withholding. The Company may withhold from any amounts payable under the Plan such Federal, state or local taxes as shall be required to be withheld pursuant to any applicable law or regulation.

7.11 Action by Company or Bank. Any action required or permitted to be taken by the Company or Bank under the Plan shall be by resolution of its Board of Directors, by resolution of a duly authorized committee of its Board of Directors, or by a person or persons authorized by the Company’s or Bank’s charter or by-laws or by resolution of its Board of Directors or such committee.

7.12 Waiver of Notice. Any notice required under the Plan may be waived by the person entitled to such notice.

7.13 Gender and Number. Where the context admits, words in the masculine gender shall include the feminine and neuter genders, the singular shall include the plural, and the plural shall include the singular.

7.14 Evidence. Evidence required of anyone under the Plan may be by certificate, affidavit, document or other information which the person acting on it considers pertinent and reliable, and signed, made or presented by the proper party or parties.

7.15 Form of Notices, Elections, Consents, Etc. To the extent permitted by law, any notice or information given to, or any designation, election or consent made by, a Participant under the Plan may be given or made through such electronic medium (such as an automated telephone system, e-mail, or an internet or intranet web site) as shall be selected by the Company.

-11-

7.16 Named Fiduciary; Administration. The Company is the named fiduciary of the Plan, and shall administer the Plan, acting through the Compensation Committee of the Board, or its delegatee.

7.17 Unfunded Plan Status. This Plan is intended to be an unfunded plan maintained primarily for the purpose of providing deferred compensation for a select group of management or highly compensated employees, within the meaning of Section 401 of ERISA. All payments pursuant to the Plan shall be made from the general funds of the Company and no special or separate fund shall be established or other segregation of assets made to assure payment. No Participant or other person shall have under any circumstances any interest in any particular property or assets of the Company as a result of participating in the Plan. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company may (but shall not be obligated to) create one (1) or more grantor trusts, the assets of which are subject to the claims of the Company’s creditors, to assist it in accumulating funds to pay its obligations under the Plan.

* * *

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned duly authorized member of the Compensation Committee of the Board has caused the foregoing Plan to be executed on behalf of the Company this 29th day of December, 2008.

/s/ MELVIN PEARL

On Behalf of the Compensation Committee as Aforesaid

12

EX-12.1

Exhibit 12.1

Computation of Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges

	For the Years Ended December 31,
	2008			2007			2006			2005			2004
INCLUDING INTEREST ON DEPOSITS
Earnings
Income (loss) before income taxes	$	(132,740	)	$	(5,009	)	$	48,198		$	51,294		$	34,286
Plus:
Total Fixed Charges (See below)		117,663			125,005			112,335			71,696			48,206
Less:
Preferred stock dividend (1)		(3,308	)		—			—			—			(2,885	)
Total Earnings	$	(18,385	)	$	119,996		$	160,533		$	122,990		$	79,607
Fixed Charges
Total interest expense (2)	$	112,097		$	122,354		$	109,808		$	69,202		$	42,830
Interest included in operating lease rental expense (3)		2,258			2,651			2,527			2,494			2,491
Preferred stock dividend (1)		3,308			—			—			—			2,885
Total Fixed Charges	$	117,663		$	125,005		$	112,335		$	71,696		$	48,206
Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges		(0.16	)x		0.96	x		1.43	x		1.72	x		1.65	x
EXCLUDING INTEREST ON DEPOSITS
Earnings
Income (loss) before income taxes	$	(132,740	)	$	(5,009	)	$	48,198		$	51,294		$	34,286
Plus:
Total Fixed Charges excluding interest on deposits (See below)		29,384			27,975			25,069			19,686			16,964
Less:
Preferred stock dividend (1)		(3,308	)		—			—			—			(2,885	)
Total Earnings	$	(106,664	)	$	22,966		$	73,267		$	70,980		$	48,365
Fixed Charges
Total interest expense (2)	$	112,097		$	122,354		$	109,808		$	69,202		$	42,830
Interest included in operating lease rental expense (3)		2,258			2,651			2,527			2,494			2,491
Preferred stock dividend (1)		3,308			—			—			—			2,885
Less: interest expense on deposits		(88,279	)		(97,030	)		(87,266	)		(52,010	)		(31,242	)
Total Fixed Charges excluding interest on deposits	$	29,384		$	27,975		$	25,069		$	19,686		$	16,964
Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges		(3.63	)x		0.82	x		2.92	x		3.61	x		2.85	x

(1) The stock dividend amount has been grossed up to compute the pre-tax income equivalent assuming an estimated 35% tax rate.

(2) Interest expense includes cash interest expense on deposits and other debt and amortization of debt issuance costs.

(3) Calculation of interest included in operating lease rental expense is representative of the interest factor attributable to the lease payment.

EX-21.1

Exhibit 21.1

List of Subsidiaries of Taylor Capital Group, Inc.

Wholly-owned subsidiaries of Taylor Capital Group:

(A) Cole Taylor Bank (1)

(B) CT Mortgage Company, Inc. (2)

(C) TAYC Capital Trust I (3)

(D) TAYC Capital Trust II (3)

Wholly-owned subsidiaries of Cole Taylor Bank:

(A) 1965 Milwaukee Ave. Building Corp. (1)

(B) Cole Taylor Deferred Exchange Corp. (1)

(C) Taylor Capital Business Advisors, Inc. (1)

(D) TCGRE, Inc. (1)

(E) Cole Taylor Insurance Services, Inc. (1)

(F) CT Group, LLC. (4)

(G) BMB Associates I, LLC (5)

(H) RMB Group Associates I, LLC (4)

(I) MBR Group Associates II, LLC (4)

(J) BRM Group Associates III, LLC (4)

(K) MRM Group Associates IV, LLC (4)

(L) RBM Group Associates V, LLC (4)

Notes:

(1) State of Incorporation – Illinois

(2) State of Incorporation – Delaware

(3) Delaware statutory trust

(4) Illinois limited liability company

(5) Delaware limited liability company

EX-23.1

Exhibit 23.1

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT AUDITORS

The Board of Directors

Taylor Capital Group, Inc.:

We consent to the incorporation by reference in the registration statements (Nos. 333-100809 and 333-153159) on Form S-8 and the registration statement (No 333-156337) on Form S-3 of Taylor Capital Group, Inc. of our reports dated March 11, 2009, with respect to the consolidated balance sheets of Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2008 and 2007, and the related consolidated statements of operations, changes in stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2008, and the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2008, which reports appear in the December 31, 2008 annual report on Form 10-K of Taylor Capital Group, Inc.

/s/ KPMG LLP

Chicago, Illinois

March 11, 2009

EX-31.1

Exhibit 31.1

Certification of Chief Executive Officer Pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a) under the Securities

Exchange Act of 1934

I, Bruce W. Taylor, certify that:

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Taylor Capital Group, Inc.;

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-(f)) for the registrant and have:

(a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

(b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

(c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

(d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

5. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing equivalent functions):

(a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

(b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: March 11, 2009

/s/ BRUCE W. TAYLOR

Bruce W. Taylor

Chief Executive Officer

EX-31.2

Exhibit 31.2

Certification of Chief Financial Officer Pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a) under the Securities

Exchange Act of 1934

I, Randall T. Conte, certify that:

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Taylor Capital Group, Inc.;

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-(f)) for the registrant and have:

(a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

(b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

(c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

(d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

5. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing equivalent functions):

(a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

(b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: March 11, 2009

/s/ RANDALL T. CONTE

Randall T. Conte

Chief Operating and Chief Financial Officer

EX-32.1

Exhibit 32.1

Certification of Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer Pursuant to 18 U.S.C.

Section 1350, as Adopted Pursuant to Section 906 of Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002

Pursuant to 18 U.S.C. § 1350, as created by Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the undersigned Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer of Taylor Capital Group, Inc. (the “Company”) hereby certify that:

(i) the accompanying Annual Report on Form 10-K of the Company for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2008 (the “Report”) fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or Section 15(d), as applicable, of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended; and

(ii) the information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

Dated: March 11, 2009	/s/ BRUCE W. TAYLOR
	Bruce W. Taylor
	Chief Executive Officer
Dated: March 11, 2009	/s/ RANDALL T. CONTE
	Randall T. Conte
	Chief Operating and Chief Financial Officer

This certification accompanies this Report pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and shall not be deemed filed by the Company for purposes of Section 18 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

A signed original of this written statement required by Section 906, or another document authenticating, acknowledging or otherwise adopting the signature that appears in typed form within the electronic version of this written statement required by Section 906, has been provided to Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and will be retained by Taylor Capital Group, Inc. and furnished to the Securities and Exchange Commission or its Staff upon request.